Auditronics 210-Series Console System Service and Installation Manual

210-SERIES
CONSOLE
SYSTEM
SERVICE AND INSTALLATION
MANUAL
This manual should be read in its entirety before

attempting ,to install or use this product.
Copyright e 1990
Auditronics, Incorporated
3750 Old Getwell Road
Memphis, Tennessee 38118
1901) 362 - 1350
1901) 365-8629 Facsimile
All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Copyright
No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or trans-
lated into any language, in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of the President
of Auditranics, Inc., 3750 Old Getwell Road, Memphis, Tennessee, 38118
Changes
Auditronics, Inc. makes no representations or warranties whatsoever with respect to the content of this
document and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any par-
ticular purpose. We reserve the right to make alterations as technical progress may warrant at the discre-
tion of Auditronics, Inc. Auditronics, Inc. has no obligation to notify any person or entity of any changes
and lor revisions to this publication. We reserve the right to change materials and specifications without
notice.
Trademarks
210·Series is a trademark of Auditronics, Inc.
Proprietary Information
The information contained in this document is the property of Auditronics, Inc., and is proprietary to and
a trade secret of Auditron ics, Inc. This document and the information contained herein or derived there·
from are not to be disclosed to any person without the express written consent of the President of
Auditronics, Inc.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL •1-2
CONVENTIONS •1-3
Terms .. 1 - 3
HERE'S WHAT YOU'LL FIND INSIDE THIS MANUAL .. , . 1-4
Chapter 2
General Information
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . · .2 - 2
AUDITRONICS PROFESSIONAL AUDIO EQUIPMENT
ONE YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 3
GENERAL .. . . .. . .2 - 3
MANUFACTURER LIABILITY .2 - 3
EXCEPTION .. .2 - 3
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SPECIFICATIONS .2-4
Stereo Line Input .. .... .. . .. . .... . .......... . .

, · .2 - 4
Mono Microphone Input · .2·4
Stereo Program, Stereo Audition and Mono Outputs .2·4
Stereo Control Room and Studio Monitor Outputs · .2 - 4
Stereo Headphone Output · .2·4
Cue Output . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .•• • . . . . . 2 - 4
Overall . .2 - 4
Specifications (cont'd.) .2 ·5
Mains Requirement . · .2·5
SERVICE AND REPAIR . . . • . . . 2·6
Auditronics, Inc. Service and Repair Policy ... .2 - 6
General . . . . . . .2·6
Replacement Parts .2 - 6
Replacement or Addnlonal Modules .. 2 - 6
Troubleshooting Audio .2 - 7
Routine Maintenance . .2 - 7
Standard Spare Pans Kn .2 - 9
Chapter 3
System Installation
INTRODUCTION . • • · ... ... 3 - 2
ENVIRONMENT · . . .....3 - 3
UNPACKING · . . . . ... 3 - 3
GROUNDING .3 - 3
Power Supply Grounds .3 - 3

RF Grounding Problems · .3 - 3
TABLE-TOP MOUNTING .•••• 3 - 4
DIMENSIONS FOR CUTOUTS .3 - 4
210·6 (6·lnput Configuration) . .3 - 4
210-12 (12-lnput Configuration) .....3 - 4
210·18 (18·lnput Configuration) · .3 - 4
210·24 (24·lnput Configuration) .3 - 4
Figure 1, 210-Series Dimensions and Cutout Information. .3 - 5
CRIMPING INSTRUCTIONS · 3-6

Shoning Plugs or Jumpers ...... . ......... . . ... .. . ... . . . . . .... . • . ...3 - 6
INSTALLING THE MAINFRAME · 3-7
INSTALLtNG THE POWER SUPPLY · 3-8

Mounting . . . . . . . . · .3 - 8
Console to Power Supply Interconnection · .3 - 8

Power Supply 10 Mains Interconnection . ..... .. . ..... . . .... . . .. ... , .... .. . . · .3 - 8
Grounding . . , . .... . . , . ., ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . , .3 - 9
AUDIO INTERCONNECTION •••••• 3 - 10
WIRING PROCEDURE . . , . .. . ... .. , .. ... . . . . . .. . ... . .. . . . .. . .

, · 3 -10
A few guidelines: . , . .. . .. , ... ... . .. . . . .. ......... . . 3·10
MICROPHONE INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
/I
Required Tools .. . . . . . . . . 3-11
LINE-LEVEL INTERCONNECTION ......... . · 3 - 11
Requ ired Tools . .. . . .3- 11
OUTPUT INTERCONNECTION . 3- 12
Connec1ion of Audio Signals . · 3 - 12
Power Ampl~ier Interconnec1ion . 3-12
Main Output Interconnec1ion · 3 - 13
Headphone Outputs: . 3- 13
Insert Points: . . . . . .3- 14
Direc1 Outputs: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14
Figure 2, 21O-Series Console Connector Location Map. · . 3 - 15
Figure 3, 21 O-Series System Block Diagram. · . 3 - 16
Chapter 4
210-Series Microphone Input Module - 21 O-MIS
INTRODUCTION • • • • • • • • • •• •••• • •• • . • •• • • • • • . • . • . .4 - 2
Figure 1, Microphone Input Module Signal Flow. . . . • • • •• , , , , , . . , . . . , . . . , .4 - 3
CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW · .4 - 4
1. Input Select ., . .4 - 4
2. Output Ass ign Selectors . , .4 - 4
3 . Pan ." ...... . . . , ,4 - 4
4. VCA Fader , , . , .. . •. , , . .4 - 4
5. Module ON/OFF . . . . . . . , . . . , . • •• ••••• • • • • • , . . , . , . . . . . . . , .4 - 4
Figure 2, 210-MIS Module Front Panel. . , , , . . ... 4 · 4
AUDIO AND LOGIC SIGNALS . . . . 4- 5
Audio Signals .. .4 - 5
Audio Inputs . 4-5
Audio Outputs . 4-5
Logic Signals . . .4 - 6
Logic Inputs . . 4-6
Logic Outputs . 4-6
Figure 3, 21 O-MLI Mic Module Component Locallon Map. .4 - 7
11/
Figure 4, DIP Sw~ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . · .4 - 7
FIELD OPTIONS . . , , . · . 4-B
DIP Sw~ch Configuration · .4 - B
Shoning Plug Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . •• . , , • . , • , , • • · .4 - 8
Phantom Power Connection · .4 - 8
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES , , 4-9
Microphone Gain Adjustment .4 - 9
Alignment Procedure .4 - 9
Chapter 5
210-Series Stereo Line Input Modules - 21 O-SLI and 210-SLB
INTRODUCTION . , , . , , , , . , , . . . . . , .. , , , , , , , , , , , . . . , . . . . . , . . . . • . , , . 5 - 2
Figure 1, Stereo Line Input Module Signal Flow. . . • . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . , . . . . .. . . . . .5 - 3
CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW , .. . , , . , , , , . . . , . , , . , , , , , , ., "" " 5-4
1. Input Select . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . • .. ••• • • • , •• , . . , . . . .. . . . . .5 - 4
2. Output Assign Selectors ..... . .5 - 4
3. Mode Select Sw~ch (SLI Module) .5 - 4
3a. Balance (not shown - SLB Module only) ... 5 - 4
4. VCA Fader · .5 - 4
5. CUE .5 - 4
6. Module ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , , • • • • . • . . .5 - 4
Figure 2, 210·SLI Module Front Panel. .5 - 4
AUDIO AND LOGIC SIGNALS , 5-5
Audio Signals .......... . .5 - 5
Audio Inputs - Audio Ouptuts . 5-5
Logic Signals . . . . . . . . . · .5 - 6
Logic Inputs - Logic Outputs · 5-6
Figure 3, 210 SlI/SLB Module Component Location Map. .5 -7
FIELD OPTIONS , , , . . . . . . . . , . · 5-8
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES '" . , , , 5-9
Input Gain Adjustment .5 - 9
IV
Chapter 6
210-Series Control Room Monitor Module - 210-CRM
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • . . •. 6 - 2
Figure 1. Control Room Mon~or Module Signal Flow. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ...6 - 3
CONTROL AND PUSHBUnON OVERVIEW .6 - 4
1. CUE Level ... · .6 - 4
2. Monitor Select Sw~ch · .6 - 4
3. Speaker On/Off . . . · .. 6 - 4
4. Control Room Level and DIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . ____ . __ . . . . . . . . .6 - 4
5. Headphone EO . . . . . . . . . . _ ... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. • .. ... • . . . . . . 6 - 4
6. Headphone Source Select · .6 - 4
7. Headphone Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . _ . . . 6-4
Figure 2. 210-CRM Module Front Panel. . .. 6 - 4
AUDIO AND LOGIC SIGNALS . . . . . . · .6 - 5
Audio Signals . . . .. .. . • .. . . . . . . .. . • • . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 6 - 5
Audio Inputs .6-5
Audio Outputs . 6-5
Logic Signals . . · .6 - 5
FIELD OPTIONS ....•. 6 - 6
DIM Trim .6 - 6
Chapter 7
210-Series Communications/Studio Monitor Module - 21 O-CSM
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . _ .. _ . . . . . . _ .. • _ . . . 7-2
Figure 1. Communication/Studio Monitor Module Signal Flow .. .7 - 3
CONTROL AND PUSHBunON OVERVIEW . . . • . . • . _ • . . . . . . . . • _ • • . . • . . . _ . • . . . 7 - 4
1. Mon~or Selector Sw~ch . .7 - 4
2. Studio B Select . . . . • •. • •. .. .7 - 4
3. Studio A Select . . .7 - 4
4. "Intercom" Rotary Potentiometer .7 - 4
5. Talk/Studio NStudio B .. .7 - 4
v
Figure 2, 210-CSM Module Front Panel. .. , . , , , .. . 7 - 4
AUDIO AND LOGIC SIGNALS , , , , , , , , , 7-5
Audio Signals ., . .. 7 - 5
Audio Inputs _ 7-5
Audio Outputs 7-5
Logic Signals . . .7 - 5
Chapter 8
210-Series Dual Line Output Module- 21 O-DLO
INTRODUCTION • • • . •• •• • • • • • , ••. •• • ••• • • •. . .... 8 - 2
Figure 1, 210-DLO Dual Line Output Module Signal Flow . .. _ .8 - 3
Figure 2, 21O-DLO, Dual Line Output Module Location Map. .8 - 4
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES . .. . , 8-5
Output Level Se"ings .8 - 5
Insert Points . 8-5

Main Outputs 8-5
Meter Adjust 8-5
Monitor Trim 8-5

PIN ASSIGNMENT . 8-6
PGM Assignment .. . 8 - 6
Figure 3. 21O-Serles Module/Motherboard Assembly. .8 - 6
Audilion .8 - 7
Mono . .8 - 7
VI
Chapter 9
210-Series Universal Timer/Clock Module - 21 O-UTC
INTRODUCTION . • • . . • • • . .. .•• .. •.• ••• ••• .. ••• .. • • • • • • • • .. • .• • .. • 9 - 2
OPERATION • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• •.. • •• .. • 9 - 3
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • • • . . . .9 - 3
Operating the Timer . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • • • •• •••. . . . . . .. 9 - 3
Figure 1, 210-UTC Operation Module. .. .. 9-3
Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9·4
12- or 24-Hour Operation . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . • . .. . • . . . . . • • • ••• •••• ••. . . .. 9 - 4
Figure 2. 210-UTC Module Component Location Map. ... .......... . . ... . ..... . ...... 9 -4
Chapter 10
210-Series Equalizer Modules - 21 O-EQ and 210-PEQ
INTRODUCTION • . • . • • • • . . . . • • • . • • • • • • . • . . . • . • 10 - 2
Figure 1, 210-EQ Component Location Diagram. · . 10 - 3
Figure 2, 210·PEQ Component Location Diagram. · . 10 - 4
CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . • • • • . . • 10 - 5
1. Low Freq., Mid Freq., and High Freq. . . . . .• • . . . . • . ..• . • .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10·5
2. BoosVCut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . •• . •• . . . . . . 10 - 5
3. In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . • • • •• • • ••• . . . 10·5
1. EQP Card Insert (210-PEQ Only) · 10 - 5
2. In/Out .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • .. • • •••. • _ . . . 10 - 5
Figure 3 , 21O-PEQ, Personality EQ Module. . .•••• • • •••• ••• • _ • • _ _ . . . . . . • . . . . .. .. 10 - 5
Figure 4, 210-EQ, Sweep EQ Module. . . . . . . . • • ••• • •• • . • • • • . . . . . . . . . . . · 10 - 5
210-PEQ PERSONALITY EQUALIZER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • .•• • • _ _ . . . . 10 - 6
Specifications .... . . · 10 - 6
EQ Settings (210-PEQ only) .. 10 - 6
210-EQ SWEEP EQUALIZER MODULE ..... · 10 - 7
Spec~ications . . . . • • • . . •• ••• • • . ..•• • •• • • . . . . • . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
INSTALLATION (of either EQ Module) • • • • . • . . • • • • • • • . • • • • . • • • • . . • . • • • . . • • 10 - 8
VII
Chapter 11
210-Series Input Select Modules - 21 0-LS8, ::!.;14, LS1 0-1, -2 and -3
INTROOUCTION • , • • . . • • • , . • • , ••• , •• • , • , •••• , , · 11 - 2
210·LS8 and LS8· 14 Stereo Une Selector Module . .. . • . • •• • • • , • • . . . . . . . . . . . . · 11 ·2
21 O·LS 10·1 , ·2, and -3 Stereo Une Selector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . , • • • • • • • . . . . • . . . • . . . 11 • 2
Figure " 210·LS 10·2 Signal Flow Diagram. . . . . . . . . . • . , . . , . . . . . . . .. , . • . . . . . . . . . . 11 • 3
Figure 2, 210·LS8·2 Signal Flow Diagram. . .. •• •• • • • . . • • .. . . . · 11 ·4
INSTALLATION • . • • • • . • , •••• , •.• ••• , • • • • . • • , 11 - 5
Genera/I nformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . , . . . • • • • • • • . • . • • . . . . . . . . . 11 - 5
Installation Instructions .. . . ...... .. .. .. . . ......... . ....... . . .. . .. . . . . 11 - 5
Retrofn Instructions ..... , ..... .... .. ... .. .. . , ...... . · 11 · 5
Generallnformatlon . . . • • • • • .. • " . . .. .. .. . " ." .. . . . . , . . , . , ' , . " . . . , . 11 • 5.
Installation Procedure ..• •• ••• •• . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ••• • • ••.. .. . . . . . . . 11 • 6
LS 10 Pinouts · 11 • 7
LS8 Pinouts · 11 • 7
Figure 3, 210·LS10 Component Location Diagram. · 11 · 8
Chapter 12
210-Series Tape Remote Modules - 210-TR5 and 210-TR6
INTRODUCTION . , •. ••• •.• , ••• , , , •• , • , .••• , • , , , • , • . •• , ••. 12 - 2
INSTALLATION ,. " •.•• • • " •••• , ., 12 - 3
210-TR5 Connector Pinouts . 12·3
210-TR6 Connector Pinouts . 12·3
Chapter 13
210-Series Mixer Modules - 21 0-U3 and 21 0-MX6
INTRODUCTION , , • • • • . • , • • , • . • • , • • , , • , • , , , , • , . , • 13 - 2
CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW • • • . • • • , • • , • • , • . , • 13 - 3
1. ON/OFF . . . . . . 13 · 3
2. Level . .. . .. .. 13·3
1. PGM . . . . . . . 13·3
2. AUD . 13·3
3. Level . 13 · 3
VIII
4. CUE ......... . · 13 - 3
Figure 1, 21O-MX6 Mono Mixer Module. · 13 - 3
Figure 2, 210-Ll3 Line Level Stereo Mixer Module. . .. . . . . " " . . . 13 - 3
INSTALLATION " . 13 - 4
210-MX6 ... · 13 - 4
MX6 Pinouts · 13 - 4
210-Ll3 . .. · 13 - 4
Ll3 Pinouts . . " " " " . · 13 - 5
Chapter 14
Voice Controller Modules - 21 O-VCP and -VCN
INTRODUCTION . . . " . " " . " " " " " " " " " , " " " 14" 2
Figure 1, 210-VCP, Voice Controller Module Signal Flow. · 14 - 3
CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW · 14 - 4
1. Output Control . · 14 - 4
2. Gain Reduction Display · 14 - 4
3. Ratio Swi1ch (YCP only) · 14 - 4
4. Threshold (Compressor section) · 14 - 4
5. "Signal Muted" LED . .. · 14 - 4
6. Threshold (Noise Gate section) · 14 - 4
7. IN/OUT Push buttons .. . · 14 - 4
8. Ratio Control (yCN only) . · 14 - 4
9. Range Control (yCN only) · 14 - 4
Figure 2, 210-VCP Voice Controller Module. · 14 - 4
Figure 3, 210-VCN Voice Controller MOdule. · 14 - 4
INSTALLATION · 14 - 5
Figure 4, 210-VCP Component Location Diagram. . .. .. ". "" ." " .""" " """ ,,,, ., . • . .• . .. 14 - 6
SETUP AND OPERATION 14 - 7
Noise Gate · 14 - 7
Adjustment 14 - 7
Compressor/Limner . . · 14 - 7
Adjustment 14 - 7
IX
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES • • • • . • • • • . . • • . • • . . . . • • • • • • • • • . . • • • • • • • • . . 14 - 8
Field Alignments . 14 - 8
Noise Gate . 14 - 8
Compressor/Lim~er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . •• • . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 9
CHECKOUT OF THE 210-VCP . • • . . . • . • . . . 14 -10
Chapter 15
210-Series Line Output Selector Module - 21 O-LOS
INTRODUCTION . . • . . • • . • . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . . . . • . . . . · 15 - 2
Figure 1. 21O·LOS. Line Output Selector Signal Flow. . . . • • • •• • . . . . . .. . . . . . . . • • • .. .. 15·3
INSTALUITION . . . . . . . . . · . 15 - 4
INPUT CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 4
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS . 15 - 4
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS .15 - 5
Chapter 16
210-Series Studio Remote Module - 21 O-SRC
INTRODUCTION • . • • • . . . • • . . • • • • . . . • . • • • • • . . . . 16 - 2
INSTALUITION ••••.••••••••••.••••.••. 16 - 3
Figure 1. 210·SRC. Studio Remote Panel Schematic Diagram. . . . . . . .. . . . • •••• • . . . . . . . . . 16 - 3
Chapter 17
210-Series Microphone Control Panel - 21 O-MCP
Introduction . • . • . . . . • . . • • . • • • • • • • . . • • . . . • • • . . . . • . • • . . 17 - 2
Figure 1. 210·MCP Signal Flow Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • ••• • •.• • . . . . . . . . . . • •. .. 17 - 3
INSTALLATION . • • . • • . • • • • . • • . • . • . . . • • • . • • • • • . • • • • • . • . . • . • • • • . . 17 - 4
Retrofn Instructions . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . • • •• • • • •.• •••.. . . . .. .. •. . •• •. · 17·4
Construction of Logic Interconnect Cable . . . . . 17 - 5
Figure 2. 21O·Series Module/Motherboard Assembly. . . . . . . . . 17 - 5
Figure 3. 15·Pln MR Connector Bracket. · 17·5
Interconnection .17 - 6
Figure 4. 210·MCP Module Location Art Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • ••. · 17 - 6
x
Chapter 18
210-Series Microphone Control Mixing Panel - 21 O-MCMP
INTRODUCTION . • . • . • • • . • • • • • . • • • • •• ••• •• •• • .• •••• •• • • • • • • ••• .. 18 - 2
Figure 1, 21 O-MCMP Signal Flow Diagram. . . . . , • • • • • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 3
INSTALLATION • . . . . • • • • • • • •••• • • , •••• ••• •• • • • • . .. 18 - 4
Interconnection · 18 - 4
Figure 2, Schematic, Input Module Interconnection Cable. · 18 - 4
Figure 3, User Connector Bracket. · 18 - 4
Figure 4, 210-MCMP Module Location Art Diagram. · 18·5
Chapter 19
210-Series Monitor Speaker/Headphone Control - 21 O-MSHP
INTRODUCTION . • • • • • • • • • . • • . • • . • • • • • • • . • . • . • . . . 19 - 2
Figure 1, 210-MSHP Signal Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . .. .. . · 19 - 3
CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW • .• • • • • • • •• _ • · . 19 - 4
1. Mon~or Select Sw~ch · 19 - 4
2. Off Pushbutton ... · 19 - 4
3. Headphone Level .. .• .. . . • . . .. • . . . . 19 - 4
4. Mon~or Level . . . . .. . · . 19 - 4
Figure 2, 210-MSHP Module Front Panel. · . 19 - 4
INSTALLATION ••••••.• .•••• . 19 - 5
Figure 3, 210-MSHP Side Board Location Art Diagram. . . . • • . _ . .. . _ •.. _ . .. _ .. . . . . . . . . 19 - 6
Figure 4, 210-MSHP Middle Board Location Art Diagram. · . 19 - 6
Chapter 20
210-Series Telephone Interface Module - 210-TEL
INTRODUCTION . _ . _ . . . _ • • • • • • •• 20 - 2
Figure 1, 210-TEL Signal Flow Diagram. · . 20 - 3
CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW • . . • . • . . . . . . . . . • . • • • • • . . • • • • • . • . • 20 - 4
1. Mon~or Sw~ch · . 20 - 4
2. Send to Caller· · .20 - 4
3. Output Level . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • • . . . • . . . . • ••••. • .. .. 20 . 4
XI
4. Output Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . • . . . . .. • •.. . . . . • ••. _ .. 20 - 4
5. Caller ON, Level, and CUE . . . . _ • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
6. Mic Mix· . . . . . . . • . . _ . . .. . . . . . _ • • • , . .. . • •• . • •• ••.. . .. _ .•• • • • . . . 20 - 4
7. ON/OFF . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 4
B. Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •.. . . . . . . . . . . . • •• • . . . . . .. .. 20-4
Figure 2, 210-TEL Module Front Panel. . . • • •• • . . . • • • • • . • • • • • • • . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . 20 - 4
INSTALLATION . .. .. . .... ... .. . .. . .... . . .... .... ... .. . . . ... . . • . 20 - 5
PI Connector ... ... , .. , . . . . ... . .. .. ... , . .... . ...... . · .. 20 - 5
P2 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • . . _ . . . . . 20 - 5
Figure 3, 210-Series Module/Motherboard Assembly. . .. .. . 20 - 5
P3 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • • • _ • .••• . . . . _ . . • . . . . . . . 20 - 6
P4 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ _ . . . . . . . . . _ . . _ • . . . __ • . _ . . . . . , . _ • . . . _ 20 - 6
Conneclor Pin Assignments . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. _ _ . _ _ • . . . . . . . . . _ . . . 20 - 6
Figure 4, 210-TEL Right PC Board Location Art Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . 20 - 7
Figure 5. 210-TEL Left PC Board Location Art Diagram. · .. 20 - 7
Figure 6. 210-TEL Top PC Board Location Art Diagram. . . 20 - 8 .
Chapter 21
210-Series Relay Interface Module - 21 O-RY2
Informallon . • • • • . . . 21 - 2
PI Connector Pinouts ..• . .. _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2
Chapter 22
21 O-Series Submixer Input Module - 21 O-SMI1
Inlroduction · .22 - 2
Figure 1. 21 O-SMI Module Signal Flow Diagram .. • • ••• • _ • • • • • • • • • . . _ . _ . _ _ • • • . .. . 22 - 3
CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . _ . .. . . •. • . . . . . . . _ . •. . . 22 - 4
1. Gain . • • • • . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 4
2. CUE . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . 22 - 4
3. PWR · .22 - 4
4. Channel ON Pushbutton ... . ....... . · . 22-4
Figure 2, 210-SMI Module - Front Panel. . . • • • • . . . . . • ••••• . . . . . . . . . . . • . •.. . . . . . 22 - 4
XII
Figure 3, 210-SMllnput Module Location Art. . • . . . . . . . . . . 22 · 5
INSTALLATION . . . . . 22·6
Generallnformation . . 22·6
Installation Procedure . 22·6
Retroln Instructions .22·6
General Information . '~" """ " "" """ .22·6
Installation Procedure .. .22·7
Output Interconnection . . . . . • • . . . • . • . . . • , • • . • • • . . • • • • . . . 22 - 7
Remaining Connections . . . . 22·7
Field Options . . . . 22·8
Alignment Procedures . 22· 9
General Information . 22 - 9
Alignment Procedure . 22 · 9
Figure 5, 210·SMllnterconnection Cable (#19426). 22 - 10
210-SMI1 PI CONNECTOR PINOUTS 22 -11
Chapter 23
210-Series Phantom Power Supply - 21 O-PPS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . 23-2
Installation . . . . , 23 - 2
Parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . , . , . . . . . . ... 23 - 2
Figure I, 21O-PPS Schematic Diagram .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 23·3
Chapter 24
PS-60 Power Supply and PSI-60 Power Supply Isolator
PS-60 Power Supply , . •. . . . . , . 24 - 2
PS-60 Spec~ications .. ..•• • • •.•• •• • ••• • • •••••• •. , • ••••• ••••• . . . 24·2
Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . • . , , .. . , . . . . 24·2
PS-60 POWER SUPPLY PARTS LIST •• . • , • 24 - 3
PSI-60 •• , • • • • • . , . , . • . • . • .. , . 24 - 4
XIII
Appendix A
210-Serles Overbridge Installation
INTRODUCTION , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , • , , • , , , , . . . . . . . A· 2
Physical Installation of Overbridge A·3
Securing Cables , . A·3
Figure 1, User Connector Bracket. A·3
Appendix B
210-Series Cable Diagrams
INTRODUCTION • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • B·2
210·MSHP PCB Interconnect Cable, #19281 B·3
210·MSHP User Connection Cable, #19282 , B·4
210·MCP User Connection Cable, #19283 . . . B·5
210·MCP Logic Interconnection Cable , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . •• B·6
210·MCMP User Connection Cable, #19284 B·7

210·MCMP Mlc Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . B·8
I
210·TEL P1 User Connection Cable B·9
210·TEL P2 User Connection Cable , B· 10
210·TEL P3 User Connection Cable . B • 11
210·TEL P4 User Connection Cable ......... . ... . ... . .. . .. ...... . , .. . , B ·12
XlV
Chapter 1
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
PLEASE READ THE NEXT THREE PAGES, EVEN IF YOU DON'T READ ANYTHING ELSE
Many people only read their Service and Installation Manual as a last resort. If you are one of these people, the next
two pages tell you where to find information when you need it.
Read the Introduction section at the beginning of each chapter for information regarding the topics covered therein.
This technical manual covers all configurations of the 21 O-Series Console System, and assumes that the user already
has a good working knowledge of electronic circuitry and maintenance procedures.
Auditronics, Inc. strongly suggest that this manual be read In lis entirely before attempting to Install or use this
product. If, for some reason, this is not possible, at least read Unpacking, In Chapter 3, System Installation, before
taking delivery of your 210-Serles Console System.
Alignment procedures may be found in the Individual chapters where they pertain.
Schematic diagrams and location art for each component may be found at the end of the pertinent chapters. The
diagrams in this manual do not carry page numbering, allowing them to be removed without interruption of paglna.
tion. Atthough they are not marked as such, the reverse sides of these diagrams have Intentionally been lett blank.
For parts and technical support, cali Auditronlcs ' Customer Service Department in MemphiS, Tennessee, from 8:00
AM to 5:00 PM (central time), weekdays at (901) 362· t350.
1 ·2 Introduction
CONVENTIONS
The following conventions are used within the text throughout this technical manual:
Page Numbering. The pages in this document are numbered according to chapter number and page number. For ex-
ample, a reference to page '3 - 10' means Chapter 3, Page 10.
Bold type is used each time a new term or feature is introduced and defined within each chapter.
Italic type Is used when referring to headings of other areas within this publication, or to the titles of other manuals or
documents, or to figure numbers of diagrams.
Shading is used to isolate and highlight certain parts of a diagram while still showing the complete entity In perspec-
tive.
Terms
Throughout this publication there is liberal usage of the terms Input and Output. These terms are defined as follows:
• Input: Refers to an input of either an external piece of eqUipment or of the 21 O-Series Console System. The
specific Input referred to at any given time (210 or external device) will be defined.
• Output: Refers to an output of either an external piece of equipment or of the 210-Series Console System. The
specific output referred to at any given time (210 or external device) will be defined.
• Press: Refers to a momentary (non -interlocking) pushbutton.
• Depress : Refers to an interlocking pushbutton.
• CW and CCW: Refers to clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation of a trimpot.
Any comments about or suggestions for improving this document are appreciated. Please forward any remarks to:
Auditronics, Inc.
MemphiS, TN 38118
Attn: Manager, Technical Publications
The Information in this manual is subject to change. While every effort has been made to eliminate errors, the com-
pany disclaims liability for errors or for difficulties arising from interpretation of the information contained herein.
Introdu ction 1-3

HERE'S WHAT YOU'LL FIND INSIDE THIS MANUAL. ..
• Chapter 1 contains basic information conco/n ina the use of this manual, general writing conventions, (... and, of
course, this tist) .
• Chapter 2 contains information concerning how to contact the Audilronics Customer Service Department, the
Audilronics limited warranty, general specifications and characteristics of your 21 O·Series Console System, Infor-
mation about AudHronics' service and repair policies in cluding rep lacement parts and modules. Also included In
Chapter 2 are some notes on troublestlooling aud io problems and routine maintenance.
• Chapter 3 contains a complete technicat tutori al dealing with all aspects at com missioning your 21 O-Series Con-
sole System, including preparation of a sui table area for your console, environmental requirements. unpacking,
various interconnections, configurations and options ..
• Chapter 4 contains intormation on the 21O-MIS Microphone Input Module and related procedures, including
diagram, control and pushbutton overview, audio and logic assignments, fie ld options, alignment procedures,
specifications and schematic diagrams.
• Chapter 5 contains intormation on th e 21O-SLI and 210-SLB Siereo Line Inpul Modules and related procedures,
including diagram, control and pushbullon overview, audio and logic assignmenls, lield options, alignment pro-
cedures, speci tications and schematic diagrams.
• Chapter 6 contains information on the 21 O·CAM Control Room Monitor Module and related procedures, Includ-
ing diagram, control and pushbutton overview, audiO and logic aSSignments, fi eld options, specifications and
schematic diagrams.
• Chapter 7 contains intormation on the 21O-CSM Communications/Studio Monitor Module and re lated proce-
dures, including diagram, control and pushbutton overview, audio and logic assignments, specifications and
schematic diagrams .
• Chapter 8 contains intormation on the 21 O-OLO Dual Line Output Module and related procedures, including
diagram, audio assignments, pin aSSignmen ts, alignment procedures, and schematic diagrams.
• Chapter 9 contains intormation on the 210 Timer/Clock Module and related procedures, including diagram,
operating instructions ..
• Chapter 10 conta ins intormation on th e 21 O-E O and -PEO Equalizer Modules and related procedures, inctuding
diagram, audio assignments, pin aSSignments, installation instructions, alignment procedures, and schematic
diagrams.
• Chapter 11 contains intormation on th e 21 O-LS Series Line Input Selector Modules and re lated procedures, in-
cluding diagram, audio aSSignments, pin assignments, installation instructions, and schematic diagrams.
• Chapter 12 contains intormation on the 210-TRS and -TR6 Tape Remote Control Modules and related proce-
dures, including diagram, audio assignments, pin aSSignm en ts, installation Instructions, alignment procedures,
and schematic diagrams.
• Chapter 13 contains intormati9n on IIle 2to-Ll3 ond -MX6 Mixer Modules and related procedures, including
diaaram, atldio assionrnants, pin ilS5i~JIIIlWI11~; , illstallation illSlltlCliollS, aliOllmolll Illoc8clures, and schematic
diag(anls.
• Chapter 14 contains information on the 210-VCP Voice Controller Module and related procedures, including
diagram, auclio assignments, pin assignrmm ts, installalion instructions, alignment procedures, and schematic
diagrams.
• Chapter 15 contains intormation on IIle 21O ·1.0S line Ou tput Selector Module anel relatecl procedures, including
diagram, installation instructions, input and ou tput connections, and scllematic diagrams.
• Chapter 16 contains intormation on the 210-SRC Studio Remote Module and related procedures, including
diagram, audio aSSignments, pin aSSignments, installation instructions, and schematic diagrams.
• Chapter 17 contains intormation on the 21D-MCMP Microphone Control Mixing Panel and related procedures in-
cluding diagram, logic assignments, pin assiUIHllents, inst allution tJml cable builclinn instructions, and schematic
diagrams.
• Chapter 18 contains intormation on the 2tO-MCP Microphone ContrOl Panel and related procedures including
diagram, audio assignments, pin aSSignments, installation and cable building instructions, and schematic
diagrams.
• Chapter 19 contains infOl"malion on tl1e 210 MSHP Monitor SpeCJkcr/Headpllone ContrOl Panel and related pro-
cedures inCluding diagram, audiO aSSignments, pin aSSignments, installation and cable building instructions, and
schematic diagrams.
• Chapter 20 contains information on the 21O-TEL Telephone Interiace Module and related procedures Including
diagram, audio assignments, pin aSSignments, ins tallation and cable building instructions, and schematic
diagrams.
1 - 4 Introdu ction
• Chapter 21 contains Information on the 210·RY2 Re lay Intertace Module and related information including con-
nector pinouts and schematic diagram.
• Appendix A contains general Information regarding the physical installation of the 210 Overbridge.
• Appendix B contains diagrams of the commonly used cables, both internal and external, found In the 210-Serle5
Console System. Each diagram Includes pinouts, color code (if applicable, length, and is labelled with the actual
purpose of the cable.
Int roduction 1·5

This Page Intentionally Left Blank
1 ·6 Introduction
Chapter 2
General Information
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on your purchase of one of the most advanced audio mixing consoles available today, The
Auditronics, Inc, Model 21 O-Series of consoles represents an excellent combination of today's 'high technologies'
and over 15 years of experience In the design and manufacture of professional audio systems,
As you proceed through the manual, should you encounter what you believe to be an error or discrepancy in the
manual, or if you desire additional guidance in the installation or operation of your console, please do not hesitate to
contact us to bring the matter to our attention,
Please enjoy using your 210",
Customer SeNlce Department

Audltronics, Inc,
MemphiS, TN 38118
(901) 362-1350
2 - 2 Gcncr'<tllnrormation
AUDITRONICS PROFESSIONAL AUDIO EQUIPMENT
ONE YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY
GENERAL
Audltronics, Inc. warrants its products to the original purchaser, and, limited to the original installation, to be free from
defects In material and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the registered Installation date. If proper
warranty registration has not been completed or is not applicable, warranty shall begin 30 days from date equipment
Is shipped from the factory .
MANUFACTURER LIABILITY
Auditronlcs' liability Is limited to the repair or replacement of defective parts at no charge to the owner when shipped
F.O.B. factory and only when parts are proven to be defective in material and workmanship by Inspection at the fac-
tory.
EXCEPTION
This warranty does not apply to any materials or workmanship supplied by others in the process of Instal1ing
Auditronlcs-manufactured eqUipment, nor does it apply to any Auditronics unit not installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.
This Auditronics warranty does not cover damage to eqUipment caused by fire, flood, external water, excessive cor-
rosion, acts of God, misuse, or abuse.
No person of company is authorized to make warranties or exceptions to this warranty or assume any other liabl1itles
on beha~ of the manufacturer In connection with its product.
General Info rmation 2 - 3

ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SPECIFICATIONS
Stereo Line Input

Source Selectable from A or B Input
Source Impedance: · . . . . . . 600 Ohms, nominal

Input Impedance: · . . . . . 50K Ohms, balanced
Active Differential
Input Level: . . . . . . . . . . . · -12dBm to +B dBm, adjustable
Input Headroom: . . . . . . · 20dB over Nominal Input Level
CMRR: .. .• . . . . . . . . . . . BOdB 20Hz to 20kHz
Mono Microphone Input
Source Selectable from A or B Input
Source Impedance: . . . 150 Ohms, nominal

Input Impedance: I K Ohms, 20Hz to 20kHz, balanced
Active Differential
Input Level: . .. . • • . . . • • . • • . . . -65dBm to -IOdBm, adjustable
Input Headroom: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22dB over Nominal Input Level
CMRR: . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . BOdB 20Hz to 20kHz
Stereo Program, Stereo Audition and Mono Outputs
Load Impedance: . · 600 Ohms, Nominal
Output Impedance: · 60 Ohms, balanced
Output Level: . . . . +BdBm Nominal, adjustable
+24dBm Maximum Output
Stereo Control Room and Studio Monitor Outputs

Load Impedance: · 600 Ohms, Nominal
Output Impedance: .600 Ohms, balanced
Active Differential
Output Level: . . . . . . . . . . OdBm Nominal
+24 dBm Maximum Output
Stereo Headphone Output
Load Impedance: · . . . . . . . B Ohms or Greater
Output Level: . .2 Watt s per Channel, Maximum
Cue Output
Output Level: · . 4 Watts, Maximum
into Built-In Speaker
Overall
Frequency Response: .. . . . . . 20Hz to 20kHz, +0/-1 dB
at +BdBm Output Level, Mic or Line
Input to Program or Audition Output.
2 - 4 Gene ral Inrorma tion

Specifications (cont'd.)
SIN Ratio, Mic In to Prog. or Aud. Out: 78.5dBu or -128.5dBu equivalent inpul noise,
20Hz to 20kHz, with 150 Ohms
Source Impedance, gain of 50dB.
SIN Ratio, Line In to Prog. or Aud. Out: · . . . . . . 85dB, 20Hz to 20kHz,
wilh 600 Ohms Source Impedance,
+4 dBm input, +8dBm oUlput.
Dist. (THO) Mlc In to Prog. or Aud. Out at +24dBm: .. .05% at 1kHz; .1% 20Hz to 20kHz.
Dlst (1M) Mlc or Line In to Prog. or Aud. Out at +24dBm: · . . . . . . . .. .05% SMPTE.
Crosstalk (Mlc or Line Input) : . . . · Prog. Left Out to Prog. Right Out
1kHz; better than 74dB below nominal
20kHz; better than 63dB below nominal.
Isolation between Program and Audition Outpuls: . . . 80dB 20Hz to 20kHz
Mains Requirement
115 or 230 VAC ± 10%, SO/60Hz (specify at time 01order).
NOTE: Specifications subject to change without notice. All above specifications taken on a 12-input console, other
configurations will differ accordingly. Auditronlcs, Inc. reserves the right to change specifications for product improve-
ment without Incurring obligation to Incorporate such chang es into previously manufactured products.
Level Measurement References:
OdBu = 0.775VAC RMS, no load specified
-dBm = 0.775VAC RMS, measured across 600 Ohms (1 milliwatt)
Gene ral lnro rmation 2 - 5

SERVICE AND REPAIR
Auditronics, Inc. Service and Repair Policy
General
The material In this section is provided for use as a guide in locating system malfunctions. Neither by Implication nor
statement does this in any way modify Auditronics' published warranty policies.
During the warranty period, covered repairs should be made only by the factory. Covered repairs can only be per-
form ed under the terms of the warranty. Auditronics' Customer Service Department should be consulted Immediately
if there is any requirement for warranty service.
For non-warranty repairs, the user has the option of returning products to either the dealer or the factory. Return
authorization must be obtained before returning any products to the factory. Return authorization may be obtained by
calling:
AUDITRONICS CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT
(901) 362-1350
Please have the following information available when you call:
1. Console model number and console serial number (located on identification plate under the meter turret tid).
2. Module model number and seriat number.
3. A brief but accurate description of the problem.
4. Your return shipping address, a telephone number where you may be reached if we require further Information, and
any additional instructions you may have.
Repair items should be sent to the factory with freight pre-paid. Completed repairs will be returned C.O.D. by the ship-
ping method you request. If you cannot accept a C.O.D., we recommend that you return your product to an
authorized dealer with appropriate arrangements for billing.
Replacement Parts
All components used are, whenever pOSSible, standard items of general availability. Auditronlcs, Inc. maintains a
reasonable stock of replacement parts. Your parts orders will be handled by the Customer Service Department.
1. TURN CONSOLE POWER OFF BEFORE REMOVING ANY MODULEI Removing modules with the console
powered up may result in damage which will not be covered by your warranty.
2. Remove the screws which hold the module in the console mainframe.
3. Insert the puller into module screw holes and lift upright.
4. Pull upward to remove module, taking care to grasp module as it clears the mainframe to avoid dropping it.
Replacement or Additional Modules

Perhaps the best design feature of your Auditronics, Inc. console is that modules may be easily replaced, or the con-
sole expanded through additional modules. With very few exceptions, all modules and accessories are 'pluggable",
I.e., they need only be plugged in to be operational.
In the event that extended 'down time' is unacceptable within your organization, you may wish to maintain a stock of
spare modules. By keeping one of each type of input, output, and monitor modules direclly on hand, you may avoid
the down time necessary for your dealer to provide you with a loaner module.
2·6 General Information

Your orders for replacement or additional modules will be handled by the Customer Service Department. In order that
we may best serve you, please have the following information available when you call:
1. Console model number and serial number (located on identification plate under the meter turret lid) .
2. The catalog number, name, and description of the module or accessory you desire.
Audltronics Customer Service Department

(901) 362-1350
We will provide basic information over the telephone as to operational features, installation needs, etc. documentation
will be included with the shipment of the items. Naturally, should you have additional questions when you receive
your new items, we will be happy to assist you however we can.
Modules and accessories will be shipped C.O.D. (unless prepaid) by the method you request. If you cannot accept a
C.O.D. order, we recommend that you order through one of our dealers, with appropriate arrangements for billing.
Troubleshooting Audio
Always refer to the operations guide as a first step in resolving any problem with the console. It Is our experience that
many of the calls we take concerning problems experienced by customers are directly related to an operational prob-
lem rather than a failure.
If one signal path failS, the fault can usually be rapidly localized wililin a module by simple signal tracing using the
console functional block diagram (signal flow) located at the end of Chapter 3.
If the problem appears to be in an input module, or any other module type which Is duplicated In the console, Inter-
change the suspect module with one operating properly. If the problem remains at the position, the module
suspected Is not at fault. If the problem moves with the module, the suspect module is the source of difficulty. NOTE:
Always turn off the console power before removing or Inserting modules or accessories.
Routine Maintenance
Before removing any module(s) or making adjustments to anything other than the top panel controls, it Is recom-
mended that you review both the Installation and Operation Guides . Before beginning Signal tracing or other service
procedure, It is best to be sure that the difficulty is not an Installation or operational error.
If difficulty Is encountered immediately after Installation or after any changes to the audio system, please review the in-
stallation procedures carefully. The problem is more likely the result of a wiring error rather than a malfunction.
As components age, some changes In performance may become evident. If In doubt, your dealer Is your best source
of field support and can verify performance.
Lamp replacement In VU Meters will depend on the specific meter used when your console was manufactured. In the
over 15 years that Auditronics, Inc. has been building professional audio products, we have used several meter
manufacturers. Please contact your dealer's service department if you experience difficulty changing lamps In the VU
MeterSlnYOUrCOnsole· If~i.~ Lj ~ L/n "" #376 60" ' ~(L'''C.LI'':I:)
Instructions for replaCing the lamps in the Input Module ON and OFF switches follows: : -fo31fr:; L Or16'ft{ LI F£
1. Remove plastiC lens by placing fingernails in the indentations on the two long sides of the lens and pull up.
2, A small tab may be seen next to the lamp; lifting it will pop the lamp from its socket.
3. Upon inserting a new lamp, snap the lens back into place.
If fading of the silk-screened artwork on the top channel occurs, this is most likely due to softening of the Inks from
finger oils deposited as the console Is used. It Is recommended that a mild cleaning solution be used on a lint-free rag
to clean the top channels of dirt, finger oils, and other marks on a regular basis. The appearance of the console may
be maintained in 'like new' condition with regUlar care, NOTE: Always apply cleaning solutions to the rag, never pour
directly on any part of the console.
Gcnerallnfo rmalion 2·7

2 ~ 8 General Inrormation
Chapter 3
System Installation
INTRODUCTION
This section of the manual presents the factory-recommended procedures and methods for Installing a 210-Series
Console System. Topics covered In this chapter include: preparation for drop-through table/counter top mounting, un-
packing, console environment, how to mount your power supply system, power supply environment, console to
power supply Interconnection, and power supply to mains power interconnection.
Also included is information concerning microphone audio interconnection, stereo line Input audio Interconnections,
and control room/studio monitor/power amplifier interconnection,
NOTE: As with any piece of electronic equipment, all physical installation, wiring and connections should be per-
formed with the main power cord unplugged from the mains and the power OFF!
3·2 210-Scrics System Installation

ENVIRONMENT
The environment required for the operation of the 21 O-Series Console System is no more restrictive than that of any
other complex piece of electronic equipment. Temperature and humidity, when kept within a range suitable for
humans, should not be a problem for the 21 O. Caution should be exercised, however, if it should become necessary
to move the unit through extremes of temperature. In such a case, a sudden temperature change from cold to hot
could cause condensation in and on a cold unit. This circumstance should definitely be avoided.
There are atmospheric contaminants in many localities that can reduce the life of electrical contacts. If this is a par-
ticularly severe problem for you, it is suggested that arrangements be made to improve the environment in your
facility.
Your 210-Series Console, like any other fine piece of electronic equipment, should be protected from dust, dirt,
ashes, smoking materials, smoke, liquids, etc. Anything other than pure, clean air of proper temperature and humidity
will shorten the life of the components Inside your 210.
UNPACKING
The 210-Series Console System should not be removed from its shipping carton(s) except by the service technician
who is installing it, or by his authority. Upon delivery and prior to signing the receiving documents, be sure to Inspect
all cartons and note any exterior damage. Exterior damage, if found , should be noted on the receiving documents, In-
quiry should be made of the carrier about concealed damage rulos. Tho commissioning service technician should be
Immediately Informed of the arrival of the unit and also of the conceated damage ru les of the carrier. This silipment
left the factory undamaged. Auditronics' responsibility for any loss or damage ends when the shipment is delivered to
you or to your carrier at our shipping dock. Loss or damage occurring after we deliver the shipment to the carrier is
your responsibility, notwithstanding the fact that Aud itronics, Inc., may have provided insurance coverage on the ship-
ment at an additional charge to you. You must file all claims, although we stand ready to assist you in the preparation
and filing of said claim. It is suggested that the shipping carton be moved as close as possible to the installation loca-
tion prior to unpacking. This ensures the maximum protection for the unit and its components when being moved.
Your 21 O-Series Console System is Shipped With:

• Console (configured to your specifications) and power supply(ies)
• Installation kits generally Including: Mating connectors and pins, a crimping tool, and a pin extractor
• This manual
GROUNDING
Power Supply Grounds

As shipped from the factory, the 210 Power Supply (PS-60) has its third pin of the AC cord tied to the power supply
chass is. NOTE: If the third wire power ground is not desired, it is the customer's responsibility to modify as needed.
RF Grounding Problems
In very intense RF fields, RFI coupling through the ground circuit may occur if ground wires or signal cables are cut to
the transmitter frequen cy wavelength, or an odd muttiple thereof. Assuming proper ground system design and Installa-
tion, this would be evidenced by RF interference dominated by one nearby station. This situation may be alleviated by
trimming cables and ground wires to non-resonant length and as short as possible.
All other Input and output shields are hard-grounded at the external equipment end only. shields terminating at the
console are connected to the console ground plane through a capacitor mounted In the console, thus providing a
low Impedance RF path to ground while preventing a DC ground loop path.
210-Scries System Installation 3 - 3

TABLE-TOP MOUNTING
The following guidelines are Intended to assist in mounting your 210-S eries Console System Into a table or counter-
top.
The 210-Series Console Is constructed In such a manner that the front and sides have an overhang of 3/4" (I.Scm).
This allows the console to rest in a cutout of the proper dimensions in a counter-top or table.
AlI210-Serles consoles measure 22.25" (56. Scm) in depth but vary in width, according to the specific mainframe size.
In addition, all consoles extend 6.5" (16.Scm) below the above-mentioned overhang. Of course, the actual extension
wil l vary depending upon the thickness of the table top.
It is recommended that the table top be constructed of solid wood with a minimum thickness of 3/4" (preferably
more). or if particle board is used, a minimum of 3/4" pius a plastic laminate (Formica) surface for additional strength.
In its heaviest configuration, a 210-Series console may weigh In excess of 160 pounds, therefore, extreme care is re-
quired in the construction of the furniture. It may be advantageous for the area in front of the table top cutout to be
removeable so the console may be slid into place rather than lowered (see Installing fhe Mainframe, immediately fol-
lowing) .
The meterbridge on the 210 Is hinged, allowing It to be opened for access to the meters, clock/timer, cue
speaker/amplifier, J!lQ. When open, the maximum extension to the rear is approximately an additional 4 Inches, totall-
ing approximately 26 inches. It is advisable to leave sufficient clearance above and behind the console so that the
cover may be opened fully for such access.
DIMENSIONS FOR CUTOUTS
210-6 (6-lnput Configuration)

The cutout dimensions for the 6-lnput configuration of the 210 are 23.5" (SS.7cm) in width (left to right) and 21 .5"
(S4.6cm) in depth (front to rear) . The unit requires 6.5" (16.Scm) below the surface of the table or counter and Is 13.5"
(34.28cm) In overall height (16.5 inches when meterbridge cover is extended fully upward) . Overall console width is
24.38' (61 .Scm) and actual depth is 22.25" (S8.Scm).

The cutout dimensions for the 12-lnput configurati on of the 2tO are 34" (86.4 cm) In width (len to right) and 21.5'
(S4.6cm) in depth (front to rear). The unit requires 6.5" (16.Scm) below the surface of the table or counter and Is 13.5"
(34.28cm) in overall height (16.5 inches when meterbridge cover is extended fully upward). Overall console width Is
34.88" (88.6cm) and actual depth is 22.25" (S8.Scm) .

The cutout dimensions for the 18-lnput configuration of the 210 are 43" (10S.2cm) in width (left to right) and 21.5'
(S4.6cm) In depth (front to rear). The unit requires 6.5" (16.Scm) below the surface of the table or counter and Is 13.5'
(34.28cm) In overall height (16.5 Inches when meterbridge cover is extended fully upward). Overall console width Is
43.88" (61 .Scm) and actual depth is 22.25" (S8.Scm).

The cutout dimensions for the 24-lnput configuration of the 210 are 52' (132.1 cm) in width (left to right) and 21.5"
(S4.6cm) in depth (front to rear) . The unit requires 6.5" (16.Scm) below the surface of the table or counter and Is 13.5'
(34.28cm) In overall height (IS.Slnches when meterbrldge cover Is extended fully upward) . Overall console width Is
52.88" (I 34.3cm) and actual depth Is 22.25" (S8.Scm). NOTE: The module/motherboard assembly on the 210-24 does
not hinge, so bottom access Is required for wiring.
3 ·4 210-Serics System Jnstallalion

'MOrH CIIt.I£H5I(1N' . 7~" ( 1.9 .... )
.. con 210- 6 • 12.18· (~I em)
~
.. OO(L 210-!1 - 33. la" (5 ~.8 em) ALL I..tOOElS
~~r:: ~:t~~ : m:: H~~ ::l 2U~" (~ . $ ..... )
~ ~rn~~ ~~
_I I
SOIIU 21 0
l
7.00"" (11.78
,
I _L
, ,
,.j ,.,~"J
.,
(2. ~
+
I.W (3
""'?- J'
/'" «II) 0lA. enol
K.o.ot'IIONI: J ..o<, If) P'~

---_. .. . -
-;:::;;:-J."
. _ •• 1 I -..
! .~ . loa . ...1 00 ....
r;. mr ~lIr"f IItA'<; -~\1
13.00' (33.0 .... )
fRONT \flEW 20 . ~" (52.1 ... )
t.400El 2 ! 0 -1 2
NOD(l
210 - 6
. j
n,
OlMENSION
.'
!)9.7 em
om
(109 .2 em
210 -
2 10 - 2i
18
"" In.1 em
p..., DESK TOP CUTOU T DIMENSIONS

1'0 ,\ ,
'V r
Figure 1, 210-Series Dimensions and Cutout Information.
210-Sl!rics Sy!Otem Instal lation 3 - 5

CRIMPING INSTRUCTIONS
1. Strip wire approximately 3/1 6". Insert wire into proper stripping die, rotate tool one-half turn, and pull Insulation off of
wire.
2. Leaving wire aside for the moment, with tool fully open (engraved side toward user), bring a terminal into position
from the unmarked side of the tool. Place the conductor tabs on the B anvil (slightly curved surface) so that the cir-
cular portion of the tabs rests in the curved surface of the anvil and the two tabs face up into the walls of the female
jaw.
3. Close tool very slightly, only to the point of holding the terminal (pin) in position.
4. Insert wire Into pin until wire insulation Is stopped by conductor tabs. Crimp by squeezing handles until jaws are
fully closed of sufficient crimp is made. Do not remove from tool.
5. Move terminal and conductor forward so that insulation tabs are properly positioned in the center of anvil A. Crimp
again until jaws are closed or sufficient crimp is made.
~ . If necessary, straighten pin while still held in jaw. The wire lead, with its properly crimped pin, Is now ready to be In-
serted and locked Into the nylon connector housing. When correctly inserted, a click can be feil (and even heard), In-
dicating that the locking ears have been set. It is not normally necessary to pull back on the lead itself to test the
locking feature, but if it must be done, use only a moderate pull.
7. If there Is an Insertion error or if a circuit change is needed, use the black-handled extractor tool supplied with the In-
stallation kit to remove the pin which was erroneously inserted.
Shorting Plugs or Jumpers

In many cases, leads are required to "jumper' one pin to another within a single connector. Many are already In place
on the console. For example, the "B" Connector on a MIS position In the module/motherboard assembly. If additional
jumpers are required, such as for Phantom Power, simply crimp pins (according to instructions above) on either end
of a short lead and Insert these pins into the proper receptacles in the shell.
In some cases, a jumper from one receptacle may need to go to two destinations. Simply insert both leads into one
pin for the source, and the single ends into the remaining pins to form a "Y" plug.
3 ~ 6 210-Scries System Installation

INSTALLING THE MAINFRAME
Once the appropriate area Is prepared, the console may be physically installed. The following tools are required for
this procedure:
Wire strippers
Crimping tool
Heat-shrink tubing
Heat gun
Soldering Iron and rosin-core solder (optional)
4-6" flat tip screwdriver
At feast two people will be required to lift the console and lower it into Ihe table-top cutout. To lift the console, first
open the meterbridge cover. Approaching the console from the sides, one hand may be placed along the bottom
edge of the wood trim on the side, toward the armrest, and the other Inserted down Into the meter turret, with the
fingers gripping the console through one of the ventilation holes immediately beneath the meters. NOTE: If the
armrest area Is gripped, It should be done In such a manner that the metal lip beneath the armrest carries part of the
load along with the wood. If only the wood part of the armrest is gripped, the module/motherboard assembly will
open, possibly causing damage, personal Injury, or both.
The console may now be carried to the cutout and carefully lowered in.
With the console In place and tile meter turret top open, tl19 module/motherboard assembly may be lifted Into Its vertl-
cal Installation position, If desired. This Is done by lifting the armrest. The entire assembly will lift open and when fully
extended, It will lock In an upright position via a spring pin located near the hinge.
NOTE: The module/motherboard assembly of the Model 210-24 is bolted in place and does not flip up, primarily due
to the weight. Removeable panels have been provided In the bottom pan of the console to provide access.
WARNINGII Be sure that the module/motherboard assembly is securely locked In the UP

position. Serious injury can result if the assembly is accidentally closed while hands or
finqers are inside the console shell.
At this point, the Installer should refer to the console connector drawing and the console connector pinout drawing lo-
cated In the reference drawing section. A separate installer'S view sketch should be made up showing all of the
console's Input position aSSignments, I.e., wh ich ones are mic inputs and which are line Inputs. With these three draw-
Ings In hand, the Installer should plan his/ her cable runs and cable entries into the console mainframe. All cables will
enter via the 1.5" holes at the bottom rear of the mainframe. The connectors may be removed by squeezing the lock-
Ing tabs on either side of the connector with the thumb and forefinger while pulling backward. The strain relief should
then be removed by unscrewing Its relalner screw. The connector pins shipped with the console should be located
and brought to the mainframe, along with any wire markers that are to be used. Cable preparation and pin installation .
may now begin.
Only new, unspliced cable should be used In connecting the console. Power supply connections may be made with
the factory-wired and -supplied power supply Inlerconnect cable. If, for any reason, the power supply Interconnect
cable Is not long enough, it Is recommended that an entirely new cable be made up of the correct length, instead of
tlYlng to add an extension to the existing cable. Stranded PVC insulated conductors rated at 600 volts should be
used; #20 AWG or larger.
210-Scrics System Installation 3-7

INSTALLING THE POWER SUPPLY
Mounting
The Model PS-60 power supply Is designed to mount In a standard 19' equipment rack, and requires 5.25 inches (3
rack spaces) of vertical space. As the 210-Series console features regulalion on each module, the PS-60 supplies the
console with unregulated ± 24VDC, reducing ventilallon requirements for the PS-60.
Prior to installing the PS-60 , the manner of system grounding must be determined (see Grounding, earlier In this sec-
lion) . If the power ground of the PS-60 is to be opened, the bottom panel of the supply should be removed (only with
the supply unplugged) . An B-pln Molex connector (J3) Is located immediately adjacent to the power transformer; at-
tached are a 6-pin and a 2-pin plug. The 2-pin plug is attached to the 6-pin plug with a tie wrap. Remove the 2-pln
plug to open the PS-60 ground. Do not disconnect the ground wire from the power cord; this will defeat the supply's
RFI filler network. Also note that if the PS-60 is mounted in a metal rack with other equipment which is directly con-
nected to the power ground, the removal of the around Jumper plug will have no effect, provided that the rack Is
grounded.
'The PS-60 Is factory -configured for 115VAC. If 230VAC operalion is required, remove the bottom cover (only with the
power supply unplugged from the mains outlet) and locate J1. This is an B-pin connector found at the lower left
corner of the PC board, labeled "115V and 230V". Simply remove the 4-pin connector from Pins 5-B and replace it on
Pins 1-4.
After replacing the cover, the unit may be mounted in the equipment rack and plugged into the mains oullet. Turn the
supply ON and verify the ±24VDC output at the accessory terminal strip on the rear of the supply (J5). NOTE: This Ini-
tial reading should be made before making the console to power supply interconnections. In this situallon, the vol-
tages may be as high as ±2BVDC. tf the output is will1in this range, turn the supply OFF and connect the supplied
power cable to the power supply and console.
Console to Power Supply Interconnection

The Auditronics 210-Series Console System comes with a prepared power cable (Part Number 19045) which is 15
feet (4.572 meters) long and terminates with two 15-pin MR connectors. Both connectors are identical and pinned
properly so that either end may be used for the console or the power supply.
To Install the power cable, first, open the moctilio/motherboard assembly by lifling the wooden armrest. As per the
warning earlier In this chapter, be sure that the module/motherboard assembty Is securely locked In the UP posi-
tion. Serious Injury can result If the assembly Is accidentally closed while hands or fingers are Inside the con-
sole shell.
Using the Console Connecfor Location drawing at the end of this chapter, locate the Power Connector. As viewed
from the front of the console with the module/motherboard assembly open, it is immediately to the right of the hlghest-
numbered input posilion. nearest Row 'A'. Feed the power cable through the nearest 1.5" access hole In the bottom
of the console and plug It Into the Power Connector.
NOTE: Do not plug the power supply into the mains oullet until alter the power supply to console Interconnection has
bsen made. Now, attach the opposite end of the powe r cable 10 the 15·pln connector (J4) on the rear of the power
supply.
Power Supply to Mains Interconnection

The majority of noise problems encountered in the installalion of an audio console may be avoided simply by having
a properly grounded system and properly interconnecting the mains of the system. The power supply for the 210-
Series system requires a dedicated mains oullet in good condition. This oullet should be capable of providing 2 kVA
of power with regulation adequate to prevent the mains voltage from dropping more than 10% below the stated volt-
age selected for the supply.
3 - 8 210-Se rics System Installation

Grounding
A properly grounded system shoul d be:
1) run on heavy-gauge copper wire, not on conduit.

2) free from corrosion at its connections.
3) routed by a direct path to the mains distribution panel.
4) connected to a mains earth known to present a low resislance to earth.
A quiet, effective audio system will usually possess the following characteristics:
1) A mains power distribution panel In or adjacent to the audio control room which Is:
a) fed from a ·slngle phase

b) dedicated to the powering of audio equipment only.
c) recently Installed, or confirmed to be In excellent condition.
d) connected to an earth (ground) source which is direct, and run on heavy-gauge copper wire.
2) Mains outlets located adjacent to the powered audio equipment. Outlets which are:
a) routed from the distribution panel with the most direct route possible.
b) dedicated to the powering of audio eqUipment only.
c) recently installed or confirmed to be In excellent condition.
d) connected to an earth (ground) source which Is direct, and run on heavy-gauge copper wire.
3) Metal equipment racks, if used with mains outlets, should be configured as In #2 above, permanently mounted in
or on the metal rack and securely tied to a heavy-gauge copper ground.
There are alternative methods of installing an audio system which Is extremely quiet, however, they Invariably involve
compromises in safety and In compliance wtth established electrical codes. These are not necessary and Audltronlcs,
Inc. strongly recommend that all electrical installation work be performed by qual~ied personnel and that said work be
In compliance wtth local codes and regulations.
21O-Scrics System Installation 3 - 9

AUDIO INTERCONNECTION
WIRING PROCEDURE
The following pages contain instructions on the wiring required for operation and interconnection of the modules con-
tained In the 21 a-Series console. Specifics may also be found In the Individual module chapters.
In the case of input modules and the CRM and CSM monitor modules, all connections are made directly to the 15-pln
plugs mounted on the console motherboard. Before beginning wiring procedures, It is recommended that the Installer
take a few moments to study the console connector location drawing and the console connector pinout drawing to
familiarize himself/herself with the general layout of the motherboard. All connectors on the motherboard have been
assigned a particular letter. This letter, in combination with the module function and/or location, defines a specific con-
nector on the motherboard. For example: Connector MIS B, or CSM F. Note that any Input position can be wired for
either a microphone or a stereo line Input module. Certain bus connectors, such as G and J, are spotted at various
locations on the motherboard for convenience.
Connections for all of the optional modules In the 21 a-Series are mounted directly on the back of the optional
module, and are connected to the motherboard via wiring harnesses. This permits a great deal of flexibility in the
placement of optional modules.
Pin numbering Information for the various connectors is located on both the connector location and the connector
pin-out drawings. The function of each pin is described in the following pages and on the console connector pin-out
sheet. Pinout information for the optional modules Is located on their Individual schematics. In the following Instruc-
tion, individual pins will be deSignated using their connector lener, and where clarity requires, the connector function,
e.g. pin B6, or pin CSM F11.
NOTE: Take special notice that the term shield means a capacltively coupled connection to the console ground
plane, while ground and common are direct connection.
If not already done, PLEASE be sure to read and be familiar with all of the material in the first part of th is section. In
doing so, later problems may be avoided.
A few guidelines:
- Never connect the the (+) or (-) terminals of an active balanced, NON-FLOATING out stage to ground.
- Outputs may be connected to any Input of 600 Ohms or greater.
- Phasing should be properly maintained at every connection. Good engineering practice calls for establishing one
of the 2 colors In microphone and line cables as the HI side and maintaining that pattern through the entire Installa-
tion.
- Connectors, as they are made up, should be identified with numbers corresponding to mating connectors on the
console.
- Levels and impedances normally required for accessory equipment inputs and outputs should be checked for
compatibility with requirements of the console (see Specifications In Section 1). Professional equipment seldom
presents a problem except for power amplifiers used to drive monitor speakers and fold back headphones.
- Frequently, these amplifiers are much more sensitive than required to work in this application. Compensation for
this must be made at the amplifier In order to maintain console and system gain structure. When an amplifier used
In this application does not have an input level control, eilher a resistive pad or an input level control must be
added to the amplifier Input. Note that the monitor outputs of the 210 Console are balanced transformerless.
- In addition to the matter of level-matching, these circuits must also be free from any ground loops. As described In
the Grounding section, earlier in this chapter, the cable shield is capacitively coupled to the console ground plane,
and hard ground at the amplffier. A ground return wire Is then brought back to the console ground plane.
3 - 10 210-Scries System Installation

MICROPHONE INTERCONNECTION
Each 210-MIS Module is capable of accommodating two microphones: A and 8. These microphones connect to the
motherboard via IS-pin MR connectors which, In turn, send the signals to the modules via the edge connectors on
the main board of the modules. The IS-pin MR connectors are accessible by opening the module/motherboard as-
sembly. This is achieved by lifting the armrest. The entire assembly lifts open and, when fully extended, will lock In an
upright posnion via a spring pin located near the hinge (see WARNING on Page 7 of this chapter) . The underside of
the module motherboard assembly will now be exposed, rendering all connection points accessible. All cables will
enter via the I .S" holes at the bottom rear of the mainframe.
NOTE: A shorting plug, which is, in essence, a IS-pin MR connector with Pins 8S (Insert send) and B2 (insert return)
shorted together, Is necessary on the 'B' connector for every module position In which a 210-MIS Module Is fitted.
This connector may be found on the underside of the module/motherboard assembly (see Console Connector Loca-
tion drawing at the end of this chapter) . This closes the insert point and, unless an outboard device Is connected, it Is
necessary for the operation of the module. These shorting plugs are normally installed at the factory, but their
presence should be verified.
Required Tools
The required lools are furnished with the Installation kit and include:
• Crimping Tool
• Pin Insertion Tool
• Pin Extractor Tool
• A sufllcienl quantity of mating IS-pin MR connectors, intended to terminate the microphone cables is also In-
cluded.
The lines coming from your microphones should be of small conductor size, have a foil mylar Shield, and a non-
braided drain wire. Auditronics recommends 18- to 24-gauge AWG seven-strand, tinned wire for construction of such
cables. The IS-pin receptacles mounted on the motherboard are female shell/male pin and connect to the cable
which terminates with a male shell/female pin connector. The pin aSSignments for a typical microphone connector
may be found In Chapter 4, Audio and Logic Signals.
LINE-LEVEL INTERCONNECTION
All audio Interfaces with the 21 O-Serles Console, other than microphones and DC logic signals, are standard line-level
signals.
Each 210-SLI/SLB Module is capable of accommodating returns from two line-level sources: A and B. These Inputs
connect to the motherboard via IS-pin MR connectors which, in turn, send the signals to the modules via the edge
connectors on the main board of the module. The IS-pin MR connectors are accessible by opening the
module/ motherboard assembly. This Is achieved by lifting th e armrest. The entire assembly lifts open and, when fully
extended, will lock In an upright position via a spring pin located near the hinge (see WARNING on Page 7 of this
chapter) . The underside of the module motherboard assembly will now be exposed, rendering all connection points
accessible. All cables will enter via the I.S" holes at the bottom rear of the mainframe.
NOTE: A shorting plug, which is, in essence, a IS-pin MR connector with Pin BS (right insert send) shorted to B2
(right Insert return) and Pin B6 (left insert send) shorted to B3 (left insert return), is necessary on the 'B' connector for
every module position in which a 210-MIS Module Is fitted. This connector may be found on the underside of the
module/motherboard assembly (see Console Connector Location drawing at the end of this chapter). This closes the
insert points and, unless an outboard device is connected, it is necessary for the operation of the module. These
shorting plugs are normally installed at the factory, but their presence should be verified. A shorting plug is also In
place on the 'C' Connector (logic) with jumpers in place between Pins CS and C7 and Pins C6 and C7.
Required Tools
See Required Tools under Microphone Interconnection, above.
2 1O-Scries Sys tem Insl il llalio n 3· 11

OUTPUT INTERCONNECTION
Connection of Audio Signals

Special Note Concerning Active, Balanced, Non-Floating Outputs:
The 210-Series consoles are supplied with actively balanced outputs (with a maximum output of +24dBm) on the
control room and studio monitor outputs as standard. Actively balanced transformerless outputs provide the utmost
in high quality signal processing and thus have been included In the critical monitoring outputs. The Inherent
problems associated wnh transformer use, such as low frequency distortion, are completely eliminated.
These outputs may be coupled to balanced inputs exactly as a transformer isolated output would be. However, cou-
pling to unbalanced circuns requires a departure from established norms.
The usual procedure for connecting a balanced output to an unbalanced input is to strap the ground or shield to the
low side and use the high side for the signal input. When using actively balanced, non-floating outputs, the ground
and low side should not be strapped together. Signal should be taken from ground and the high side only, with the
low side left disconnected.
Anhough Auditronics' active output circuits will continue to operate if ground and low are strapped together, this con-
dition will cause the low side amplifier to operate in a high-current mode, with the resulting heat causing possible pre-
mature failure.
Power Amplifier Interconnection

Be sure to read the Introduction under Audio Interconnection on Page 10 of this chapter before connecting the 210-
CRM and -CSM outputs. Speakers should be connected to amplifiers as per amplifier instructions.
Control Room Monnor (21 O-CRM) Output connections are as follows :
LEFT RIGHT
(+) PlnD3 (+) Pin D6

(-) Pin D2 (-) Pin D5
Shield Pin D1 Shield Pin D4
Communication/Studio Monitor (210-CSM) Output conn ections are as follows:
STUDIO A LEFT STUDIO A RIGHT STUDIO B LEFT STUDIO BRIGHT
(+) Pin E12 (+) PlnE15 (+)PinE3 (+) Pin E6

(-) Pin E11 (-) Pin E14 (-) Pin E2 (-) Pin E5
Shield Pin E10 Shield Pin E13 Shield Pin E1 Shield Pin E4
Complete pin assignment tables may be found under Audio and Logic Signals in Chapters 6 and 7.
As mentioned earlier, the console logic system will dim the control room monitor speaker output and sum n to the left
speaker. NOTE: If the Dim Control on the front of the 210-CRM Module Is set too low, and an Input module Is
placed In CUE, there will be no audible output from the control room speakers. The recessed DIM-trimming pot
on the front of the module should be turned up to provide a signal at the desired level.
3 ~ 12 21O-Series System Installation

Main Output Interconnection
There are several outputs designated as Main Outputs on the 210-Seri es; the Program Outputs, Audition Outputs,
and Mono Outputs. These are intended for interconnection with the 'final' destination of the processed signals, Ul-
timately the transmitter(s) and/or production recording equipment. Connection to these destinations should be done
as per instructions supplied with said equipment. This section deals with the specific output signals and where to ac-
cess them.
These signals appear on the 15-pin MR connect ors designated "PGM", "AUD", and "MONO" in the module/mother-
board assembly area. Three identical modules, the 210-DLO, are in place in thess sections, each dealing with one of
the designations above.
The Main Program outputs from the 210-Serles Console are as fo llows:
LEFT RIGHT
(+) Pin 612 & 15 (+) Pin 63 & 66

(-) Pin 611 & 614 (-) Pin 62 & 65
Shield Pin 610 & 613 Shield Pin 61 & 64
These outputs are paralleled allowing each signal to be accessed on two separate sets of pins.
The Main Audition outputs from the 210-Series Console are as follows ;
LEFT RIGHT
(+) Pin 612 & 15 (+) Pin 63 & 66

(-) Pin 611 & 614 (-) Pin 62 & 65
Shield Pin 610 & 613 Shield Pin 61 & 64
These outputs are paralleled allowing each signal to be accessed on two separate sets of pins.
The Main Mono outputs from the 21O-Series Console are as follows:
AUD MONO PGM MONO
(+) Pin 612 (+) Pin 63

(-) Pin 611 (-) Pin 62
Shield Pin 610 Shield Pin 61
Complete pin assignment tables may be found under Audio and Logic Signals in Chapter 8.
Headphone Outputs;
Headphone plugs are located on the front of the console bottom pan, and are wired in parallel. A third parallel connec-
tion point Is located at:
HEADPHONE MULT OUT

Left Out - Pin 014
Right Out - Pin 015
The headphone output is rated at 2 watts per channel into B ohms or greater.
Connection of ON AIR light or relay:
Provision Is made in the CRM Module for switching of an external ON AIR light or relay . This is accomplished through
switching transistor Q1, rated for 100 rna at 24VDC, which turns on whenever a microphone module is turned on that
has selected CRM muting. This provides a connection to ground for the external device connected at:
21D-Series System Installation 3 - 13

CRM ON-AIR LOGIC Pins CSM F2 or F3.
Example:
Wiring of the 210-DLO Stereo Line Output Module incorporates the summing and output amplifiers required to deliver
a balanced output. NOTE: The gain structure of the 210 Console Is carefully adjusted at the factory; Recommended
trimming procedures are given In the SLI and MIS checkout sections of this manual.
Input connections for the 210-DLO (Program) are located on the motherboard Audition 0 connector, and are made as
follows:
PROGRAM LEFT Pins AUD 02 and 03

PROGRAM RIGHT Pins AUD 05 and D6
These Inputs are connected at the factory, however, the cross-feed, or mix, output of the 210-TEL module may be
connected to these pOints If It Is retrofitted Into the console.
Insert Points:
An Insert point Is provided for each channel of the 210-DLO, and insert point shorting plugs must be Inserted If the
module is to pass signal. These plugs are connected from pin Program C2to C8 and from pin Program C3 to C9,
and are Installed at the factory. Inasmuch as all three OLD Modules are Identical (the only difference being the
physical location of the module itsel0, the pin assignments are Identical as well.
Although these Insert pOints have been provided primarily for use with optional modules In the 210 Console, the user
may wish to connect them to external processing eqUipment. Connections are as follows :
PROGRAM/AUDITION/MONO DLO SEND

Left - Pin C2
Right - Pin C3
PROGRAM/AUDITION/MONO DLO RETURN

Left - Pin C8
Right - Pin C9
NOTE: The Insert point send signal will be 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the console Input. The Insert
point return will shift the return signal 180 degrees. This insert is unbalanced, low Impedance and operates at a
nominal level of -5 to OdBu.
Direct Outputs:
Direct outputs are provided for the left and right channels of the 210-DLO. Connection points are:
DIRECT OUT
Left - Pin A2 and A3
Right - Pin A5 and A6
These outputs are unbalanced, low Impedance with a nominal operating level of +2 dBu. NOTE: These outputs are
direct coupled to the direct output amplifier.
Main Output Connections:
MAIN OUTPUTS
(+) Left-PlnBt2 (+) Rlght- Pin B3

(-) Left - Pin Bll (-) Rlght- Pin B2
Shield Left - Pin 810 Shield Right - Pin 81
3·14 2ID-Series System Installation

(--
\-_ ..
--'
Input Position Connector '8'. Input Position Connector 'C'.

Any input positions fitted Any input positions fitted
with MLI, SLI, or SLB with SLI or SLB Modules
Modules should have a should have a shorting plug
shorting plug on this I on this connector unless an
-" connector unless an outboard external device requiring logic
05' connections is in place.
..
c signal processing device is in
~
IV I G
I, G
I G G
'?
I rnl lID II 00 00 ~H
CSM
Ih
rJ)
!!i ,I CRM
ro'
I I I)
•
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 !1 12 F ?GM AUO ~ONO
'"
n
0
::>
'"0CD I m(II) • BJ m e • m ~~o 1)0 I) I) ]1
J lID C
c c c C C III J 00 C C C '-
- J 00 ~
E 1
0
03'1 OBI
I ~EB) eEl
n
~ mem
c~1
• ! C
i)(lm(l~D~m
0 i t,
::>
::>
'"g
!
I ED ~ ! Ii I ,
I,
i
"
C- I
8 8 8 8
=D8 8 I 888" a 8 8
a~1 8]:1
I) mi) ~ ]1 ~
O
"'"
~
0'
::> A II, fi, II, 8,;:1, II,: """ A~D
A A A A A
AlP AI) I
s: I PWR \ I
~I
K
'" :.
'"
~
~.
" INPUT SEC TION MONITOR A~O OUTPUT SEC nON
.•'"
'<
3 INSTALLER'S VIEW
Connector
Power
S'
..,E
g.
CONSOLE CONNECTOR LOCA ~; ON
210-SERIES CONSOLE
... MODEL 210 - 12 SHOWN
U;
/" .
,
Figure 3, 210-Series System Block Diagram.
3 -]6 210..5crics Systc~ Installation
. - -~~ .... -_. , - - '- : -'~ -. " - -" :.- : - -, .. . .

. ,.
~ -- '-.- . . . .. .;
- ~- .,.. ~ -- .~ ~ - - --- .
..
Input Position Connector 'B' . Input Position Connector 'C'.
Any input positions fi tted Any input positions fitted
with MlI , SlI, or SLB with Sli or SLB Modules
Modules should have a II should have a shorting plug
on this connector unless an
sho rting plug on this I I
." co nnector unless an outboard I i external device requiring logic

<D. ! connections is in place .
c sig nal processing device is in
iii
!"
N
i
'?
(fl
"~.
[ & i
i !
\ 00 00 ~H CRM
fi
i' 'GM AUD '-lONO
'"
n
2 3 4 5 6 7 \ 8 9 10 " 12
a
OJ
'"2-
"n
J'c\l)c ilc .C Ei~c mc I ,'c mc fic fi: ~I: J'C , ' j
:£1 D:il D~I
a
OJ
OJ
"" (I mBB mEJ m :Ii 3E) I) ~ if ED 00) •I i

: ~ C~i c~1
=9 031 B3J
:l
~ i 6 8 B B B B B B B " B 3
r
I ., I), D, D, .m, m, Ii 11, II, II, ii, 11, II, AD A;I ABI
a
"'"g.
OJ I"""
~
~I '" ~=================-iI;pu'NPUT
'"~
~.
'" INPUT ~
SECTION : . \ MO
MONITOR "D OUTPUT SECTION
'"
~
Connector
"3n INSTALLER'S VI EW Power
..[
il' CONSOLE CONNECTOR LOCA ~ JN
,o· 210-SERIES CONSOLE

MODEL 210-12 SHOWN
w
V;
j
o
_: _ L--
Figure 3, 210-Series System Block Diagram.
3·16 21O·Sc rics System Install ation

CRM D CSM F H CONNECTOR J CONNECTOR K CONNECTOR
1 SHIElD 1 1 +24Y
2 L£n CRN OUTPUT (-l 2 tRW ON AIR lOGIC I o..oac STOP t -ttY
2 ...24Y 2 Q.oa< START 2 +24V
.3 LEfT CRY MONITOR OOwur (+) 3 an. ON AIR lOGIC 3 -24Y J CUE LOGIC
•~ RIGHT
SHIElD CRN OUlPUT (-1 ~
4 COUIIIQ'll
sntOlD A ON AIR LOGIC
4 -24Y
~ CONTRa.. ROCII YUT[ BUS
... CUE AuDIO •4 COoIuQol
CO'""'II
M CONNECTOR G CONNECTOR • RIGHT CRN NONITlJR OOWUT (+)
7COt.IWON
e SlVOlO A ON AIR LooC tI S1\JDIO A MUT[ BUS
7CQt.lWOH 7 S'ruQIO B MUT[ BUS
1 COMWON - 8 COMMON a STUDIO B ON AIR LOGaC 8 -N/C-
1 ::~C- g ruE DIRECT OUTPUT
2 +48V 2 ~!."!P'D It WIC AUDIO g snJD40 B ON AIR LOGIC
o SHIElD 10 COWMOH
J STUOIO 8 MIC AUDIO
4 CONTROL RM MlC AUOIO ;'; 11 CUT to CUE
12 OUT to ruE SPK +
SPl<U-1 11 snJDlO A USlEN LOGIC
12 SnJOIO A USlDI lOGIC
L_ _ _ _ _ _-,-_...J
51. 13 HEADPHONE au T SHIElD 13 COWWON
r t3- ---
c....:.f. ~
L} 104 L£FT HEADPHONE OUTPUT
5 RIGHT HEADPHONE OUlPUT
14 STUDIO B US1£H LOGIC
1~ $lUDlO S USlEH OGIC
MIS C SLI C
1 EXT OfF 9
CRM C CSM E PGM D AUD D MONO D
2000NA ~ ~, ~~\1 ~ I~~l 1~~2-RIGHT INPUT 1
2 STUll«) 8B LEn OUTPUT r.~ElD
L£FT OUTPUT
lC(»,1W~ 1 COWMQN
3EXTONB 3 's' UOOULE ON INPUT 3 MONO LEFl INPUT
STUDIO
J STUDIO B LEfT OUTPUT +
- 2 +14Y 2 PGU INPUTLEFT (-j 12 """"'''''
YOHO POW .. PUl LEfT C-j
4 EXT OfT A
~ COUGH A
t- - 4 'A' MODULE OFF INPUT • -NIc- 4 STUDIO B RIGHT OUTPUT JUD
3 -24V
4COWWON
J PGU INPUTI.fTT (+ l WaNO PGN tu'iUT WT (+
.5 'A' EXTERNAL READY INPUT s ItUO RIGHT INPUT 05 STUDIO B RIGHT OUTPUT -) 4 COWMOH 4 """"'OH
II COOGH B
7 COWWON
r J. _ a's' EXTERNAl READY INPUT
-' - 7 ~"'OH
15
1
AUD LEFT INPUT
-II/C-
a STUDIO 8 RIGHT (+)
5 +24Y
a -Z4Y ~ PGU INPUT
15 PGU INPUT
RlGiT(-j
RIGHT (+ • OONO ..... "'PUT "'GHT
• MONO PCII N"UT "GHT (+
(-j
e EXT lAtotP ON
( a A EXTERNAl STAAT WTPUT 7 COWWOO
a COUllON 7 can.~ 7 COWMON 7 CCIoIWOH
i EXT LAMP Cff • -II/C- 8 +24V e COUYON
10 SlUCMO B YUTE SEL£CT
, COtr.tWON
a• ~'B' C-
-N At START WTPUT •
10
-II / C-
-NI.C- •
10
Ctll..,""
SruDlO It LfFT OUTPUT
• -204Y
10 eot.tMON • COUUON
• COWON
• aJ6lON
CQ,IUC»I
11 WON 10 COUWOH 10
12 wle A ",UTE OJ"TPUT
3 SlUDfO A MUlE SIl.£CT
12 A REWOTE STCP OUTPUT
t. -II/C-
H -N ZC-
~ :~~~:
11
12
13
STUDIO A LfFT OUTPUT
L£FT OUTPUT +
SnJOiO A
RIQH OUTPUT
SruOlO A
11 +204Y
12 -24Y
11 'UD IHPUT
12 AUD INPUT LEFT (+
un (-j 11 WONO AUD INPUT lHT
12 WCJoIO AUO H'UT LIFT +
I-I
~~ ""_W _WUTE sru:CT 13 coww~ 13 COWUON
[1~ W.I.", Q MUlE OUWUT • -II/C-
15 '8' RB40TE STCP OUTPUT
14 PGIiI RIGHT INPUT
1~ PGloI l£FT INPUT
'4 STUDIO A
RIGHT OUTPUT -
1S SruOIO A RIGHT OUTPUT +
14 +2<4Y
IS -204V
13
14 C'OWWOH
AUD INPUT RlQiT -
1~ AUO INPUT RIGHT +
U<:;:l 14 WaiO AUO t4PUT faQHT
15 "<»Ia AUO fllUT Rlt»fT (+
(-j
MIS B SLI B CRM B
t PGM C AUD C MONO C
2
"",",y
III~T paNT RElURN
1 <><0
2 REllJRN RIGHT
1 SHIElD
{-j o 1 COWMON 1 COWWON
·""""""
2 AUX 1 INPUT RIGHT
l
...
-H C-
C WON
J RETURN lEFT 3 "UX 1 INPUT RIGHT (+ o 2 PGl.I L£fl INS. PT. 5010
J PGU RIGHT INS. PT. SDfO
PT. SHED
PT. SEND
2 POW tNSERT PONT SO«)
5 INSERT paNT SEND
II INSERT paNT SEND MUl T
• <><0
5 SEND RIGHT
a SEND lEFT
4 SHIELD
5 AIR INPUT LEfT (-j o 4 COWMON
3 PGU LEFT INS. PT. SOlO WUl T
3 AUD "!ERT POfNT SOlO
7 CCII,U.lON 1<><0
II AIR INPUT lEFT (+
7 SHIElD o II PCW RIGHT lNS. PT. SEND YUL T
PT. SOlO MUl.T
PT. ~WlT
5 POW IHDT SOlO wtl. T
• AUO ..SERT SEND WUlT
II DIRECT OUTPUT
IIAORBOPTIONJ
I DIRECT OUT LEn
Q DIRECT OUT RIGHT
e AIR INPUT RIGHT (-j o 1 CON"""
e Pc.. L£Fl INS. Pl. RET PT. RET 18 PQI
""""""
~SOtT RElURH
o COW"ON
1 EXT VCA va..TAGE INPUT
10 GNJ)
g AIR INPUT RIGHT (+
o -lI/c- o I PGW RIGHT INS. PT. RET
10 COtoIMON
PT. RET • AUO INSEftT R£T\JIRtf
12 EXT VCA CURRENT INPUT
1 EXT VCA VOLTAGE INPUT
12 EXT VCA (CURRENT INPUT)
1 C~WOH
2 AUD WONO o 11 COWMON
10 <nuIION
11 """"""
3... +24V
""'"'"
3 <><0 " -lI/c- o• 12
13
COWMQN
COWWOH
12 COWWON
c 11~~m t4 C~WON 13 CCMttClt

14 +24,.. 14 +24Y
t~ AUD MONO 15 -24v 15 -24V
1 COWwON
2 COWWOH
_ J +~v SOURCE
MIS A
1
2
CONNON
CClMWOH
SLI A
- 1 ~E1.D
2 AUX 3
CRM A
INPUT L£FT (-I
PGM B
1
2 AUO
AUD B
RlQiT OOTPllT
AUO RtQiT f - H!lm:;:~l
MONO B
r
J +&oY J "UX J INPUT LEFT {+ OUTPUT -
. ~ ... wle II r,PUT SHIElD 4 UNE It INPUT LEFT ~ ElD .. SHIELD l AUQ RlQfT OUTPUT +
'- ~ wle A -jINPllT 5 UNE At INPUT l.Ef'T - (-j 4 AUO RIGHT OOlPUT 4 PGU WUlT
+ - 5 AUX 3 INPUT RlQH
-j
t
........... II MlC A INPUT e UNE A INPUT L£FT + 5 AUO RIC~iT OOlPUT -
·
~ a AUX 3 INPUT RIGHT (+ , PGIW OUT utA.T
1 -II/C- 7 UN[ A INPUT RIGHT 7 SHIELD 15 AUO RIGHT OOTPUT + e PGW ruT WUl. T +
INPUT LErT (-j
• -II/C- a UNE A INPUT RICHT - 1 COWWOH
I!I AUX 2
ru
• -II,C- 9 UNE It INPUT RIGHT + 1 "'"
g AUX 2 INPUT LEfT (+
1 wle 8
2 "'Ie 8
-I+
o wle 9 (NPUT SHIElD
INPUT
INPUT
o UNE
1 UNE
2 UNE
B INPUT LErT
8 INPUT lEf'T -
8 INPUT lEFT +
I
:::=: 10 SHIELD
11 AUX 2 INPUT RlQiT {-j
@0000 --
"'"
"'"
10 AUD l.fFT
-- 11 AUO l.fFT
OVlPUT -
O.JTPUT - 10
11
• COWOH
• COWOH
AUD
AUD ruT -
3 SHiElD - 2 AUX 2 INPUT RIGHT (+ _ 12 AUO liFT OOTPUT +
3 tiNE 8 INPUT RIGHT E1.D 12 .wo OUT ..
... ~~ A +~v INPUT
5 WIt; B +50V INPUT
14 UNE B INPUT RIGHT -
B INPUT RIGHT +
.3 SHIElJ)
4 AUX 1 INPUT LEFT _ 00000 13 AUO l.£FT OOlPUl 13 AUO ..",.T
5 UNE !5 AUX 1 INPUT LEFT + @000G:l, 14 AUD liFT OOTPUT -
15 AUO L£FT C\JlPUT +
14
15
AUD OUT wu.T -
AIJD OOT wt.l. T +
POWER PGM A AUD A MONO A

1 COtotwOH @O@ I COWWOH 1 CCJ,IWQN
2 +24Y
J -24Y 000 2 LEFT ClR OUT
3 LEFT wC»I SEND
2 l.fFT DIR our
J lDT W(»4 &}IO
1 """"011
2 AU) DR OUT
o4COWwQH
5 +24Y 000 • ca.. .. ON
• RtQtT
COWWOH
l AUO WCHT'OR SDID
e -24Y
7 COIIlWQH
000 5 RleHT DlR OUT
8 RIGHT "'ON SEND
3 DIR COT
6 R04T W~ SEND
,• """"OH
PGU [)1ft OUT
8 +2.Y
g -2.Y
000 7 ca.I .. OH
e L£FT "ETER SEND
7 COWWOH
e liFT WEl[R $o&C
• PQi "'CNT'OR SO«)
1 caAKlII
g RIGIT w£1"ER SEND • AUO W£1tR $DID
o -H / C- o RlQiT WEltH setO
• CI::ItW(»4
1 COt.lwa-.
2. +50Y COWWa-.
J -N/ C-
COtoItr.I<»4
11 L£FT PCW WULT (-I
2 L.EFT PCW "lilT t+
10
11 l.fFT Aoo WULT
12 lUT AUO W'JlT
I-I+ •
10
PQI WETDt SID«)
""""""
11 AIJO OUT .... T
12 AU) ClJT WUlT
I-I+
I. -N'/C-
!i +!\OY
J COt.l"<»4
4 RIGHT PQI WlIlT {-1
5 RIGHT PGW "lilT (+
1J """"""
14 RQiT
"
.wo WlIlT
ROtT AUO WUlT {+
(-1 :~~WlT'_l
"PQI OOT ......T t+S
INPUT SECTION MONITOR SECTI ON OUTPUT SECTION
21 0-SERIE S CONSO LE CONNECTOR PI NOUT

Chapter 4
210-Series Microphone Input
Module - 210-MIS
@l
~@
IIlITl
L_~_II
"
"
•
"
"
~
.,. ....
INTRODUCTION
The 210-MIS Microphone Input Module Is one of the 21 O-Series group of modules designed for stereo broadcast ap-
plication. Any input position can be fitted with either a Microphone or a Stereo Line Input Module.
Among the features of the 21 O-MIS Module are:
- Provisions for the selection of either of two microphone by way of the input selector switches 'A' and 'B'.
- A newly designed, lower noise, active differential microphone Input preamplifier which permits Individual gain con-
trol settings for each of the inputs.
- Optional Phantom Power for condenser microphones.
- An insert point which Is post-preamplifier and pre-fader to allow insertion of signal processing equipment, if
required.
- A full stereo pan pot, with a center detent, enabling the microphone to be precisely positioned at any point within
the stereo panorama.
- An extensive, user programmable logic system designed into the module permitting external On/Off control,
"cough" interrupt contrOl, logic control of external indicators (ON AIR lights), muting of control room and/or studio
monitors (follows input selection), On/Off switching with fader-up movement, and cue activation upon fader-detent
overpress.
- On/Off switching using Illuminated switches cont rolling CMOS circuitry.
4 · 2 21O-Scrics Microphone Inpul Module

. _____._______.__ 1Jl~.f:,_L [ I
INPUT GAIN TRIM OUTPUT
SELECT Iil> ASSIGN
L
MIC A IN
B INSERT POIt'J1
>---C-O- --- 1~
I )
VCA
~
PGM
R
I~
* ~FAOER
MIC B IN{ ----·-~·-I I
AUO
J-CH-ANNE~-
R
CV
n -;- - --- .....
------
ON
.J,L ~ I FFF
A
OFF
C
a
T _1J
------
N
ON T
B R
OFF a
L
--------,
COU GH A A SPKR MUTE CR L- ONL Y ONE OPTION
MAY BE USED
l -0-0-- - - I
---- a
COUGH B
.....0-- ST. A
G
I I
TALLY
ON
OFF
I
C
8-0--
STRAP 0- -
ST:-B
I + I I
'I L _______ _
EXTERNAL
LOGIC --- -
AS REOUIRED
_ _ _ ..J
L _
L _________ _
____
CR
STUDIQ..!' _
_ _ _STUDIO...§.. _
Figure 1, Microphone Input Module Signal Flow.
2UI-Series Mi crophone Input Module -1 -:3

CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW
The following is a brief summary of the features and functions of the 21O-Series MIS
Microphone Input Module. This section is intended to familiarize the Service/Installation
~
Technician with the controls of this module, as reference to these controls is frequently
made in the text.
we
INI'IIT
0
1. Input Select
The 210-MIS Module has two microphone inputs: A and B. The tnput Setect push buttons
simply select between the two. If both pushbuttons are depressed or released, the module
will go into the OFF setting, remaining there until this is corrected.
2. Output Assign Selectors mmL_O_R

0
The push buttons labeled ·PGM" and "AUD' are the Output Assign Selectors, which assign
the signal to the Program and Audition busses. Either or both of these may be selected. A
"Direct" output from the module is also Included.
C) 0
3. Pan
The Pan contrails a rotary potentiometer which positions the selected signal at any point
within the stereo field. The Pan control is center-datentad for exact center when set at the
detent.
10-.--
,,-.--
4. VCA Fader
The Ve A Fader has two functions : In Its primary function , it acts as a level control for the
, r--
selected microphone. When moved down beyond infinity, and overpress switch is activated,
enabling the CUE function, if the module is configured as such. This allows the user to audi- r--
tion the incoming signal through the CUE speaker located in the meterbridge or the head- r--
"--'=F-
phones, without routing it to the main program outputs.
5. Module ON/OFF
,,-.--
,,-.--
,,-.--
The Modute ON and OFF push buttons, located at the very bottom of the module activate
,,-.--
and deactivate the module. An ON/OFF tally is provided to activate an external device such
as an "ON AIR" light. ,,-.--
Figure 2, 210-MIS
Module Front Panei.
4 4 210-Scries Microphone Input Module

p
AUDIO AND LOGIC SIGNALS
Audio Signals
The 210-Series Microphone Module Is capable of accepting two separate microphone-level signals: the A Input and
the B Input. These signals may be processed for broadcast and routed to either or both of the assign busses.
Audio Inputs
Both input signals appear on the Input motherboard at the 15-pin MR connector labeled "A" in the desired Input
module. See Console Connector Location drawing at the end of Chapter 3. The pin assignments follow:
MA" Connector
13. Shield 14. Mlc A (+ )50V Inpu! 15. Mic S ( + )50V Inpu!
10. Mic B Input Shield 11. Mlc Sinpu! H 12. Mic Sinpu! (+)
7. -N/C- 8. -N/C- 9. -N/C-
4. Mic A Input Shield 5. MicAlnpu! H 6. Mic A Inpu! ( + )
1. Common 2. Common 3. + 50V (Phantom Power)
NOTE: Microphone cable shields should be connected 10 Pins 1 or 2. NOT to Pins 4 or 10.
Audio Outputs
These signals appear on Connector "B" of the Input Motherboard on any input position in which a Microphone Input
Module is fitted. See the Console Connector Location diagram at the end of Chapter 3 for location of these connec-
tors. The pin assignment follows the Logic Outputs text.
The only accessible audio outputs on the 21 a-MIS Module are the Direct Out and the Insert Potnt.
The direct out Is a OdBu post-fader/pre-pan, output from the module and Is Intended primarily for multitrack applica-
tion. It is accessible on Pin 8 of the module pOSition's "B" Connector.
The remaining audio signals are sent Internally to the Control Room and Studio Monitor Modules and have no reach-
able connections.
The Insert point may also be found on Connector "B". This is a "Pre-Fader" signal and may be used to send a sample
of the input signal through a signal processing device such as a reverb/delay, compressor, etc. The Insert point Is un-
balanced low Impedance, and operates at a nominal level of -5 to OdBu. This Insert Point Send signal is located on
Pin 5 of the "B" Connector.
NOTE: If no such external device is In use, a shorting plug must be in place on this connector. See Microphone Inter-
connection on Page 3 - 11 for details.
"B" Connector
13. Common 14. +24 Volts 15. -24 Volts

10. Common 11 . Ext. VCA Control Voltage Input 12. Ext. VCA Control Current Input
7. Common 8. Direct Out 9. -N/C-
4. Common 5. Insert Point Send 6. Insert Point Send Mult
1. Common 2. Insert Point Return 3. -N/C-
NOTE: Each row of three pins, 1 · 3, 4 - 6, etc., contains a shield or common. A given shield pin is intended fot use
with the other two pins In that row. The shield on Pin 1, for example, is Intended for use with the signals on Pins 2 and
3; The shield on Pin 4 is intended for use with the signals on Pins 5 and 6, etc.
210·Scrics Micropho ne Input Modu le 4·5

Logic Signals
Each of the returns, when selected, has its own Individual logic Interface. These interfaces may be broken down into
two types of signals: Logic Inputs and Logic Outputs.
Logic Inputs
There are six Logic Inputs on the 21 O-Serles Microphone Input Module: Three for the A side and three for the 8 side.
This module provides tally outputs that follow the module's "ON/OFF" status. These may be used in conjunction with
the CSM Module to drive a relay thay may light an "ON AIR" lamp. The o utputs are 'open collector' and can sync
30mA DC. The pin assignments for Connector "C" may be found after the Logic Outputs heading and a brief descrip-
tion of the functions follows:
• External ON A This Logic Input starts operation of the 210-MIS Module when an external pushbutton (for ex-
ample, a guest turret in the studio) is activated with Mic A selected, the module will turn ON.
• External OFF A This Logic Input stops operation of the 21 O-MIS Module when an external pushbutton (for ex-
ample, a guest turret in the studiO) is deactivated and with Mic A selected, the module will turn OFF.
• Cough A An external "cough" switch (momentary pushbutton) may be connected to the MIS Module to mute the
signal, if needed. When this pin is pulled low with the proper input selected, the signal will mute until the pushbut-
ton Is released.
• External ON e, External OFF e, Cough 8 These are identical In function to those mentioned above except that
they operate when the '8' input is selected.
Logic Outputs
There are two Logic Outputs on the 210-MIS Module: The External Lamp ON and External Lamp OFF. They are acces-
sible on Connector "C" and may be used to trigger a device such as an "ON AIR" lamp. The pin aSSignments for this
connector follow:
"COO Connector
13.
10.
Stu. A Mute Select
Stu. B Mute Select
-1;~~~
co~:ou~e
11. ~ 15.
Select
Mic B Mute Out
.. 12. Mic A Mute Output
7. Common 8. Ext. Lamp ON 9. Ext. Lamp OFF
4. Ext. OFF 'A' 5. Cough 'A' 6. Cough 'B'
t. Ext. OFF '8' 2. Ext. ON 'A' 3. Ext. ON 'B'
4 - 6 210.Scrics Microphone Input Modlilc

w~ ~
EB~ - !------
~ tn I
EJ]e, . LL
-'- LL
Q
z
o
~ 6n
I r-
'"
"'5 ...:
"0 '"
IX 0"0
W :,;.!"
0 ~ OIn
I v
, .c
«
LL
L_. (/)
.~
~
~ gn
I
.@
'@3" , .@
m '"eo
.c~
0.
.
'"
0
o 0.
~ E
" .-
~ ~
, e ~
1 2
N
~ '" E ,---- ,----
a: t;
-o .::!.
e"O 0 0
~~~/
ro ro
e
a: 'r0>
o
.-
r---
El w~ II
~I
"
I
IX
Q.. I ,- 0 0
L-- L--
I u I
L3_~
- OPE N
Figure 3, 21 O-MLI Mic Module Component Location Figure 4, DIP Switch.
Map.
21 0-Sc ri ~s Microphone InpuL Module 4 - 7

FIELD OPTIONS
The 21 O-MIS Module contains two ' DIP' Switches and several shorting pins which allow the module to assume
several different configurations. The switches, S4 and S5, are located near the lower right corner of the module main
board (see Figure 3, Location Art) and are easily identifiable by their red or blue color (See Figure 4 on Page 4-7) . The
pins to be shorted are located on the ' C' Connector in the Module/Motherboard assembly in the input position in
which the desired module Is located. If a given function Is desired, a lead must be run between the pins named under
Selection in the Shorting Plug Configuration section below. Directions concerning construction of the shorting plug
may be found under Crimping Instructions In Chapter 3. Explanations of the functions along with switch posi-
tions/shorting configurations requ ired to affect the functions follow :
DIP Switch Configuration

Description Switch Selection Function
Determines whether fader will S4 Section 1 open When fader is moved up from infinity
turn module On and/or Off Section 2 closed the module will turn On, but ' OFF'
switch must be pressed to turn
~ f.. \' module Off.
o~ ,J. .)\ Section 1 closed ' ON' switch must be pressed to

Section 2 open turn module On but bringing fader
down to infinity will turn module Off.
Section 1 closed When fader is moved up from Infinity

Section 2 closed module will turn On - when returned
to infinity, module will turn Off.
Determines whether pulling fader down S5 Section 1 closed Both sections must be closed for
past infinity will activate CUE function. Section 2 closed Overpress CUE to function. Moving
the fader up from infinity will
deactivate the CUE function .
Shorting Plug Configuration

Description Plug Selection Function
Determines whether A or B mlc will C Pin 12 - Pin 14 Mic A Mutes Control Room
mute In Control Room or Studio monitors
when the module is On. Pin 12 - Pin 13 Mic A Mutes Studio A
Pin 12 - Pin 10 Mic A Mutes Studio B
Pin 15 - Pin 14 Mic B Mutes Control Room
Pin 15 - Pin 13 Mic B Mutes Studio A
Pin 15 - Pin 10 Mic B Mutes Studio B
Phantom Power Connection

Description Plug Selection Function
Determines whether Phantom Power will A Pin 3 - Pin 14 Supplies +50V to Mic A
be sent to Mic A, Mlc B, or both.
Pin 3 - Pin 15 Supplies +50V to Mic B
Pin 3 - Pins 14&15 Supplies +50V to both A and B
4·8 210-Scrics Microphone In put MmJulc

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Microphone Gain Adjustment

Equipment Required : One 210/200 E14 PC Extender Card (Part Number 90X00290) .
To perform this adjustment, first remove the module with the console main power OFF, and Install an extender card.
This will allow access to the necessary trim pots without Interruplillg power to the module.
Toward the middle left of the module main board (as viewed with the front panel upward and the component side
toward the user), are two trimpots, Rll and R12. As th is and all other adjustments are made at the factory, none
should be required. If, however, any supporting circuitry is replaced, a gain level adjustment may become necessary.
NOTE: These trim pots are partially hidden by the Mic Preamp Board, but the adjustments are accessible without
having to remove the Preamp Board.
Alignment Procedure
The microphone gain level may be changed by simply adjusting Rll (Mic A) or R12 (Mic B) as desired. No particular
test eqUipment Is required for this procedure as measurement may be made on the PGM or AUD (depending upon
which output is selected) VU Meter.
21O-Scrics Microphone Input Module 4 - 9

< c (,
<, .' .'.. f P
":- '.. ...
tJ · III 210 ·Sertc!; Microphone In pili MOlJulc

". ""
en OF'
1 EM-31
- AUD rD
,'",.. 7'"+
., lfft '"
L.s "'" 1~~04
"" -
"'''''
,..f ~<l<F.. "",,'

on
J...."9
1/
lit:'
"'"
I
a"
.~~~_ _ _ _
~ '~--L- -"
"'i'o"'-~ -
....-,. ~-~ ......
+l4~ ~-;L--------------+t------------------------------------------------------------+---i-------------------+-i--,------+-----+-----------i---------------------~~~~-------"~-~"" ......
1/ m
..
, -
. •
""X
lola ~:-~"
"
CIt!
( ~.
~-,,~ " '" "'" ~
~!:.
"'l- "'''
,~,
"i" 0<3/p
=
, OK '" '"
7~~
v ""\!::y
,~
'"
» -" NOTES,
~
- ALL RESISTANCE V ALUES ARE IN OHMS, EXCEPT AS HARKED

- AL L CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS, EXCEPT AS HARKED
~ -...
- PIN NUMBERS SEPARATED BY COMMAS ARE CONNECTED TOGETHER
- SHADED CONTACT OF CHOS SIJITCH IS CLOSED "HEN CONTROL IS HIGH
- • IS A 17. HETAL FILM RESISTOR
- CR'S ARE IN4148 DIODES EXCEPT AS HARKED
RS'S ARE 2Z SIP RESISTOR N(TVDRKS
t @i ........ .
Quditronics, inc.
~... .
- UNLESS OTH(R\IIS£ NOTED. ALL P <PLUG) PIN NUH1IERS JIlP SCHEMATIC DRAVING
ARE ASSUMED TO MATE 'WITH CtlRRESPDNtllNG S <SOO<£T) PINS i=..---J210-MIS
MICROPHONE INPUT MODULE
';';23/88 ~ ",,_,_ 88D00684-
Chapter 5
210-Series Stereo Line Input
Modules - 210-SLI and 210-SLB
@\ @\
~.~o ffi
.~
a
- ffi
,,_0
a
mm rnUl
~ -g","
•
0.• , 1\
(')
~
Loll l
® ®
" "'0
"
• •
" "
" "
" "
~
-
~
® ®
©~O ©> ~O
G G
G
no W
G
no ~
INTRODUCTION
The 210-SLI and -SLB Stereo Line Input Modules are two more of the 210-Series group of modules designed for
stereo broadcast applications. Among the features of the 210-SLI and -SLB Modules are:
- Provisions for the selection of either of two stereo lines by way of the input selector switches 'A' and 'B'.
- The active, transformerless, balanced inputs which permit Individual gain control settings for each left and right
channel of both Inputs. This allows precise level and balance adjustment of the stereo signal inlo the module.
- A Mode Selector switch (SLI Module only) which permits selection of the input source as stereo, summed left and
right mono,right source only, or left source only to be sent to the stereo outputs.
- A Balance control (SLB Module only) which permits balancing of the stereo signal.
- A stereo Insert point which Is post-preamplifier and pre-fader allowing insertion of stereo signal processing equip-
ment, if desired.
- A Penny + Giles conductive-plastic fader, which does not directly carry audio, rather, it carries a DC voltage which
controls a VCA (Voltage-ContrOlled Amplifier). This allows a high degree of protection against dirty faders, thereby
avoiding associated noise,
- An extenSive, user-programmable logic system designed into the module. It may be programmed to provide exter-
nal Start/Stop control of an external device (e.g ., cart machine), to permit the external device to activate the module
On/Off functions, or to control the On/Off functions with fader up/down into the detent. It may also be programmed
for timer and CUE activation upon fader-detent overpress.
- Output assignment to the Program and/or Audition busses via the two push-on, push-off switches labeled 'PGM'
and 'AUD ". A "Direct" stereo output from the module is also Included for special applications.
- On/Off switching using Illuminated switches controlling CMOS circuitry .
.S · 2 21f)·Scri c!; Stereo Line Input MmJulcs

SEE L
NOTE 5
fN~UT OUTPUT [)IR
@ SI;~!=C. r I _L I ASSIGtl
LEFT MODE _ L_ f]
QJ SELECT
A
G S(J
L PGM
~~
RIGHT
R
LINE IN @
R L
8
LEFT
RIGHT
QJ
G AUD
R
,- -- I-
FADER
---
DIR
R
1 1 ~ CUE
CV
CHANNEL 1
rn T
---- ----1
ON OFF
_~-o
1 L O~~~~FF l
[ __
I
C
L
0
N
1
r--- op -nON 1- 1
-----
--- ~
T
R --- CUE - - - - - -L
OFF
S TAR T
ON 0
L
L
---
--,
TIMER STAR r
-L ,- OPTION 2
-- CII. ON/OFF
-----]- - -
ONL Y ONE OPTION
MA Y BE USED
0
--- r _[0"]io"'~
-----
G TIMER STOP
STOP
READY
C
]
--l 1 rx1.
-
I OGle
.._ --_ ..
1
EXTER NAL ___
I .J
LOGIC t-
Figure 1, Stereo Line Input Module Signal Flow_
2I D-Seri es Stereo Line Input Modules 5 - 3

,

The following Is a brief summary of the features and functions of the 210-Serles SLI Stereo
Line Input Module. This section Is Intended to familiarile the Service/Installation Technician
-ffi
with the controls of this module, as reference to these controls is frequently made in the
text.
1. Input Select
'"ruT
B
CD
The 210-MIS Module has two line-level stereo inputs ; A and B. The Input Select pushbut-
tons simply select between the two. If both pushbuttons are depressed, the module will go
mm
into the OFF setting, remaining there until this is corrected.
2. Output Assign Selectors

0
The pushbuttons labeled ' PGM' and ' AUO' are the Output Assign Selectors, which assign
the signal to the Program and Audition busses. Either or both of these may be selected. A
' Direct" output from the module is also included. •
0.
,.. ,
• • A
0
3. Mode Select Switch (SL/ Module)
A Mode Select switch is provided to permit selection of the input source as stereo,
summed left and right mono,right source only, or left source only to be sent to the stereo
outputs. ,,-..--
10 [~]
3a. Balance (not shown - SLB Module only) '-'1--
The 21 O-SLB has a rotary Balance control for balancing the stereo signal. The Balance con-
trails center-detented for normal stereo balance when set al the detent.
'-i:::'":J-
r--
6- _
4. VCA Fader -
The VCA Fader has two functions; In its primary function, it acts as a level control for the
selected source. When moved down beyond infinity, and overpress switch is activated,
enabling the CUE function, If the module is configured as such. This allows the user to audi-
tion the incoming signal through the CUE speaker located in the meterbridge or the head-
phones without routing it to the main program outputs.
5. CUE
..-....-
==1=
The CUE pushbutton allows Ihe user to listen to a signal on the console-mounted
loudspeaker or headphones while a signal from another module is broadcast.
6. Module ON/OFF
The Module ON and OFF pushbuttons, located at the very bottom of the module activate
and deactivate the module. Depending on the configuration of the DIP switch(es) on the
module's circuit board, the ON pushbutton can also activate the Timer and External Logic
functions. This will be discussed in detail in th e Field Options section at this chapter.
110 ILl
Figure 2, 21 O-SLI Module

Front Panel.
5·4 210-Scricli Stereo I.inc In put Modules

Audio Signals
The 21 O-Series Stereo Line Input Modules are capable of accepting two separate stereo line-level signals: the A Input
and the B Input. These signals may be processed for broadcast and routed to either or both of the assign busses.
Audio Inputs
Both signals appear on the Input motherboard at the 15-pin MR co nnector labeled ' A" In the position of the Input
module motherboard. Sea Console Connector Location drawing at the end of Chapter 3. The pin assignments follow:
"A" Connector
13. Une B Input Right Shield 14. Une B Input Right H 15. Line B Input Right (+ )
10. Line Blnput left Shield 11 . Line B Input Left (- ) 12. Line B Input Left ( + )
7. Line A Input Right Shield 8. Line A Input Right (- ) - rJII "f" 9. Line A Input Right (+) - ,,"ri N
4. Line A Input Lett Shield - O .t',l r\ 5. Line A Input Left (- ) - i5L1< 6. Line A Input Lett (+ )__ r' f D
1. Common 2. Common 3. + SOV (Phantom Power)
Audio Outputs
These signals appear on Connector "B" of the Input Motherboard on any input position in which a Stereo Input
Module Is fitted. See the Console Connector Location diagram alille end of Chapter 3 for location of these connec-
tors. The pin assignment may be found below.
The only accessible audio outputs on the 21 O-SLI/S LB Module are the Direct Outs and the fnsert Points.
The direct out is a OdBu post-fader/pre-pan, output from the module and is intended primarily for multitrack applica-
tion. It is accessible on Pins 8 and 9 of the module position's "B" Conneclor.
The insert points may also be found on Connector "B". This is a "Pre-Fader" signal and may be used to send a sample
of the input signal through a signal processing device such as a reverb/delay, compressor, etc. The insert point Is un-
balanced low impedance, and operates at a nominal level of -5 to OdSu. The Insert Point Send signals are iocated on
Pins 5 and 6 of the ' B' Connector.
NOTE: If no such external device Is in use, a shorting plug musl be in place on th is connector. See Line-Level Inter-
connection on Page 3 - 10 for details.
"8" Connector
13. Ground 14. + 24 Volts 15. ·24 Volts

10. Ground 11. Ext. VCA CII. Voltage Input 12. Ext. VCA Ctl. Current Input
7. Ground 8. Direct Out Left 9. Direct Out Right
A. Ground 5. Insert Point Send Right 6. Insert Point Send Left
1. Ground 2. Insert Point Return Right 3. Insert Point Return Left
NOTE: Each row of three pins, 1 ~ 3, 4 ~ 6, etc., contaIns a shlold or cornrnon. A given shlold pin Is Intended for use
with the othertwo pins in that row. The shield on Pin 1, for example, is intended for use with the signals on Pins 2 and
21O-ScriC5 Stcrco Linc Input Modules 5 ~5

Logic Signals
Each Input source, when selected, has its own individual logic interface, These interfaces may be broken down into
two types of signals: Logic Inputs and Logic Outputs,
Logic Inputs
There are six Logic Inputs on the 210-Serles Stereo Input Modules: Three for the A side and three for the 8 side, A
brief description follows :
-,
• A Module ON Input This logic Input is used to activate the module from an external source, for example, a piece
of equipment such as a cart machine or CD player, When th is pin is brought low with the desired input (A or 8)
selected, the module will turn ON,
• A Module OFF Input This logic input Is used to deactivate the module from an external source, for example, a
piece of equipment such as a cart machine or CD player. When this pin is brought low with the desired Input (A
or 8) selected, the module will turn OFF,
• A External Ready Input This logic Input Is used to tell the module that an external piece of eqUipment Is reedy
to function, (for example, that a cart machine Is loaded and ready to run) , when the A Input Signal Is selected,
This Logic InpU1 will light the OFF switch when it's held low,
• B Module ON Input, B Module OFF Input, B External Ready Input These are identical in function to those
mentioned above except that they operate with the '8' input selected,
These signals appear on Connector "C' of the Input Motherboard on any input position in which a Stereo Line Input
Module (SLI or SL8) Is fitted , See the Console Connector Location diagram at the end of Chapter 3 for location of
these connectors, The p in assignments follow the Logic Outputs text,
Logic Outputs
There are four Logic Outputs on the 21 G-Series Stereo Line Input Modules: Two for the A side and two for the 8 sid e,
A brief description follows:
- - • A External Start Output This Logic Output sends a momentary low-going pulse any time the module's A Input
Is selected and the module is activated, for the purpose of signaling an external piece of equipment (i.e" to tell a
cart machine to start),
• A External Stop Output This Logic Output sends a momentary low-goin g pulse any time the module's A Input
Is selected and the module Is deactivated, for the purpose of signaling an external piece of equipment (I.e" to tell
a cart machine to stop) ,
• B External Start Output, B External Stop Output These are identical In fun ction to those mentioned above ex-
cept that they operate with the '8' Input selected, As always, See the Console Connector Location diagram at the
end of Chapter 3 for location of these connectors, The pin aSSignments follow:
"e" Connector
13, -N/C- 14, -N/C- t5 , "B" Remote Stop Output
10, -N/C- - 11 , Common 12, "A" Remote Stop Output
- - 7, Common - 8, "A" External Start Output 9, MS" External Start Output
- 4, "A" Module Off Input 5, ~N External Ready Input 6, "B" Exte rnal Ready Input
t, "8 " Module Off Input 2, ~N Module On Input 3, "B" Module On Input
oS - 6 21(J·Scrics Slcrco J..in c Input MmJulc:-.:

R5. R12. R93. and R94-
Input gain adjustment
trimpots.
:!!
<0
c:
;;;
w
'" FAJER
o
rn
C m m
G G
c;; R1ZUUR5
r R9 4 U U R93
'"
;;:;;: u16 ~~7
" ~ ~ ~ ~i ,~ ,"
'" 0
GEEEE
'Co.
.~
® 8 U13
®®'" ~®®
<1>
n
[TI
B
55 S4
o , .
3 0 00 ~
0\~ ~
®
'C
"
o
<1>
®
~1~ SE /
":;-
o
IT
!
i
/
'"-=o L i.J I I
'"
o "
,.'go"
S6 - Timer activated S5 - CUE function S4 - Module
1:'"o with Modul e ON/OFF activated with ON/OFF activated
o
function. fader overpress .
C
o
o
5'
."
S
s:o
~
So
g
~
....
FIELD OPTIONS
The 210-SLI Module contains three "DIP" Switches which allow the module to assume several different configurations.
These switches, S4, S5 and S6, are located near the lower right corner of the module main board (as viewed with the
front panel upward and the component side toward the user), and are easily identifiable by their red or blue color (see
Figure 4 on Page 4-7) . Explanations of the functions of these switches along with switch positions required to affect
the functions follow:
Description Switch Selection Function
Determines whether fader will S4 Section 1 Open When fader is moved up from 00
turn module On and/or Off" Section 2 Closed the module will turn On, but "OFF"
switch must be pressed to turn
module Off.
Section 1 Closed "ON" switch must be pressed to

Section 2 Open turn module On but bringing fader
down to 00 will turn module Off.
Section 1 Closed When fader is moved up from 00

Section 2 Closed module will turn On - when returned
to 00, module will turn Off.
Determines whether CUE functions may S5 Section 1 Open Pulling fader down below 00
be activated with fader overpress. Section 2 Closed (overpress) will activate CUE function;
the CUE pushbutton Is required to
deactivate the CUE function.
Section 1 Closed The CUE pushbutton is required to
Section 2 Open activate the CUE function; moving the
• 1.,' fader up from 00 will deactivate CUE .
V. I'"
Section 1 Closed CUE function Is activated when fader

Section 2 Closed is pulled down below 00 and de-
activated when fader is moved up.
Determines whether digital timer will

start and stop with Module ON function."
S6 ,r Section
.J1--- 1 Closed
Section 2 Open
When module is turned On, timer will
start, but must be stopped manually
Section 1 Closed When module is turned On, timer will
Section 2 Closed start - when module is turned off,
timer will stop
Section 1 Open Timer must be started manually but
Section 2 Closed will stop when module Is turned OFF.
1< tf S4 Is configured for Module ON with
fader-up, the timer can be configured to

operate with the fader as well.
5 - 8 210-Scrics Stereo Line Input Modules

Input Gain Adjustment

Equipment Required: Fluke Model8020A 4-digit multi meter (or equivalent) and one 210/200 E14 PC Extender Card
(Part Number 90X00290).
Before beginning this procedure, be sure that the console power is OFF. Now,remove the module, install an extender
card, and re-apply power to the console. This will allow access to the necessary trimpots without Interrupting power
to the module.
Toward the middle left of the module main board (as viewed with the front panel upward and the component side
toward the user), are fourtrimpots, RS, R12, R93, and R94. As this and all other adjustments are made at the factory,
none should be required. If, however, any supporting circuitry is replaced, a gain level adjustment may become
necessary.
Alignment Procedure
With the console power OFF, remove the module and install the extender card. Plug the module onto the card. This
will allow the technician to gain access to the trimpots withoul inlelf upling power to the module.
Feed a balanced +4 signal at 2k Into the desired input CA' or 'B '). Connect a dB-reading AC voltmeter to the 'A' Insert
point or 'B' insert point and ground. Adjust the appropriate trimpot (RS and R12 for Channel 'A' left and right, respec-
tively; R93 and R94 for Channel 'B' left and right, respectively) for OdBu when measured at the Insert point. Be sure to
measure at both the left and right insert pOints.
210-Serics Stereo Line Input Modules 5 ~ 9

5·10 210.Scrics Stereo Line Inpul Modules

=,..,
F'lteno.Met SCH-SLJ
""'-"' ., NOTES.
- ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS, EXCEPT AS MARKED
- ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS, EXCEPT AS MARKED J'"
- PIN NUMBERS SEPARATED BY COMMAS ARE CONNECTED TOGETHER
- SHADED CONTACT OF CMOS SIJITCH IS CLOSED IJHEN CONTROL IS HIGH SCHEMATIC DRAV!NG
- • IS A 17. METAL FILM RESISTOR 210-SLI
CR'S ARE lN4148 DIODES EXCEPT AS MARKED STEREC L1N£ INPUT
- RS'S ARE 21. SIP RESISTOR NETIJORKS
Chapter 6
210-Series Control Room Monitor
Module - 210-CRM
I-- -
- -
--
AIR
-
'"
-"""'
'"
-"'"''
'"
I--
pc"
-
INTRODUCTION
The 210-CRM control room monitor is a stereo module providing all facilities for monitor source selection, VCA level
control, and control room muting. The cue speaker level control is located at the top and the headset equalizer,
source selection, and level control is located in the lower portion of the module. Among the features of the 210-CRM
Module are:
- Eight monitor sources wh ich are available via push bulton selection. These are Program output (PGM), Audition
output (AUD), Mono Program (MONO PGM), Mono Audition (MONO AUD), AIR (an off-air feed), and 3 user-
definable Inputs. These last three inputs are balanced, bridging, and transformerless.
- A Speaker On/Off bulton with an associated LED which permits the operator to manually mute the monitor when
desired. The monitor will also automatically mute during a "Live Mic" situation in the control room. The LED'willll-
luminate Indicating either situation. The headphone feed will not be affected.
- A ' Dim' function with a recessed level control. This "dim" function Is activated during CUE or when the Intercom
system located on the 21 O-CSM module Is in use. This will cause the selected stereo source to be summed and
sent to the left Control Room monitor at a reduced level predetermined by the selting of the recessed "dim' control.
- User deSignated studio microphone inputs which are routed to the CUE circuitry during intercom operation.
- A built-In CUE amplifier and associated level control. This permits the operator to set the level of his CUE speaker
at a comfortable level.
- A stereo headphone amplifier section which provides source selection of either the Control Room Monitor, or the
CUE bus, or both by depressing both source bultons simultaneously. When both are selected, the control room
monitor source Is combined and sent to one channel while CUE is sent to the other.
- The two-band equalizer with In/Out switch, providing headset equalization without affecting any console outputs.
6 - 2 210-CRM Control Room Monitor Module

"' I---~~~
[_ P-~WE~~~~
CUE
CI~M
MODEL 2 1O-CRM
MON. SELECT
LEvtL
I, LH~-
L ' -
'l-
- C>- - L
CONTROL
Monitor Inputs ore R J- ROOM
Balanced Bri dg ing MONJTOR
- Il-
C>
LR
'L~r
(1)-
I
"
'l- r - - -I- - - - - - --.J HEADPHONES
I ,- 'N~UT CJ HEADP HONE
.1 p 1>--6--1--, JACK
I YI
)- ~ I
~ LO I
~B : --
- 0" I(
~7Hv---jP
~B
EQUALI ZER CUE
I
- ---: - -[> -~ -------$-[>-u-
See Note 2 on
System Siock Diogram
A
~~-
o- ---L1-{ I -- J CUE
Page 3 - 16 B I
0--- - --'-ljX)-i-'---J I --~-PK-R-O-N-
!O-FF------6 DIRECT
OUT
MUTE
CUE l OGIC
CR MUTE :>-
CONTROL lOGIC f- - -J;
t-L~'-~"-----T ___ __ _ _ ---< eR
ON AIR
Figure 1, Control Room Monitor Module Signal Flow.
210-CRM Control Room Monitor Module 6 - 3

The following is a brief summary of the features and functions of the 21 O-Series CRM Con-
trol Room Monitor Module. This section is intended to familiarize the Service/Installation
Technician with the controls, as reference to same is frequently made in the text.
. .
1. CUE Level 6
, »
"" ..,...
CD
The CUE Levet Control permits the operator to set the level of his/her CUE speaker to a
. - - r-
comfortable level.
- -
2. Monitor Select Switch
The Monitor Select switch array allows the operator to choose the source for monitoring - -
on the Control Room speakers and headphones. The first four stations are connected
within the console; the remaining four stations are user-assignable. Inputs are balanced - r- 0
bridging and paralleled wnh those in the optional 210-CSM Module. AIR
- r-
AUD
.3. Speaker On/Off
MONO
- r-
The Speaker On/Off pushbutton may be used to manually mute the control room monitors. PG"
MONO
When muted, the adjacent LEO will illuminate to indicate this state. The Control Room - r-
monitors wlll also mute when a microphone input module is in operation, causing the LED AVD
to illuminate. r--- r-
PG"
4. Control Room Level and DIM -
eo MONTOR
The Control Room Level Is used to set the level of the Control Room monitor speakers.
The gain of the control room power amplifier (not part of the 21 O-Series Console) should be ©- 0 0
set according to the instructions found under the heading Audio Outputs, later in this Chap- """ OM
ter. Directly below and to the right of the Level Control is the recessed DIM Control. This
reduces the level of the monitor signal (user prelerence) when the CUE function Is in use.
5. Headphone EQ
0, "e 0
HEADPHONE
The Headphone Equalizer section consists of three user controls: "HI" EO, "LOW" EO , and
-,.
EO Enable. The HI and LOW EQ controls are essentially Bass and Treble controls and the
.'C).
EO Enable is used to activate the controls. When EO Enable is in the OUT position, the fre- 1lftl',oOUT.&
quency response in the headphones is flat . The equalization in the headphones will not af- ,0 0 0
fect any of the console outputs. -G. . . . -
.'C)'.
6. Headphone Source Select 0(;;,,-
Two Headphone Source Select switches are located in the headphone section of the 210-
=8 0
CRM Module. Depressing the pushbutton labeled oCR MaN" will send the Control Room
monitor source to the headphones. Depressing the pushbutton labeled CUE will send the
CUE source to the headphones. When both pushbuttons are depressed simultaneously,
the control room monitor source is combined and sent to one earphone and the CUE is
sent to the other.
7. Headphone Level
Q [2]
'" "'"
The Headphone Level control, located at the very bottom of the module, is used to set the Figure 2, 210-CRM
level of the headphones. The headphone amplifier circuitry is located on the main board of Module Front Panel.
the CRM Module and serves both headphone outputs.
6·4 210·CRM Control Room Monilor Module

Audio Signals
The 21 O-CRM Module allows the monitoring of the main console outputs which may be connected directly to the
CRM Module's motherboard connectors and selected on the CRM Module itself. These signals appear on the
module/motherboard assembly, In the 15-pin MR connectors labeled "A" and "B" in the module position In which the
CRM Module Is fitted. See the Console Connector Location diagram at the end of Chapter 3 for location of these con-
nectors. The pin assignments follow:
Audio Inputs
There are four stereo Inputs on the 21 O-CRM Module that may be acc essed by the user for purposes of monitoring:
AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3, and AIR. The AIR inputs are typically used for a radio receiver for the purpose of monitoring the
actual broadcast. The AUX inputs may be used for any signal that may require monitoring. Signals brought In on
these connectors can not, however, be broadcast.
"A" Connector
13. Shield 14. Aux 1 Inpul Left (-) 15. Aux 1 Input Left (+)
10. Shield 11. Aux 2 Input Right (-) 12. Aux 2 Input Right (+)
7. Shield 8. Aux 2 Input Left (-) 9. Aux 2 Input Left (+)
4. Shield 5. Aux 3 Input Right (- ) 6 . Aux 3 Input Right (+)
1. Shield 2. Aux 3 Input Lett (-) 3. Aux 3 Input Left (+)
"B" Connector
13. -N/C- 14. Common 15. AUD Mono

10. -N/C- 11. Common 12. AUD Mono
7. Shield 8. AIR Input Right (-) g. AIR Input Right (+)
4. Shield 5. AIR Input Left (- ) 6. AIR Input Lett (+)
1. Shield 2. Aux 1 Input Right (-) 3. Aux 1 Input Right (+)
Audio Outputs
The audio outputs to the power amplifiers for the Control Room monitor loudspeakers are found on Connector 'D'.
The pin aSSignments follow:
The Control Room Monitor outputs of the 210-CRM are actively balanced, with a maximum output of +24 dBm. Ac-
tively balanced outputs provide the utmost in signal quality, but require special considerations before connections.
Be sure to read the Introduction under Audio Interconn ection on Page 3 - 10 of before connecting the 210-CRM out-
puts. See also Power Amplifier Interconnection on Page 3 - 12. Speakers should be connected to amplifiers as per
amplifier Instructions.
"0" Connector
13. Shield - 14. Left Headphone Output " 15. Right Headphone Output
10. Shield 11. Out to CUE Amp (common) 12. Out to CUE Amp (+)
7. Common 8 . Common g. CUE Direct Output
4. Shield 5. Right GRM Output (-) 6. Right CRM Monitor Output (+)
1. Shield 2. Lett CRM Output (-) 3. Left CRM Monitor Output (+)
NOTE: Each row of three pins, 1 - 3, 4 - 6, etc., contains a shield or common. A given shield pin is Intended for use
wHh the other two pins In that row. The shield on Pin 1, for example, is intended for use with the signals on Pins 2 and
3; The shield on Pin 4 Is intended for use with the signals on Pins 5 and 6, etc.
Logic Signals
"P' Connector
t3. Common 14. Studio B Listen Log ic 15. Studio 8 Listen Logic
10. Common 11. Studio A Usten Logic 12. Studio A Usten Logic
7. Common 8. Studio 9 On·Air Log ic 9. Studio B On·Air Logic
4. Common 5. Studio A On ·Air Logic 6. Studio A On·Air Logic
1. Common 2. CAM On·Air Logic 3. CAM On·Air Logic
21O·CRM Control Room Monitor Module 6·5

FIELD OPTIONS
DIM Trim
The only real field adjustment on this module is the DIM Trim, located on the front panel. The recessed contrails lo-
cated below and to the right of the Control Room Level control.
When the CUE pushbutton Is pressed on an Input module, the DIM function is activated. The stereo source material in
the Control Room monitors will be summed and sent to the left monitor while the CUE signal Is heard through the con-
sole-mounted CUE speaker.
The summed signal may be set to a desirable level. By its nature, the recessed control reduces the chances of ac-
cidental readjustment.
No test equipment is required for this adjustment.
Alignment Procedure
Feed a stereo signal Into a chosen SLI or SLB Module. It Is suggested that normal program material (music or
speech) be used rather than a tone. This will give the user a more accurate situation in which to set the DIM level. Test
tones will work, but may not give as accurate an impression.
Feed another signal Into a second Input module. This, too, should be normal program material.
As the signal from the first module Is heard in the Control Room Monitor speakers, press the CUE pushbutton on the
second Input module. If the module Is configured such that the fader overpress activates the CUE function, this may
be done Instead of using the pushbutton. The program material should now be summed and heard in the left monitor
only.
With a small-blade screwdriver, adjust the recessed DIM Level Control until the signal in the monitor speaker Is at the
desired level in relation to that in the CUE speaker. NOTE: The CUE level may be set with the rotary control at the top
of the CRM Module.
6 ~ 6 210-CRM Control Room Monitor Module

,- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - -_._ -.
*J5V - ISV
OJ
J,PK
R
'K
~.!p~<.:-~J-<-_ _ _ + 15'"
..
101 'O"C .,
Ir
-= -:- 1501<
(PJ -< _ I"
+15V -15Y
tC:2
,our lOOK
_,-,r,:!<;,:-:.!'--,_l.-__ -15V R6
+ISV -ISV C6
f
3.'jk loopr
"19
20
PJ - J Ill!
201(· 0 P.J..:.I. -) ()IJl
'" "1"1
AI
+lSV J
AI~
22 ~lt
A21 "6
10K ~ ~ 150K
1 ~
- ISV
lOOK
RI1
NONE
2iOvCAJ
-OJE
SCHEMA IIC
200/21U-tRl" VCA
I~D~J~E~,;--._----- -
,/"/,, I ",...L BBAOOB05
.J I __JI I I I I I I
; :T I I I I I I I I I I ~ I
I - II II L
~ - f- - - f- - c- ~
NONE
LOC;; TiDN ART

..~~.----j 21 0-CRM CONTROL ROOM
I:;;-=
MONITOR MODULE
n<.1(.
12/6/90
.....G(·
_1 [;:- _ ,
I
NOTE:
L UNLf5! OTHERWIS[ Srfafl[D:
r- - - "[SISTANCE VALu[S AU 'N OM""
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -, CI DIM WON CAPACITANCE VALU!5 ..ltl IN "leIlMA"ADs.
:'" : ,: ',. .,.

• STATION I PGM I,O,F
(
1lECK. INTERLOCK I
, "
J1l'
=,
,
LEFTS:
Y'
I ~!1~022
r"
~ ,
I
~~.-0,~.~." -'-
r---<J I -0]7. •,
..---0
'
-on~"
Av
I
- ,
,lUX Z
I
I
.,'
-o~1 ~~!11 ~' 1i .------ -
AU)( 3
I
,
.77
~
Y
"
-4 I
I
I
ISOpl" FRONT
PANEL
TR&'T , Q
" "I, '
~
.... ,~~;;;:.._'''I. ,ca
I I R3!5
'05'
'OK
1- 1141 _,_
: ,I , , , I , R27 ,_ '011: : UK
'CO, >'-+----------'f.i;--!:.P""~~I5LILOW-
r-S' ~1' .-"""Tl' .-tl rll.-il' ;:::"'r-C-2-'i!--~;~ '>~'-I-.:'~:IE:----hTo~!! 'C2C
1!5"~
, -Q~,'.2
, " ,.-0', ~V
"0
~;:I".
.
,,, , ._ ROO
101< IY.
LEn
OUT
:I , I
r--o~. ~~' ~~. -o~7 ~~! . 2•. ~f',o~:~:7~~l:c:.----------~:-:0:~ =1:!~ ':0: K~:!~,:':~':K: : .:~I'F~-v- -t - - - ---t-~C~~~~/F;==='='='==~---!'~v
" I 357K" ,F RS!5 I ,R3S 1. 40
'3l!l- IC48 r
-#: " ••2
I ,
~,,
r"
(
n ":
"0
P-I".
..
...L..",-
r-- L r;jl P- ,
RIGHTS I
'--R§lP--'
r- L
'ut)
L-Rr:: P-I
~
S
r-L P-/
~P-I
=
RZZ.;- - - -
I ~1' ~1' rl' r1 7
~ : dB !"K ... L- l-'l~ ":"':':',>~,_,-, "~crE-.+i ~ 8~ :'- ':~'.~7K_~' ~;:~~
- __ ~J ",0 '''.., 11TL
~,~o,K ...
10K 1%
R••
"0
c••
"""
~R~01P~-il--~.~2~,.::.------------__________~ •~J~• .45

~P-I ."a IIIIQHT
1--lE--,
..,
L R20. 3.511C C!5 -I!W OUT
10K I".
r L.§i +15", so
I
AIR
L
R- Ia
'!!, P-f e
~~~P~-~/L_!.~'~.~.~--______________________________~
...I"
150,.,.. EO. IN/OUT
9'. '---~.~
":2 .
7
,.-, M
,-
~~~'~-~/~.~'7~.==============================~____~ 1-1
"0
10K
I
..
r-L-ii"
L f.i
P_I
P-I
'1~'
RI5e
-,!!tv
R-~2~P~./L-J.~'~.~.~--------------------------------____________~
AUK I
.J ~ J
+I!SV
LR I "-1 R13·
-- ......---,,--'1'I REO I
JI. .,
RIOS 0&,.., r-=1. 24V
r-~"r..2r_____:~c=====~
L '72 el5V 7115 1::01'
I -•~~P~/L-~R~'~'~.~-------------------------------------- __J
AUX2
L.
. . P-I
L
R12.
15 -
__________________"
R_.['~,~P-~/-CR~'O~.------------------------------ _____________________________' iu~
"Y
IC6C ,
c~~
7
OK •• ,
IOIC.
Ol
H'
g fJ;
I
:
11K
- - -- -
~~~K
-~'K
11K 04
05
·C47 '---r.-~
l-~------~~.~e~0:'--1-~'~0"---_F'-----1~·~'~------~'"~~~/~·
1.---, c..
r---II..
·C4IlI
_...!-_'~O.:.0'_4_'0'-'l',I 111£0 2 I, .1 01
Z4V co.
C4e' 4001
r-L-'-~"tP-~/=~ ..G·===========================~ j~,' t5>

RI04
79i!S 5
- - " I.'
"P-I ••• C!2 C•• , ,../~ Z4't'
.0047 -1!!tV 4 .7
=
I L~~f,'~,~P~;-/~~Ra~7.~---------- ______________ fo__-~:--+_ltr---~_++rC~2p21_---2~ _c__________________________________________
&_,-------
I I R7~ R9fA '.'"
'~~:--~~+--1'~'K~--"
Rr.5
4CC'
~I!P-I/~l·i·~·~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ " " '"-/-~-·Lf,.: ~;2F ' V:6: 147 :: ::

~. C~.
~ P-/
AUX! • ,. P-I ••• " " • ,
---f<t--.,.--*-....,
..47
+ I!!tV'
:- P-I ••• BY )_"Y 10K 047 AIOIAI c. "00 I::~l.

-..r::-.
L I· I leliA ... r.:.J'"
I 11K fin .
lOOK .bts:s !fl4, t;,
~
~CIOA... I~
L l' 1t:5 • RIOO 10K 1.2K
,1~'. ._. . <: .~71:_L. :••

.~t::±-~:5_--_1
,...,"2.
L
r ~gl
t "110
•• ',D ~-I ii.~~"

1 0 K . ."
377 - I !CO '.7
r----------------------------+!-t..J-J....0
.,. 11K _ 11K
• ftl-R20_ :5. '21(,.% ..;....:...--------rtO--1', §" L ______ '- RtO~J
'On. 'J:'SV
.
i
•• '2, - '2" I 11K ._ l-.
ALO,'O""~"'~P~-~IL--f)n~'F~·~'------_______________=-------t-I
10K
COf
U~·~ '~'.',
C2!5 -ISY I C,.
~
let' r
r'''' ~".'07 CM
-~··~~~::!-C·~·~·!---------------------"l· C-l2,~7_;,~
IK .41
FRO • • CUE
J.c.
p_,
~3L,p·L------+--~:7I::_-----:-1 Q,'1'5Y ... ~SS'
STUJ10
(j Icse CII LEVEL (1, 'C". ,.>,... 4'1 - _ _ _ _.0047
__ 355
•_ v 4 1'-10 ~
r-- "-1
"'. 150,F ItSI 1001(
L-'--t_ _......---<>--l~-.,;O--C;l" -+-t"ii' - .....
.'C 'c. "20K '0"70' r' 2K
••• .80 1!S1' " ..
~''-I---<I-.:--'j:" >L.'--'~'iJ~tO_"1 ~'1~II:!St Jl~a,I'---+
r~',,,--++, ' ;-:k
I 'TUC'O
L
"".,.. RIO'
STUDIO Zm>'P-~ILC~'e~.~----------------------t_---4I'OS,.33l!....
"4'
' .....-+~
" le!!A
',e,7"• ...., 11K
R7. lOOK 11K
RIOII C40
-"V--tf--r-li::----'
''I''
c..
'. . . .47 .<it
03 L,;;;-J ./' I 47 r?O 10K 4053r-, 10K
~~IO~K;cC-~,'of<-~.~.~2·r1-~-C-.-,r---l· Tr~.~~~~:~~J:~.-j~~~'.-r.~:~~~7~~~1~-~I~
[~~~.~'.~v:~~~~~~~~~~=====;;;;==~~-~I~~!2~.~'.~.::t_--------~----L---------------=~=J1~==.=~~=-~~c;.~e~~~~=-='~fj~:::::=~fr1~'-~l=jj--J----------~~~~~~~.~.~.~--~~~-~,,~~OI~~
Irl,',...
;;
0-'-' ~... 1:2"

POK II --.J;~C '.1: ~'V
."V ••, ~ .47 'K OUT
~~I:'
;n!·'·
eu( LOCIlC IUt 11:1:0 00 47K
~_~~
'OK
• .,2
1ri"1~-1 .1 4&)e .,
~--t_:.~.~'~_fi4-J_~-.I!SV _ 1. 1117
~+l
'K
I~ .* n'~~: ~ ~ ZK~, I~: ~ C 2 0 - . . I-. - . - . 4 l / 1 , . · - C - > o - l . . - ~:~f,~'-+---"

It51 I lOK Sl'KIIt 111.4 377 4 .7
O r..,7 ICIA
I"UCIO
L
TAlk LOOIC -,.,
IK
'.2
'OPU.,.. I
t
*C.','
L '7 ,
00'" '.0
..r
=r?
,0... ~';O ' ' 'Fl'K .•T ..
'."35
,!;;;'C::':-I +'5V
T '0
211....
Sf"LC1Q
C
50K -y
1'(0<£, I
~~~ "'~",,-,-- -4-'jl.~OK rt .
Ik I I" .., "" I NONE .
I,~.~ ~11
I 10P"t] ___ 47
1 .
CI'
1 .1
Ii
}-,
!!r-:L~·'~':.--4...L...--4-T~''''-)o.:.....----------------
I " ,'" ••
.
____·~'~I7;_TItf1...r
r ~."IIIJEIOt
--, , 01
.-- !;7"~
~
p_, b:t" 10K
lllto lCI. I
Jm
~~ ~_-.--'l+
IK <.T
' I 'I : !' ~.~ i :C;-;[~1" I Ie
DI"GRAH
TO CW
011
Q~-'
T~ -~~
" ...--1»-,
~"
... a.--. p_ ~
IJt
'00'
D'
)OK I
I ,
_ :- _ : ' -~~[ _______________
CCIIM)1iI
c, ~ 7T F ~ __________
L__::..1I:j~"::... ',..ne~.Tl.~,0:. ._____________
-ev
0 12
.......... . f":
.1-0'
_l
f-1~=~.-...J1 210-C:?t1 CONTPOL °OOH
I i MONITOR MODULE
-" 414' l .. t" . '~
:r_'_
· !
Chapter 7
210-Series Communications/Studio
Monitor Module - 210-CSM
-
.R
-
,"0
"oo' -
-
eo"
-"oo'
,"0
--
PC"
-
....""
.~
©-o
Q ~,
0- 0
Q an.ooo ,.
,NI£ACOO.I
.J.-
-:t.D:'
; "
";:0
.. ~
INTRODUCTION
The 21 O-CSM Communications and Studio Monitor is a stereo module for two studios which provides all facilities for
studio monrtor source selection, level control, and studio speaker muting. Intercom facilities for both studios are also
located on this module. Among the features of the 21 O-CSM Module are:
- Eight monitor sources available via pushbutton selection. These are Program output (PGM), Audition output
(AUD), Mono Program (MONO PGM), Mono Audilion (MONO AUD), AIR (an off-air feed), and 3 user-definable In-
puts. These last three inputs are balanced, bridging, and transformerless.
- A Speaker On/Off switch, with a Speaker-On LED, for each studio to permit the operator to manually mute the
monitor when desired. The associated monitor will also automatically mute during a user-designated 'Live Mic'
situation In the studio. The mute LED will illuminate indicating this situation.
- An Independent level control for speaker volume adjustment in each studio.
- An Intercom to both studios which incorporates logic to allow a user-designated control room microphone to talk
to either studio. Provision Is also made for a user-designated studio microphone, one from each studio, to talk Into
the console CUE system. Auditronlcs recommends use of the companion 210-SRC Studio Remote Control panel
for this function (see Chaptef 13 for details).
7·2 21O-C'''sM Communications/Studio Monitor MmJult:

STUDIO A MODEL 21O- CSM
MON. SELECT
MONITOR
CSM Inputs are in parallel

L
R
L
R(
hREI
ISP.d -[>-
t --Ell
~.k
Ef3
+
+
R
STUDIO A
MONITOR
with tose of CRM Module

J- I'SP~~'~I 51UOIO B
SPKR ON/Orf
- --{ J
- I --0
R
MONIIOR
Lr-
G (? ~(
Rr~ T - ~:lr -- - I( LS(UDIO 8
I-~~io·l ).tA _____[>- '~(( RMO""DR

LIJ- :
L
~ MONO
1-1 - -0
SPKR ON/OFF
L
EJ 18
I I
I I
R
EJ LEVEL
I I STD
MUTE
A STD 8
MUTE
0- CONlROL LOGIC
J j { rr~ STUDIO A
ON AIR
-rL':-rL_-r_~-_r,- -_-_-_-1~__~- ~ -L :6:~:::

r L
_ __
IL-___.
-TA-L-K- ' I-r:
'L_-_O-_-~_ __________---ll' 8
Figure 1, Communication/Studio Monitor Module Signal Flow
210-CSM Communicati o ns/Studio Monito r Module 7 - 3

The following is a brief summary of the features and functions of the 210-Series CSM
Communications/Studio Monitor Module. This section is intended to familiarize the
Service/Installation Technician with the controls of this module, as reference to these
controls is frequentiy made In the text.
1. Monitor Selector Switch

- r-
The Monitor Select switch array allows the operator to choose the source for monitoring on
the Studio monitor speakers. The first four stations are connected within the console; the
remaining four stations are user-assignable. Inputs are balanced, bridging and transformer-
- f-
less.
- r-
2. Studio B Select - f-
The Studio B section of this module contains a rotary potentiometer, an ·ON" pushbutton, AIR
and an LED. The rotary potentiometer determines the level of the signal sent to the Studio B
monitor speakers, the "ON" pushbutton, when depressed, turns the Studio B monitor
-
AUD
r- ~
MONO
speakers ON, and the LED, when illuminated, Indicated the Muted status of the Studio B I--
PCM
r-
monitor speakers. ~ONO
I-- -
3. Studio A Select AUD
I-- C-
The Studio A section of this module contains a rotary potentiometer, an 'ON" pushbutton, PCM
and an LED. The rotary potentiometer determines the level of the signal sent to the Studio A '----- -
monitor speakers, the ' ON" pushbutton, when depressed, turns the Studio A monitor aTUO",
MONITOR
speakers ON, and the LED, when illuminated, indicated the Muted status of the Studio A
monitor speakers. ©-o
""" IT]
4. "Intercom" Rotary Potentiometer
When the talent in either studio Is speaking to the Control Room via the intercom function,
(;j
, .
"'""'0 •
they will be heard on the CUE speaker in the console. The Intercom rotary potentiometer is
used to set the level of the Intercom signal in the studio monitor speakers. ©-o
I.IUlli
5. Talk/Studio A/Studio B
The Talk pushbutlon, when pressed, mutes the Control Room monitors and sends a signal
Q 8TtJOIO A
0
from the user-designated Control Room microphone to either Studio A or Studio B. The
Studio A/ Studio B push buttons are used to determine which studio receives the intercom
. ,.
INTEflCOM
signal from the Control Room. In this situation, the Talk signal replaces the signal in the
."(), 0
studio monitor speakers. ;~ "
m:"0Q
~c.o 0 0
TAU<
0 .,...
'"
Figure 2, 210-CSM
Module Front Panel.
7 - 4 210-CSM Communications/Studio Monitor Module

Audio Signals
The 210-CSM Module allows the monitoring of the main console outputs which may be connected directly to the
CSM Module's motherboard connectors and selected on the CSM Module itself. These signals appear on the
module/ motherboard assembly, In the 15-pin MR connector labeled "E" in the module position In which the CSM
Module is fitled. See the Console Connector Location diagram at the end of Chapter 3 for location of these connec-
tors. The pin assignments follow:
Audio Inputs
All inputs to the 210-CSM Module come Internally from the 210-CRM Control Room Monitor Module. In other words,
any signals running to the audio Inputs of the CRM Module, will also show up in the CSM Module. For this reason,
Connectors "A" through "0" are non-existent for the CSM Module. See Connectors "AMand "e" under Audio and Logic
Signals In Chapter 6 for pin assign men Is.
Audio Outputs
The audio outputs to the power amplifiers for the Studio A and B monitor loudspeakers are found on Connector 'E'.
The pin assignments follow:
The Studio Monitor outputs of the 210-CSM are actively balanced, with a maximum output of +24 dBm. Actively
balanced outputs provide the utmost in signal quality, but requi, e special co nsiderations before connections. Be sure
to read the Introduction under Audio Interconnection on Page 3 - 10 of before connecting the 210-CSM outputs. See
also Power Amplifier Interconnection on Page 3 - 12. Speakers should be connected to amplifiers as per amplifier in-
structions.
"E" Connector
13. Studio A Right Output Sh ield 14. Studio A Right Output H 15. Studio A Right Output (+)
10. Studio A Left Output Shield 11. Studio A Leff Output (-) 12. Studio A Left Output (+)
7. Common 8. Common 9. Common
4. Studio B Right Output Shield 5. Studio B Right Output (-) 6. Studio B Right Output (+)
1. Stud io B Left Output Shield 2. Studio B Left Oulput (-) 3. Studio B Left Output (+)
NOTE: Each row of three pins, 1 - 3, 4 - 6, etc., contains a 5h181(J or common. A given shield pin Is intended for use
with the other two pins in that row. The shield on Pin 1, for example, is intended for use with the signals on Pins 2 and
Logic Signals
"P' Connector
13. Common 14. Studio 8 Listen Logic 15. Studio B listen Logic
10. Common 11 . Studio A Listen Logic 12. Studio A listen Logic
7. Common 8. Studio B On-Air Logic 9. Studio B On-Ai r Logic
4. Common 5. Studio A On-Air Logic 6. Studio A On-Ai r Logic
1. Common 2. CAM On-Air Logic 3. CAM On-Air Log ic
21O-CSM Communica lions/Studio Monitor Module 7 - 5

7 - 6 210 -CSM Communicalions/Sludio Monit or Module

=·M p
~I----------S1----------~1
- - - -J.--~=~
o
50
NONE
LOCA TlD N ART

t;;;;...,=~,.---.j210-CSM CONNUMICA nON/
STUDIO MONITOR MODULE
~~~6/90 P~i' OF_l I
HOTE:
l UHLESS OTHERWISE SPECIf"I(D:
C7 RESISTANCE VALUES ALitE 1111 OH ......
_S_'_ r- - - - -
C' 150p F
CAPACITANCE VALUES APIE IN M.ClOf"AltAOS.
~,:bl
,I I'
,
I
I
"
-Jt:
CRY
"""
+1!l.V'_;_ _ _-'--_-'j
,.1 REG I
R72
II. ; ~60! fC,~71 78 ~~
COM
_
05 ...h C48 r
~....'_0~0~,_...J
T-"~0-'j·,1 07
-1511 I REG 2:
791.
[,
I
P-I
=
24V
400'
H.P. LEVEL
Q RI05
Kl. ,6 8.21(
R7'
"' '''0'
<K
'00' II.
+15V __-'-~---------,
RII2 RII3 RIIS

IK IK I.
!!C42
10
CUE
SPEAKER
j ~~." ..
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
TO CSM T. B. 210-CRM CONTROL ROOM
MONITOR MODULE
4 148 ~"
12/6/90
. ~
_,_ OF_l_
Chapter 8
210-Series Dual Line Output
Module- 210-DLO
210 OlO
INTRODUCTION
The 210-DLO Module is designed to sum and provide line-level outputs for stereo and mono assignments.
Three such modules are standard In the 210-Series Consoles; one for the main stereo Program signal, one for the
stereo Audition signal and one for the PGM Mono and AUD Mono signals. Each are essentially stereo line amplifiers
with Internal level adjustment and capable of producing a +24dBm output level.
This chapter will differ somewhat in style from the previous module chapters in that there is no real user contact once
the proper interconnections have been made. Interconnection inforrnation may be found In Chapter 3, System Installa-
tion under Main Output Interconnection In the Audio Interconnection section on Page 3 - 13.
This chapter contains a signal flow diagram, location art diagram and an Alignment Procedures section.
As there are no controls on the front panel of this Module, a Control and Pushbutton Overview will not be necessary In
this chapter.
8 - 2 210-DLO Dual Line Output Module

GAIN TRIM
@
+
LEFT
GAIN TRI M
@ PGM
+ OUT
RIGHT INSER T 60lNT [ : : ::--
.r---o- ;>
5-
Figure 1, 210-DLO Dual Line Oulpul Module Signal Flow,
210~DLO Dua l Line Output Module 8·3

\..9
~
l.J\
~
\--0 ~
-... -
~
-v
t'C,
l~1
(1_
~,
I 9n
! 0 ~JJ ! I
<D
a:
Figure 2, 210-DLO, Dual Line Output Module Location Map.
8 ~ 4 2ID-DLD DUIlI Line OUlputMooulc

NOTE: As this and all other adjustments are made at the factory, none should be required . If, however, any support-
ing circuitry is replaced, these adjustments may become necessary.
Output Level Settings

General Information
Test equipment required: Fluke Model B020A 4-digit multimeter (or equivalent), Hewlett-Packard 2040 oscillator (or
equivalent), and a 210/200 E14 PC Extender Card (Part Number 90X00290).
To perform this adjustment, the module must be removed and an extender card Installed. This will allow the service
technic ian to access the trimpots without Interrupting power to, and oulpul from, the module.
Eight trimpots (R2, RB, R10, R16, R24, R29, R41, and R45) may be found In various spots on the printed circuit board
(See Figure 2). These are the assorted level and trim adjustments.
Alignment Procedure
For all measurements, feed a +4dB stereo signal ref: 0.775VRMS at 2kHz into a selected Stereo Input (SLI or SLB)
Module with the fader set at 0 (zero). Different adjustments will be measured at different pOints on the console.
Insert Points
The internal operating level in the 210-Series Console is OdBu. Feed the signal as described above Into a chosen
Input Module and measure at both Insert points for OdBu. Adjustments may be made at R2 (left) and R10 (right) .
Main Outputs
The console's main outputs are set for + BdBu at the factory. If your equipment requires a different level, the following
adjustment may be made:
Meter Adjust
In the event that the meters need adjustmenl, first, be sure til at tI'e main outputs are set at +BdBu. Adjust the meters
for OVU. These adjustments may be made at R29 (left) and R45 (right).
Monitor Trim
This Is a somewhat less than precise adjustment. Set the main level control on the CRM Module to approximately
'2 o'clock' . Feed the signal as described above into a chosen Input Module and measure at the outputs of the Con-
trol Room Monitor (CRM) Module for OdBu. Adjustments may be made at R24 (left) and R41 (right) .
Feed the signal as described above into a chosen Input Module and measure at the main outputs. This measurement
should be made with a 600W load across the outputs and adjusted for +BdBu. Adjustments may be made at RB (left)
and R16 (right). This will necessitate a re -calibrat ion of all of the above except the insert paints.
2IO-DLO Dual Line Output Module 8-5

PIN ASSIGNMENT
Three Dual Line Oulput Modules are Included with the 210-Serles Cons ole System and are in place In the
Module/Motherboard Assembly. One serves the Main Program Outputs, one serves the Audition Outputs, and one
serves the Mono Oulputs. The pin assignments for each OLO position follow:
PGM Assignment
The Module in the Program position handles Ihe main output signals
"A" CoNNECTOR
13. Common 14. Right PGM Mult (-) 15. Right PGM Mult (+)
10. Common 11 . Left PGM Mult (-) 12. Left PGM Mult (+)
7. Common B. Lett Meter Send g. Right Meter Send
4. Common 5. Right Olr Oul 6. Right Mon Send
1. Common 2. Left Oir Out 3. Left Mon Send
"6" CoNNECToR
13. PGM Left Out Shield 14. PGM Left Out H 15. PGM Left Out (+)
10. PGM Left Out Shield 11. PGM Left Out H 12. PGM Left Out (+)
7. Ground B. Ground g. Ground
4. PGM Right Out Shield 5. PGM Right Out (-) 6. PGM Right Out (+)
1. PGM Right Out Shield 2. PGM Right Out (-) 3. PGM Right Out (+)
"C" CoNNECTOR
13. Common 14. +24V 15. -24V

7. Common B. PGM Left Insert PoInt Return g. PGM Right Insert Point Return
4. Common 5. PGM Left Insert Point Send Mult. 6. PGM Right Insert Point Send Mult.
1. Common 2. PGM Left Insert Point Send 3. PGM Right Insert Point Send
"0" CoNNECToR
13. Common 14. +24V 15. -24V

10. Common 11 . +24V 12. -24V
7. Common B. +24V g. -24V
4. Common 5. +24V 6. -24V
1. Common 2. +24V 3. -24V
OLO
-- - - Module
Positions
" " " "D 0 ! j\

"
00 0 000
000 0 0 0
~0000
o0 0 0 0 0 0
0 °B 0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0 0
00 0 000 00 000 0 0 = 0 0 0
P A M
G U 0
M 0 N
0
Figure 3, 210-Series Module/Molherboard Assembly.

For a detailed view of this assembly, see the Console
Connector Location Map on Page 3 - 15.
B ~ 6 210-))1.0 Dual Line Output Module

Audition
"0" CONNECTOR
13. Common 14. AUD Input RighI H 15. AUD Inpul R;ghl (+)
10. Common 11. AUD Inpul leU H 12. AUD Inpul leU (+)
7 . Common S. Common g. Common
4. Common 5. PGM Inpul R;ghl (- ) 6. PGM Inpul Righl (+)
1. Common 2. PGM Inpul leU H 3. PGM Inpul leU (+)
"C" CONNECTOR
13. Common 14. +24V 15. -24V

7 . Common S. AUD LeUlnser! Point Return 9. AUD Right Insert Point Return
4. Common 5. AUD Left Insert Po int Send Mult. 6. AUD Right Insert Point Send Mult.
1. Common 2. AUD Left Insert Point Send 3. AUO Right Insert Point Send
"6" CONNECTOR
13. AUD leU Oul Shield 14. AUD leU Oul H 15. AUD leU Oul (+)
10. AUO Lett Out Shield 11. AUD leU Oul H 12. AUD leU Oul (+)
7. Ground B. Ground g. Ground
4. AUD R;gh1 Oul Sh;eld 5. AUD Righl Oul (- ) 6. AUD R;ghl Oul (+)
1. AUD Right Out Sh ield 2. AUD Righl Ou l (-) 3. AUD R;ghl Oul (+)
"A" CONNECTOR
13. Common 14. Righl AUD Mull H 15. RighI AUD Mull (+)
10. Common 11. leU AUD Mull (- ) 12. leU AUD Mull (+)
7. Common B. Left MeIer Send 9. Right Meier Send
4. Common 5. Righi Oir Out 6. Right Mon Send
1. Common 2. Left Oir Out 3. Left Mon Send
Mono
"D" CONNECTOR
13. Common 14. Mono AUD Inpul R;ghl (- ) 15. Mono AUD Inpul Righl (+)
10 . Common 11. Mono AUD Inpul leU (- ) 12. Mono AUD InpulleU ( +)
7 . Common B. Common 9. Common
4. Common 5. Mono PGM Inp ut Righi (-) 6. Mono PGM Input Righi (+ )
1. Common 2. Mono PGM In put Left H 3. Mono PGM Input Left (+ )
@PINHEAD = "C" CONNECTOR
13. Common 14. +24V 15. -24V

7. Common B. PGM Insert Return g. AUD Insert Return
4. Common 5. PGM Insert Se nd Mull 6. AUD Insert Send Mutt.
1. Common 2. PGM Insert Point Send 3. AUD Insert Point Send
"6" CONNECTOR
13. AUD (Mull) Shield 14. AUD Oul (Mull) (-) 15. AUD Oul (Mull) (+)
10. AUD Shield 11 . AUD Oul (- ) 12. AUD Oul (+)
7. Common B. Common 9. Common
4. PGM (Mull) Shield 5. PGM Ou l (Mull) (-) 6. PGM Oul (Mull) (+)
1. PGM Shield 2. PGM Oul (- ) 3. PGM Ou1(+)
"A" CONNECTOR
13. Common 14. PGM Oul Mull (-) 15. PGM Oul Mull ( +)
10. Common 11. AUD Oul Mull (- ) 12. AU D Oul Mull (+)
7. Common B. AUD Meter Send g. PGM Meter Send
4. Common 5. PGM Ojr Out 6. PGM Monitor Send
1. Common 2. AUO Oir Oul 3. AUD Monitor Send
C=Common = Hard GND S=SI, icld = .471'" Car 10 GND
210.DLO Dual Line Output Module 8·7

8 - 8 210-0LO Dual Line Output Module

C1 C13
33pf lOpF
R2 LEFT C4 RD28
Rl 20Kcw TRIM
OK r----""1""-----------------------~B7 UNE OUT +
lK 33pF LEFT
FBI RB OUT RD2C LEFT
SET ~IM:"""---"
>~1----~~_r--_+-r_-_t-----------_C;2---------77)
LEFT 18 R7 20K
R17
<.7K 7
INPUT lK .': C22 UNE DUT-
55329 30.1.
6 C5 e16
'8
U28 >7c...J1-:+'1
~o;.f 2~ LEFT
MONITOR
47uF
353 e17 TRIM
RDJA e19
.1uF ~.7K R25
J3~F C23 R26 UEFT
RD3B 10K I __J.'~~ ------'.Q.-.. MONITOR
+ Lr--'f;:",~
+15 -lSV -= 20
2DK
R21 U4A
+ 353 47uF 100 SEND
~.7K RD3C
i'~ I
2 10K
47uF
1 U2A <.7K
+ LF353 +3
CIB 7
R01S 8 4 U4B
+ LF353
C6 4.7K
C14
fjUF _
33pF 31ZF 27
10pF +lSV -15V ':' +l5V-15V -
RID RIGHT 10K e2l
R9 20K cW TRIM DIC
".il<
R01A ~f------,
lK ~ 4.7K 33pF R29 LETT
FB2 , _.JRv2~B;.._-;;;2D'\iK\.=-c"_1w METER
RIGHT ~1'Z9_-I f~~~6 C7 RIB .. lK TRIM
INPUT UIB
7 + R11 13
L SEND U3A >!-:c:-"----~'i»:_-~
5532 +-----.---~3't+ S532A 30.1. 6
1r
+ 4 100
~7uf C26 R3D 9" UEFT
CB R. RETURN CIS ':,.!-~--"';+"1 ~ METER
'q
R01D lOpF
8 R12 14 lOuF 4.7K 353 lOuF 3.6K SEND
L MULT
100
I. COl ..L
C9 sb~ 10K
10pF
.1uF
C11
ROSS
33pF _ - - -.....- - - -- - - -- ______________...:4'-7 UNE OUT +
4.7K
-= RIGHT
+lSV-15V R16 OUT RD5C RIGHT
>2--1--------~~~------~--r_--_+----------------------------------------------~3~UNE
R1S 20K SET
lK ~
4.7K
UBB " 7 R33 OUT-
+ 55328 30.'.
4 CO2 C39
~tl
21 CRl R31
+24V~~__~~~--~~~ f"-.------ +lSV -= RD6D 33pf R41 RIGHT
4001 2.2 4.7K
R05D R-40 20K ew MONITOR
4.7K
"U~ R06A lK ~ TRIM

+.7K
,.;w;.._......----'j- C40 R42 6 RIGHT
f"-.---- -15V +15 -lSV RD6B IDA I + ~ MONITOR
C3D ~--"!+ -4 LF353 47uF 100 SEND
lOUF 4.7K 2 R06C
-47uF !=-+--'o/'ofV---1
~--......:.IC U9A 4.7K
<--------------ico: LF353 +.,,3,--, I
D4B
.7K 8 4 +15V-lSV
C35 43
+15 -15V 10K
10pF C41
- D4C
4.7K
RD-4A
il ouditronic~inc.
® -4.7K 33pF R45 RIGHT
-NONE
JFP
R34
UBA~5~~-3-2Al--------03D~.~,.--------J
R+4-
lK
20K cw METER
TRIM
- SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
MEMPHIS. TENNESS U.s.A..
<----~--------~+
CJ6
>'--+-----~,DuF
+C4~~I~
-JFP
.~
210-DLO
DUAL LINE OUTPUT
lDpF 3.6K · SEND
10/15/90 'i OF 1.1 88BOO803 +15V-15V

Chapter 9
210-Series Universal Timer/Clock
Module - 210-UTC
<il
©
o
EXT S IS
SLOW
©
FAST
ENABLE ©
,....,.
o START
o STOP
D RESET
210 lfTC
INTRODUCTION
The 210-UTC Timer/Clock feature consists of two displays located at the left of the meterbridge and a control module
located in the optional module section, on the left or right side of the console (user-defined). The lower window con-
tains the timer, reading In hours, minutes, seconds, and hundredths of seconds; the upper window contains the time-
of-day clock, reading in hours (12- or 24-hour format), minutes, and seconds.
There are seven user controls on the 210-UTC Module: The single pushbutton labeled "EXT SIS ENABLE" causes the
start and stop functions to operate with any appropriately-configured Input or TEL Module (see Field Options in any
Input or TEL Module Chapter). The three pushbuttons labeled, "START", "STOP", and "RESET" are mainly related to
the timer, while the other three recessed pushbuttons are primarily for the clock. These pushbuttons, in varying com-
binations, are used to set operating parameters and modes of both the clock and the timer, and to start, stop, and
reset the timer.
9·2 2ID-Series Universal Timer/Clock Module

OPERATION
Setting the Clock
To set the clock, a small, blunt-tipped instrument is required (a mechanical pencil with the
lead retracted, the blade end of a small screwdriver, the wooden end of a single-ended tape
head-cleaning swab, etc.). NOTE: The timer must be off and cleared in order for settings to
be made. If this is not done, the module will simply not respond . Aner clearing the timer, in- ©
",ow
sert the aforementioned blunt object into the bottom of the three recessed switches (Func-
tion Select). Notice that the timer window will now display the choices. Each press of the 0
EXT SIS
©
''''
Function Select will cause the display to scroll through its functions. In order: YEAR, ENABLE ©
MONTH, DATE, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, BRIGHT, and START? On each function, the "''''
o
recessed pushbutton labelled "Slow" cycles in increments of 1, affecting the right character.
The pushbutton labelled "Fast" cycles in increments if 10 , affecting the len character (year,
month, hours, and minutes are all affected this way). For our example, we will begin by set-
ting the year to 1991. Press the Function Select until the lower window reads "YEAR XX" (XX
Indicating the last two digits of the year (91) in numbers). Press the "SLOW" pushbutton until
o
START
the right character reads "1". Now, press the "FAST" pushbutton until the len character reads
"9". Of course, setting the slow and fast functions may be reversed.
Continue this process with the subsequent settings. Notice that the "FAST" setting will have
no effect on the Day function. In addition, both the "FAST" and "SLOW" pushbuttons will STOP
o
step th rough the brightness settings from brightest to dimmest.
Setting the Time

There are a few details involved in setting the time on the 210-UTC Module. First, the bright- RESET
ness setting follows the minute setting, so it may be advisable to set the brightness and
then scroll through to the minutes, making this the last one to be set.
210 lITe
To set the time, follow the above procedure. If the minutes are to be set to the precise
second, set the hours first, then set the 'minutes' display to one minute past the present Figure 1, 210-UTC
time. The readout in the clock window will continue to run, but when "RESET" is pressed, Operation Module.
the seconds will return to zero. When the present time arrives at zero seconds, press the
"RESET" pushbutton and the clock will go to the correct time ..
When setting the clock, the len window (where choices are made) will read in a 24-hour (military) time format. The
right window will read In the format for which the Dipswitch is set (see 12- or 24-Hour Operation , later in this chapter).
NOTE: If power is interrupted to this module, the time and date will be saved, however, the year will not.
Operating the Timer

The th ree pushbuttons toward the bottom of the module, labeled "START", "STOP", and "RESET", are for operation of
the timer. This timer operates much like any digital stopwatch. Upon power-up of the console, the timer will read
"0:00: ". Pressing the "START" pushbutton will cause the timer to begin running forward . It will continue to do so until
one of the other pushbuttons is pressed. The timer reads in minutes, seconds, and hundredths of seconds, and runs
up to 9:59 :59 and will then reset to "0:00" and co ntinue unless otherwise interrupted.
When the timer is not in use, the current day and date will display alternately in the timer window.
• Pressing the "STOP" pushbutton will stop the timer, holding the current time in the display. If the "START" push-
button is pressed, the timer will cont inue counting forward from where It was stopped.
• If "RESET" is pressed while the timer is running, the display will clear to "0:00" and stop.
• If the "START" pushbutton is pressed while the timer is running, the display will clear to "0:00" and continue run-
ning from there.
• If the "STOP" pushbutton is pressed and the "RESET" pushbutton is pressed while stopped, the display will clear
to "0:00" and remain stopped.
210-Scrics Universal Timer/Clock Module 9 - 3

• The External Start/Stop Enable pushbutton, when depressed, will allow the Timer to function when Input Modules
are used. For example, if a given Input Module is configured to activate the timer (either by pressing the "ON"
pushbutton or moving the fader, see Field Options for the desired Input or TEL Module) the timer will start. If,
while running, a second fader is moved up from 00, the display will clear to '0:00" and continue running from
there, exactly the same as if the Timer Module's START pushbutton is pressed while the timer is running (this can
be avoided by disabling the EXT SIS function Immediately after the Initial module is turned on). If several properly-
configured modules are ON at a given time and one is turned OFF, the timer will stop (this can be avoided by
disabling the EXT SIS function until the last module is turned OFF). In essence, the Start/Stop functions and
resu~s are duplicated by the ON/OFF selection of the modules when the EXT SIS function Is enabled.
12· or 24·Hour Operation

There Is a 2-position Dlpswitch located on the circuit board of the 21 O-UTC module. It is pOSitioned such that it Is ac-
cessible from the underside of the console and may be set without removing the module.
First, open the console's belly panel. This panel is held shut with 4to 6 turn latches, depending upon frame size, lo-
cated near the front of the underside of the console. Rotating these latches 90' will release the door and it may be
carefully dropped open, allowing access.
Locate the Dipswitch, DS1. This Dipswitch has two rocker switches, numbered 1 and 2. This operation involves
Switch #2 only. In the open position, as set at the faclory, the clock section will read in the 12-hour format. If Switch 2
is closed, the clock will read in the 24-hour (military time) format.
NOTE: As the UTC is a Universal Timer Clock Module, it may be used in a number of Auditronlcs consoles. Switch
#1 is used to set the UTC for the particular console in which it is installed. It is properly set for the 21 D-Series console '
and should not be changed.
~
tel Dlpswitch DS1,
@J Switch #2
rDS I
Figure 2, 21 D-UTC Module Component Location Diagram.
9 - 4 210-Series U niversal Timer/ Clock Module

1
>-
<1: ~!
--' Co
il. ; I ,
I~ I
(!1
U W
i= 2 I'- :
<1: :::>
~z
o
w O i
.rT' F I I CD '
= u<1: a
,,,, !~ tbdl
(flI
n. 31
0:
--' C-
<1:
," ,
<
d)
u -I
~
~
t-
:::>
1-
5
:;::-- ~
= ~1
z
w 1-
z
.<1: 0.. c
!~ I
c
7-J • ~iE<1: ;
.0
~z
12
i
.,11'
Ii ,
~
~
"
""
Ii ~
"
~
~ "
;; ~
• ~: f-
~
=
.;:.: 1
.-
'---
I~
----::c-
bE:
~
-
0]0
,-'
c=-
-
=--
11, r-<"
~,
, ,
...".
, ,
... i ... I I
I I"I~
' .
i,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...__ J
1 -- -- -
•••••••••••••
o P3
•••••••••••••
1 o
' : tJ'
Pl-
m'
•
2
3
RSl
Ps·
l • I
P2 •
m
•
2
3
.•..
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - -,:::_---:
- 1
RS2 • - .. "AC •
m
P6 •
•
2
3
o P4 •••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
1
o
""""'"
1iJ06rc1l!:
ORA.'NN:
OJE
ClUDITRONICS
ENGIlEE,f.
OJE 210 Clock/Timer
""""VB>. Display
OJE
DAn;
12118/92
.'"'"lof1 87A60755
j
To Master Display
P6
Shield Black
To Slave
To Moster
Display
Display
P3
P4
To Display Power
Connector
1 I '1l
L.0 +5v Red Connector
To Display Powerl
~ ~.OJ"''''
Master Display
-,=GcC!ND~ ~================121
P5
I I
i 12 I I 2 1_ _ _ _ _JB2lf;lalfckk_ _ _________ P5
To Moster
Display
Power Cable
...........
MilAYElDli
CIIA_
DJE
(lUDITRONICS
9iGMIR
DJE 210-UTC Master Display
to Slave Display
""""""'"
DJE Cable Drawing
.,.,.
"""lorl
12J\'lI9'l 84A19443
r------- - - - - - -------- - - - - - --- - - -- -- ---
To UTe Shield Black

P6
Pins 8,9,1 0
To UTC To Oispby
PI P3
To UTe rno TI~~ ~a~ rn To Motherboard

Pl3
TIMER Start Red 0 Connector' J'
rn 'Sv Red
------rn
roUTe
P'
o GND Black
ill
To Display Power
Connec1or
P5
rn .2..
To UTe
P3
2 ::: ::k
Red
0 ~ ;o~" ~.
4
••
Connector 'K'
...........
2iJU1WIIi
""'''''
DJE
(i'lUDITRONICS
""""'"
DJE 210-UTC to Display
Cable Drawing
AI'I'ROVH>
DJE
p-
I
I 84A 19392 I
OA.1E:
12122192 lofl
~-~ +Y
DROPPING RES$11
DROPPING RES LtJ ~ GND
FOR DISPLAY
EXT RESET ON
P6-1
Pt5-2
+5V OUT
+5V OUT
[
~
=~
-/~O~=jPj"~I-~'tt) £XTflESEl
RII J) EXT RESET
ON
ON
P6-3 HjV OUT
+24 UNREG P5-2
P5-I I ' I P15-4 +!5V OUT
STMT
=r
--'Z. _. ~ ~
P~7
. , . UNO'G PO-' l! I \.M2575T Pll-1 START OUT
o
~~ ~=e;
PII-3 STAAT OUT
~=~ '-~ fr~JA22 p~~~~

. . . UNO'G PO-' .1 U', - -'ll1lO1f'-- - - L COMMON
+24 UNREG J.J 1'1'1' Z5O:;;1 _ --- 1::\01,111 _ f" COMMON SS
N~
SlOP
t24 IN .
GNO,
C[)I1I1~~
COHHO~ 2. P5-9
fBuI" 'rAN'f :: fJoUf"--J'-- s ::r=
1
01,1 COMMON
COMMON Pl0- \ S SlOP OUT
COHHO~ L P5-IO o PIO J SlOP OUT
CCIiMON"
RESET
lN4148 ~ 0 P9-1 ~ RESET OUT

pg 3 RESET OUT
F"AST .Q.S2 CR2

~o ,.,
SLOV .Q.S3 IN .. H8
CR.
+5V r-------------~~O-----~
HOLD -9-S 1 IN''148
r-----------~~. C~
O------W4148
4
r---,--I..2!I'-'''jVCC
vcc
PI:: 5S ~C' Cl Ie,
. - 10uF" 10uF .-IO;.oF
PG4 "
TI
~!~18 ~~~ PG3.-o ..
~
leI 'JIR£.Sf.'r
PG2
f'Gl ~
PGO ~o
;Jc ,.".8
::5 IN:::
...--C..e..L4.
Pil-I
Pl.l 2
m;\4H PI;) 3
EXT STOP
[x·r STARr
f x·r RESEr
r o1UF CR13
'62
13 TDUTJ
I I I,
PF7 48
TOUT2
36 loon
PF6 4 } Ci~28 P9-3 ( Rf.SET
PfS .!§
65 Ie
PF<l
45 1~\1
HI
PIO 2 ( STOP
Pt3 44
rCI1IUF .... A7 ~~~Pll-J
:~ CKAO/ DREQO
PF?i?
I'rI ~!
Pf 'O 40
~':iV
DS!
r·
7
1 A5"
.... M ~ O.
lN4148
( START
r~====~S~9RXAO
RSl-2 c•
..li AJ u Ol
~ Ii I ~
101< I ~.
~~~ : ~:~r
TXAO ......i A2 ~ ~
:i1l= !"~'i'" rl1 _. _. _

56/DCDD ~
02 P9-' "SET
57 ICTSO
" 01
1
r-_ _",S8'1/RTSO
Ul ,I - - r;j AO
D~
laI"~
-j DIP.
~~~===~8==-~~
PES"
PEl 35
PE<'8 TESf
-' I "]0
7
l +-h
r 7
P('~ P'_'~
83 "XTAL
XTI'Il
- ~ ~..,~~
84 CLlt:
2 HPI
HPO PEl "
I PI
PI..,-7
1m
Rl':'1!I1nIl1Jlll:
o
00
~.
..... 30 PI P2-ll mr
,,- ~='t
rDS~
PD7 32
3\
rD. 28
PD1 . -. 1- - _ Pl,P'-O
PI,P'
PI,P" ,,_ en
"'"
err
+~v
'"
<=l
:r:
paz.
PD.:! 26
- .. _---
I P',P'_ ' '7 tr1l
~
.
39 VSS POt 2S
Itf Tnl 82 VSS

PDO
49 VSS
VSS
XIX161s13!41 xl xlXI 2.
~a -,
~~
-12
pe6 PI,P .. · ~~
I I III I III l1Iis\:

~~
21
PC4
PCJ 18
_I'
PCI 16
~m
I I I
~~
PI PO;;:
PI,PO;;:- w
P'~
PI P:
~~
,'- "
-18t=
-I'
.,(m
N
OJ
~
OD
;~ PA7IT[ND
71 PA6/DREQ pe6
...
PBJ 75 Pl,t.
PIn -3 .-~ A7
~6
~ '7 P'~' -5
76 AS
PA5/CKS
::~~;
~~ PM/RXS/CTS
-
P84 78 PI P':
- PA3/TXS ~'., ~~ -IL
~j Pfl2ICKAIIT[ND "'M ~~ -19 A2
AI
'--6~6"PAl/RXAl PBI 81 PI,P':
PAO/TXAI
;;I~ ~ ~ ~ ~ I~I~
II
~IO)I\D
1 . -21
~~ -25
PI,e:"
AD
GNO
7:'~:'~
~~~i':!
;'"h-
00000000
o~ .... t.o .. u>"' .....
I IIIII r-;;; ,
~I HH 58\67A
US
fih
~~
o ~ i~~ b
~
LZ § ~!~I~I § ~I~I
I11111 +5V .- . t-I-- --':I]NI·~I:.n
+Ov
jJ+ . 1-- --
111_' _ L'
'J P7-8
CHANNU 0 TRANSMrT ~
P7-3
CHANNEL 0 lRANSMIT
5
5. MEC
.,v
P6-8
CHANNEL I TRANSMIT ~OL2 ~R
P8- J
CHANNEl I TRANSMIT 32.768 Hz •P'O
5 PC
75159
P7 - 4,6 ) GND
ifl~'''1m, n17K
- -
'£ 1 7
- P8-.M ) GND l
+5V 1
8
5 P7- 2
JI CIIANNEL 0 RECEIVE
• P7-7
CHANNEl. 0 RECEIVE
-
,
<ii
UJ
7 P8-2 NOH'
21
~
CHANNEL I RECEIVE
P8-9
CHANNEl 1 RECEI VE
HPJ
auditronics,inc.
~E~PH':5_ ~I'IES:5EE. u .s......
75157
•
r
P7-1,9 ) ff\AME CROIJND
SCHEMA TIC
7
rJ7 ___
HPJ
UTC MAIN uP BOARD
FRAM' C.lOUNO
U/29190 1'1 0' _ ' 188B00797 -0 1

fSV
+\1 ( P5-1 g~ g;
GND: P5 2
el
!i+ lOuF 'y f~;~
--
~ -+5V
I
11
I RS2 10K
213 4 5 6 789 0
;
I I
I
P3,4-25 , I I P2 <:>3
1 I
GND
A7
P3,4-1
P3,4 3
-J- / i 1 1
A6 - I
AS
P3,4-S
P3,4-7
I I PI
3 I
KBD ENABLE I
~
~~I~ "'-
P3,4-9 I
eE4 I ~I~ ~1::::-
I
! , ! dltJ lgl~ d l~ d ltJ lgl~ d l~
I ~
+,v
RST
IIR
P3,4-26
P3,4-10
j
T~ iu
l§i U2
HDSP-2111
~
§i
u
U1
HDSP-2111
I~
RD
P3,4-11
'"
-=---- I~
CEO
P3,4 2
P3,4 -4
I I
I I~ ~ ~ ~ <: ~
,....lDlfl.,...,N~O
OClcooaOo
--- j...J V N < «0 f"-.!.DU"l'<tI")N-O -
-
eE2
l "'
I")
I.L..<<« 00 000000
P3,4-6
-~~ ~!~
eEl
eE3
P3,4-8
P3,4 ]011
I! L3 "'~
'" ~! ~
' 1~ ~l"'
",v n
~I~ ~ I l(,!;. ;( 001
N _
A4
P3,4 15 I,
A3
A2
P3,4 17 , !
Al
P3,4 19 I I I
AO
P3,4 21 I I I I
I
D7
P3,4-12 1 I i
,
D6
P3,4-23 I I !
D5
P3,4-24 i I I i
D4
P3, 4-22 I I
D3
P3,4 20 I
P3,4-1B I
D2
P3,4-16
D1
P3,4 13
DO
2 3 4 5 6 7 890
RSl 10K
1
"'5V t -- NONE
FilenClMel
Cil
. ®
SCH-UTC2
auditronics,inc.
HPJ .... EMPHIS. TENNESSEE. U.S.A..
~
-
~~
HPJ SCHEMATIC
UTC ALPHA-NUM DISPLAY
11/29/90 "i 0,_'.1 88B00799-01

Chapter 10
210-Series Equalizer Modules -
210-EQ and 210-PEQ
FREa
KHZ
IUOIl
12.-
"
0"
. '1.5
"."IG)~>
II· '11
;
s' 'e
3'+0' '3
60? ,20
lOW A
~iQ 3GO' ~ '30
~
o EO
IN/ OUT
EO
INlOIIT 0
210 EQ 210 PEQ
INTRODUCTION
This chapter deals with two related accessory modules; the 210-PEO Personality Equalizer and the 210-EO Sweep
Equ alizer Modules.
Both are intended primarily for use on the MIS Microphone Input Module!s) and both perform similar functions.
The 21 O-PEG is a monaural five-band graphic equalizer which utilizes a plug-in EQ card, the 21 O-EQP, with individual-
ized EQ settings stored on it. One EQP plug-in card is supplied with each PEG as standard equipment. Additional
cards may be ordered . Each On-Air talent is normally supplied with a personal EQ card with their individual EQ set-
tings. When it is his/her turn on air, the card is simply inserted into the module, the EQ enabled with the ON/OFF push-
button, and the mic is uniquely equalized for the specified user.
The 21 O-EO is a monaural, three band, continuously variable equalizer with overlapping bands of equalization. An
In/Out switch is provided to bypass the equalizer when desired.
The 21 O-EO is typically used in conjunction with, and is factory wired to, the channel insert of a user-designated 210-
MIS (microphone input module). It may be used with monaural line inputs or in conjunction with other accessories.
In the usual circumstance, these were ordered with the console and are in place. In the event that they are ordered
later, instructions for retrofitting may be found at the end of this chapter und er Installation.
10·2 210-Series Equali:lcr Modules

~ITE~~~we: 02 -lJO-.-
If}03
-&0-
--au-- 10
r---"
-c::J- . -(--'I' 000
RIO ,---- ----
- - (]I
~ 000 -
H ~\/U
·" ·v l~ 000
000
~
I
~O goo 1-----
en
~
_ _ _ J..§
-'
~ __ -"i. ___ J1
~
_-L5 _ -- _ J~ __
"" __ Jl _ ~l I
:0 I -'
'"
__ JJ _
__ L3_ J,
,l~O bf~
~
.~
~ ~ ~c:::J- ~
~ u
~l I
~ -
:01 '"
~
d 1 ~
~
oc
- _.
cj
~
'"
~
£j
51*
Figure 1, 210-EQ Component Location Diagram .
2tO-Series Equalizer Modu les 10 - 3

o
=
~
-0-0-0
o 800 00 00 0 , ]
~_=======____~~-o~-o~.~oJ~-- / J
Figure 2, 210-PEQ C ________
omponent Location -0'lagram.
J
' Equal"Izcr Modules

10 - 4 210.Sencs
The following is a brief summary of the features and functions of the 21 O-Series Equalizer
Modules. This section is intended to familiarize the Service/Installation Technician with the con-
trols of these modules, as reference to these controls is frequently made in the text.
1. Low Freq., Mid Freq., and High Freq.

These controls, on the 21 O-EO, Sweep Equalizer Module, are the main frequency controls. The
frequency range of the ' Low' control is 20 to 500Hz, the 'Mid" has a range of 300Hz to 6.5kHz,
and the ' High" has a range of 800Hz to 18kHz.
2. Boost/Cut
Above and slightly to the left of each of the three frequency controls is the associated
Boost/Cut control. These controls afford 15dB of boost or cut to each frequency setting.
3. In/Out
This pushbutton simply enables the equalization or bypasses the module.
.10 IQ
Figure 4,
210-EO, Sweep
EO Module.
1. EQP Card Insert (210-PEQ Only)

this is the slot into which the 210-EOP Card is inserted.
2. In/Out
This pushbutton simply enables the equalization or bypasses the module.
110 I'l1O
Figure 3,
210-PEO,
Personalny EO
Module.
2ID-Series Eq ualizer Modules 10 - 5

210-PEQ PERSONALITY EQUALIZER MODULE
Specifications
The five bands are centered at 200, 400, 700, 1500, and 2500Hz with a boost/cut range of ±9dB. Each filter of the
equalizer has approximately one octave bandwidth with a minimal audible effect of adjacent bands. Outside the fre-
quency range affected by the individual trim pot level controls, the response Is flat from 20Hz to 20kHz. Signal to noise
ratio referred to +4dBu (1 ,23V) with controls flat and gain at unity is OdB. THD is less than . 1% and typically below
.06%. The module will handle up to +20dBu level output, taking into account the Individual frequency level controls,
and the overall gain control, all of which are on the plug -in programming unit.
EQ Settings (210-PEQ only)

The plug -in card (EOP) may be inserted and removed with console power ON,
- With the PEa IN/OUT pushbutton set to "OUT" (to avoid audible pops and clicks), re move the EOP Card from the
PEa Module and insert the extender card (210-EPE) with the foil side faCing right. Now, reinsert the EOP Card onto
the extender. This will allow access to the necessary trimpots wh ile the module is operating, enabling the signal to
be heard while equalization adjustments are being made.
- Adjust all trimpots on the EOP to the center position; this is unity gain and zero dB boost/cut.
- Switch the 21 O-PEO Module to the "IN" setting.
- Adjust microphone monitoring to normal level.
- With a small, flat-blade screwdriver, adjust the EO of the five bands to the desired frequency response, turning
clockwise for boost and counter-clockwise for cut.
- When the desired response is set, push the IN/OUT pushbutton and adjust the gain control, R27, so that the level
and meter readings are the same In both the "IN" and "OUT" sellings,
- With the PEa IN/OUT pushbutton set to "OUT", rem ove the extender and replace the EOP Card to Its normal posi-
tion.
The 21O-PEO Is normally wired to the channel insert of a user-designated Microphone Input Module. It may also be
used in conjunction with other accessories.
P1 Connector
t3, Common 14, + 24VDC 15, -24VDC

10, Shield 11. VCA Control 12. VCA Control
7. Common 8. + 24VDC 9. -24VDC
4. Shield 5. Audio Input 6. -N/C-
1. Shield 2. Audio Output 3. Audio Output Mull
10·6 21 0-Scrics Equalizer Modules

210-EQ SWEEP EQUALIZER MODULE
Specifications
The 210-EQ Is a monaural, three band, continuously variable equalizer with overlapping bands of equalization. The
Low Frequency band has a range of 20 Hz to 500 Hz. The Mid-range is 300Hz to 6.5kHz . The High Frequency range
Is 800 Hz to 18 kHz. Each band Is capable of +/-15 dB of boost and cut. An In/Out switch Is provided to bypass the
equalizer when desired.
The 21O-EQ Is typically used In conjunction with, and Is factory wired to the channel Insert of a user-designated 210-
MIS (microphone Input module). It may be used with monaural line inputs or In conjunction with other accessories.
P1 Connector
13. Common 14. +24VDC 15. -24VDC

10. Shield II. VCAControl 12. VCAControl
7. Common 8 . +24VDC 9. -24VDC
4. Shield 5. Audio Input + 6. Audio Input (-)
1. Shield 2. Audio Output + 3. Audio Output H
2IO·Series Equalizer Modules 10 ~ 7

INSTALLATION (of either EQ Module)
Normally the 210-Series EQ Modules are supplied pre-wired into the console mainframe from the factory, however,
the case may arise that one or more Is added after the console Is in service or that the user wishes to change Its as-
signed input module to another position.
Like all other 210-Serles optional modules, the EQ modules have their input, output, and power connections mounted
directly on the rear of th e module. This allows the optional module 10 be interfaced to any microphone module in the
console through the use of the appropriate connoctor harness, which Is supplied with the module. Power to the con-
sole should be turned off during Inslallalion.
After the EQ Module has been physically mounted into its desired position in the console mainframe, the meter turret
should be opened and the motherboard connectors mounted on its underside.
Referring to the console connector location drawing In Chapter 3, Installation, the Installer should remove the Jumper
plug at location "6" of the Input to which Ihe EQ Module Is being connected. Harness #19075 should be used to Join
connector "6 " to the EQ Module. This completes Installation. Normal professional wire dress standards should be ap-
plied.
NOTE: If a 210-VC is to be connected to a MIS Module along with the EQ Module, cable harness #19080 Is reqUired.
One end of the harness Is plugged into the input position's "6" connector, the other end into the VC connector, and
the center connector to the EQ connector. This completes installation.
10 - 8 21 O-Series Equaliz.c r Modules

LOW MID HIGH
rl"'L
OK &
ROZL P(
C4L
I CGL
E-
RI'.,
10K·
!-___R,';;2:"'- C'"
Rl3H
10K+
RIZH
C4H CGH
~
10K. .01 C:L
10K-
R6L R'OL, .06. .0'
IK !~~, I 1
309
1<
RG" RGH IC2M<
+1 ell
'''? -RISL8 pW.
" ,. I.
1"
,OJ
RI5HB
c.
~
'
47 el .. +
__
R7L
181C k"E"v';'"
AUO ___ __
-- - I
-
IRISLA
-.J100J(
REV
AUO
47
R7.
CIH I
47
R7H
f'"'""""""I
lOOK
REV
AUD
6 .8 K
I• •
ROC I RS" R'H
R"
47<
lOOK
R4.
47,
lOOK
R4H
47K
lOOK
C>
C' ~---0./C __ J:), 8/C
Cc-;'{) SIC oow ccW\J
EO 33pF
IN/O~; 33pF RIEiM RZM RIGH R2H
P~I 10K L.IN R6
r- _ L'6l
AUO'O
Y ... R,
R3
'0" R2L j
p-z P-3
10K LIN
RI'"
r--~--'
I , 1 0K- P-3 P-4
, )--(!;
RIH I. 101(-
,.
P-4 RS 20K*
'" I .! C2L r-0-0 C2"
1
J I 20IC* OIC 10K" 10K'" 10K'" C4
LelSH C2H
~
'C2 'It 5532 .. (
,.
5532
L ... 1'_/ R2
,. ICI8
5532 47 47
I
47
!-___
20K+ RJL
10< R'"
,
~~ ~2 ..
0'0 P-,
'0< P-4 £-4<1 R'"
10< 8
SHIELD IilP-i I :
c' l <p~ I----'
<r Cf R.
~ J7 I
.47 '0<
r-0 p.,
t
i _~
Jf; I JI
AUDIO
10 ~' ~~~-------+---------------4----------~--------------------------------------------------------~
jn
OUT J8
L+[!]PO' I
0-"1 E-+--f-----1
8
P 2 NOTES .
I. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED·
I
RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS.
I
+2.....
03 R9
'" 1 §EG
I I ' P
-
P-4
CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS.
z. LAST COWPONENT DESIGNATION NUIIBERS USED · C9,D2, lC2BM,J8, REG 2, RU;M.S I
c:!Q
co"'~_____1IT~16___-1____.~---Jl~'":4~:0:0~
:i
lN400 1 7.05 -,
t" ' -
10 3 . STANDARD SET UP FOR 200 INSERT PT. USE, J2 , J5,6 J8 ARE ARTWORK CONNECTED JUMPERS
L:..:.!.@
fg
o DENOTES PI ~ 15 PIN AMP MALE
A
o DENOTES P2, 3.4& 5 PIN
SCAl.t·
® r'§l
~
I) P_I J
~ ,"400'
.. DENOTES 1-'" METAL FILM RESISTOR NONE
rAA'JM. ~ . inC
\I I 2E~,2,iSt rT~N~~S~~: U.S.A.
~
~4V ~p., I ~'O
C7
~._
L...J;;lP., ! 0
.: " C9
,0 02 tN;;I>CE: • •
'1014001 10 79152
REG r---J---.J--- SCHEMA TIC DIAGRAM
.... ~a ... £D 210-SEQ SIJEEP
... P-3
-.....(4)P-4
EQUALIZER MODULE
D~Tt · "",~£ .
12/6/90 1_1_ or_l

51 OUT
PEQ
~IN
AUDIO:: I 51A I
I GA I N
OUT ~2 R27
I CW CCW C7 C8
5r------O-!~~o--~-~~2i~+JR~2~~~15--~RV3~~~~--)l
s ' T~ - ,~3--~----~RV5~
IOK " "
14 IOOpF Irf~pF
AUDIO R4 R9 RII
IN 5I RI4
~~ 3K lOOK lOOK
'--______
'V
3K
----<"-'2::...j~ - R7 +C 5
I~ C I~').:.I~~'V'v-~c"h.._------+
r-rl--"-l + 3
r:::;: RIO ~~
10K
+~JO
100
COMMON~
'r- CI
. 47
RI
10K
11
;pC4
. +
....----:-I
R6
3 . 3K
R8
'1\0
C6·, ,,::;:
'1'
~V '
C9 "
100pF'
10K
1-
5V
RI2
7
K
47
RI3
10K
100pF 3K l OOK 100pF 10K
cb 0 0 0 0l~OST
r
20 0 Hz 400Hz 700Hz 15 00Hz 25 0 0Hz
~ R29 ~ R30~ R31 ~ R32~
/f'~~~ /:::~I; L~~ L% r ~ L~~ l~~~
~
iRI0?2';;K8 -l-
LI N +-____
CI2
RI
L%
- ' lA "'5__--,
IK CI4
.*".--
· ____-"R~17v____,
IK CI6
co-
CI 5
't'_·_0_6_8___R"",19v--,
IK
-l- C17
f'_. _0 _33____-'\R"'2,,1--,
' ... CU T I.
l-C19
02 2 ~___---.
;;:::::.022~7 . -i ~ ~~g33 /~ 1~,- ~~g22 ' " 5 ~

-:
b '· :;; V
.0 1 . 006S;::::
~;~, t~ ~ci:, -I- ':-~

l· 1 ,'O'~' ~7
10
:0'0'. ___
L-._ _ _ _ _ _ _- '
4
NOTES:UNLE SS OTHERWI S E SPECIFIED. scI.I.r·
@i 2E~p<;j.iStrT2.Q~£~: i~ScA'
RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS NONE
R25 CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICR O - IJI . ...... '
+24V 7815 +15V
G;J 8
10
C21 ; ~ ~
+
[::C23
.r (PIN 8
ALL l C s)
FARADS .
PI' 0 " 5 P I N AMP MALE
•I 10 01 EMiKC"
, IN4001 P2'O"5PIN PLUG IN PC FEMALE SCl1[MATIC DIAGRAM

COMMON
9 7
C22 ;: ...
R26 . I
+
; ::::C24
10
,02
IN4001
ALL OP AMPS' 5532
LAS~ COMPONENT DESIGNATION NUMBERS
.... ~.OV[D 210-P[Q PERSONALITY
EQUALIZER MODULE
~ }' OF_l_ 1
USED C24 . D 2 .1C48. R32.SIB ~"
-24V 9 7915 -15V
10 12/6/90
(PIN 4
ALL Ie s )
Chapter 11
210-Series Input Select Modules -
210-LSB, -LS14, LS10-1, -2 and-3
(§) (§) (§)

~
- ~
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
_ .-_.-.------
(§) (§)
-
~~
r- -
l - I- t-- -
l - I- i- -
-
'-- I- - -
-
I- - -
-
I- - I-
- !- - - -
- '- - - -
-
-- ~-
... ~ ~
- ... ~, ... - •• -
INTRODUCTION
The 21 O-Series Console System employs a number of Stereo Input Selector modules. Because of their basic
similarity In use and operation, all will be covered in this chapter with their similarities and differences painted out.
210-LS8 and LS8-14 Stereo Line Selector Module

The 21O-LS8 allows multiple (up to eight) line-level sources to be introduced into one selector unit in the console per-
mitting pushbutton selection of anyone of the eight sources to a Stereo Line Input Module. The LS8 Is a 7" module for
location in one of the accessory positions. The LS8-14 is identical but mounted on a 14" panel and must be physically
mounted in an input module position.
210-LS10-1, -2, and -3 Stereo Line Selector Module

. The 210-LS 10-1 allows multiple (up to ten) line-level sources to be introduced into one selector unit In the console per-
mitting pushbutton selection of anyone of the ten sources to a Stereo Line Input Module. This Is a 7' module for
placement in one of console accessory positions.
The 21 O-LS 10-2 is a dual ten input selector matrix providing two independent banks of ten switches each. The output
of each switch set is typically assigned to a different input module (or possibly one set to the 'A' input and one to the
'B' input of the same module). This permits pushbutton selection of anyone of the ten sources to the Input of the
stereo line module to which it is assigned. This is a 14" module for placement in one of the console input posrtlons.
The 21 O-LS 10-3 is a single ten input selector matrix similar to the 21 0-LS1 0-1 but mounted on a 14" panel. It must also
be physically mounted in an Input module position.
A Control and Pushbutton OveNiew will not be necessary in this chapter. Suffice to say that each pushbutton selects
a source, whose name may be written either on or beneath the strip next to said pushbuttons.
11 ~ 2 210·1..5 Series Multiple Input Selectors

REMOTE INPUT 1
,---------------------------------- INTERLoCKED INPUT S E ~CTOR-----------------------------------,
L R
-+-+
-n
<C
c
ro
~
'?
I' 0 i
~ I
C\
L-----....Q t
I ,L -
r
en
0
REMOTE INPUT 2
'"
en
","
r------------------------------------ 1NTERLOCKED INPUT S£~CiOR--------------------------------------.
"£C
-n
L R
-+-+
'N: L R
..... ---..;..
IN 2
.....
I
L R
-..:.-+
IN 3
T -+-+
L R
IN 4
.....
I
L R l R
- +--'-
IN 10
......
'
0" 99 1 ' TilT i ITIT i nrr I
1~ liOlt, :. _
"
0
~~L; '4,--0----0
ffi"
<D
iil I III :T III ~ I II I I i I II ~I
+
RIGHT OUT
N'
~
0
~
~W--{)I I ~I ~-
t; ~ , +
'"~.
0 iI I I
,~~ LEFT OUT
,
:;;:
"-
>6'
n
:;-
."
c
'"n
0
n
~
~
~
'"
----
.•
-D. J;
d
2:
,-- r:- J.
'. B -
+-
t__ = --C(,
- ~"
n,oI
+ -rfT-I --on
j L_r_:_~ -- -n·'
- --fJ '~
0
- - ---- -----D" -~
§
+- rrF-/.
-- - ,
LI__~ - --rl '!
· __ ···C), J
. . - ~ --~
f -- ~-;-
n'
"
o '~
+ rrn
LL:= [ j:' -~
-- n',
· _--o ,J
~
.
-------
+ J-rl1
LJ:_OL::.
---0',
--[]::
---I;~
- 0 ,'(
rr:r7.-
'I J 1 [ • --0n
0'
--
o ~
----{], ' ---
+-
!r Pc6. 8:;
--
Figure 2, 210-LS8 Signal Fl ow Diagram.
11 _ 4 2"lO-LS Series Mulliple Inpul Selectors

INSTALLATION
General Information
This section consists of two parts: Connection of an existing LS Series Module and retrofitting an LS Series Module
Into an operational console.
To Introduce multiple stereo signals into a Stereo Line Input Module, first, locate the connector bracket. This bracket
Is located Inside the console against the rear wall and holds four 15-pin MR connectors which lead to the LS Module
in question. This bracket is accessible by lifting the meter turret cover. NOTE: On the LS8 and LS 14 Modules, the con-
nections are made directly on the rear of the modules; the above-mentioned bracket does not exist.
Installation Instructions
According to the Crimping Instructions in Chapter 3, construct cables with appropriate connectors on one end for the
equipment from which the stereo signal originates (cart machine, CD player, etc.) and with 15-pin MR connectors on
the other for connection to the inputs to the LS Module. Pin assignment may be found later in this chapter.
NOTE: The pin assignment table deals with one set of four connectors. These four connectors serve one bank of ten
(10) selector switches. In the case of an LS 10-2 Module, there will be two sets of four input connectors in two brack-
ets. They will be labeled accordingly.
There is a series of 1.5" diameter access holes in the bottom of the console. When completed, these cables may be
run into the console through the access hole nearest the connector bracket and the connections made. The output to
the desired Stereo Line Input Module will have already been made at the factory.
Retrofit Instructions
General Information
Normally, these modules are part of the original order, however, if one is desired in a console that is currently In use
(or the user wishes to reassign an existing module, the following section will supply step-by-step installation Instruc-
tions for same.
IMPORTANT: It Is NOT recommended that any preliminary work (especially drilling) be done before the
module and associated peripherals are In hand. This will significantly reduce the chances of error In calcula-
tion, both In the choice of location of the module and of its associated hardware.
Supplied in the LS Series kit is: One LS Series Module (as per order), all connector cables, connector bracket(s) , ap-
propriate mounting hardware.
A given LS Module comes equipped with all Input wiring intact. This input wiring consists of a series of cables
originating on the circuit board of the module (connectors PI through P20 - see Figure 3, Location Diagram) and ter-
minating with four (4) lS-pln MR connectors (eight MRs in the case of an LS10-2 Module). All connectors are
labeled lor ease In identification. Each group of four MR connectors will attach to a connector bracket secured to
the inside of the console body. Signals from outside wl11 enter the LS Module through these 15-pin MR connectors
(pin assignment for the input connectors follows this section) .
The output of this module Is configured in a fashion similar to tile inputs, In that the signal originates on the main
board of the module at connectors P21 and P22 and terminates at a 15-pln MR connector. NOTE: If an LS Series
Module is ordered for retrofit to an already-installed console, it is important that i1s location and the input module to
which It is assigned be decided In advance. The LS Series Module may be mounted In a variety of places and the out-
put cable must be of sufficient length to reach its destination module.
210·1.,,<; Series Multiple Input Selectors 11 - 5

Installation Procedure
NOTE: Console power should be "OFF" during the installation process.
After the Input Selector Module has been physically mounted into its desired posilion in the console mainframe, the
console should be opened and the connector bracket mounted. Three 11 /64' holes must be drilled (according to In-
cluded template) for mounting of the connector bracket. This bracket may be mounted basically any place that there
is room and that the cables reach. The lower Inside rear wall or inside bohom of the console are preferable. If the In-
side rear wall is chosen, access may be gained by opening the top of the meter turret. If the inside bohom Is chosen,
access may be gained by lifting the module/motherboard assembly. The only restriction for placement of this bracket
Is the length of the Input cables from the module itself and the existence of other components that may be in the way
of a direct connection. Sharp turns of the cables should be avoided.
If, due to the physical location of the console, drilling is Impractical, a strong double-sided tape such as
Scotch® Brand VHB ryery High Bond) may be used. The bracket should be mounted as close to the LS Module as
possible. Once installed, the four input connectors may be snapped into the bracket.
According to the Crimping Instructions In Chapter 3, construct cables with appropriate connectors on one end for the
eqUipment from which the stereo signal originates (cart machine, CD player, etc.) and with 15-pin MR connectors on
the other for connection to the inputs to the LS Module. Pin assignment may be found later in this chapter.
NOTE: The pin aSSignment table deals with one set of four connectors. These four connectors selVe one bank of ten
(10) selector switches. In the case of an LS 10-2 Module, there will be two sets of four input connectors in two brack-
ets. They will be labeled accordingly.
There is a series of 1.5" diameter access holes In the botlom of the console. When completed, these cables may be
run into the console through the access hole nearest the connector bracket and the connections made. The output to
the desired Stereo Line Input Module will have already been made at the factory.
The output cable must now be connected to the Stereo Line Input Module. Lift the module/motherboard assembly, ex-
posing the connectors.
WARNINGII Be sure that the module/motherboard assembly Is securely locked In the UP pOSition. Serious In-
Jury can result If the assembly Is aCCidentally closed while hands or fingers are Inside the console shell.
Referring to the console connector location drawing in Chapter 3, Installation, locate the "A" Connector in the Input
Module position to which the LS Module will be connected. If this module has been previously in use, the existing
cable must be removed. This will be replaced with the output connector from the LS Module.
This output cable will be configured at the factory as ordered. If, however, this is not the case, use the "A' Connector
table under Audio Signals in Chapter 5 to determine pin assignments. This cable is constructed in the same manner
as described above.
11· (i 2 10.1.-5 Series Multiple Input Seleclors

LS10 Pinouts
"A" Connector
1. Shield 2. 1 In Left H 3. 1 In Lell(+)

4. Shield 5. 1 In Right (-) 6. l in Right (+)
7. Shield 8. 21n Left H 9. 21n Lell (+)
10. Shield 11. 21n Right H 12. 21n Right (+)
13. Shield 14. 31n Left H 15. 31n Left( + )
"8" Connector NOTE: The LS 10-2 Module Is

Shield 2. 31n Right H 3. 31n Right (+) essentially 1wo LS10s grouped
1.
4. Shield 5. 41n Left (-) 6. 41n Left (+) Into one face plate, therefore,
7. Shield 8. 4 In Right (-) 9. 41n Right( +) each group of four input con-
10. Shield 11. 5 In Left (-) 12. 51n Le" (+) nectars is represented by th is
13. Shield 14. 51n Right H 15. 51n Right (+) table.
"C" Connector
1. Shield 2. 61nLe"H 3. 61n Left (+)

4. Shield 5. 6 In Right (- ) 6. 61n RighI ( + )
7. Shield 8. 7 In Left H 9. 71n Lell (+)
10. Shield 11 . 7 In Right (-) 12. 71n Right (+)
13. Shield 14. 81n Left H 15. 81n Lell (+)
"0" Connector
1. Shield 2. 81n Right H 3. 81n Right (+)

4. Shield 5. 9 In Left H 6. 9 In Left (+)
7. Shield 8. 9 In Right (-) 9. 9 In Right (+)
10. Shield 11. 10 In Left H 12. 10 In Left( +)
13. Shield 14. 10 In Right (- ) 15. 10 In Right (+)
LSB Pinouts
"#1" Connector
1. Shield 2. 1 Left/Mono H 3. 1 LefVMono (+)

4. Shield 5. 1 Right H 6. 1 Right (+)
7. Shield 8. 2 LeIVMono H 9. 2 LeIVMono (+)
10. Shield 11. 2 Right (-) 12. 2 Right ( + )
13. Shield 14. 3 LeIVMono H 15. 3 Lell/Mono ( + )
"#2" Connector
1. Shield 2. 3 Right H 3. 3Right( + )

4. Shield 5. 4 LeIVMono H 6. 4 LefVMono (+ )
7. Shield 8. 4 Right (-) 9. 4 Right(+)
10. Shield 11. 5 LeIVMono (-) 12. 5 LeIVMono (+)
13. Shield 14. 5 Right (-) 15. 5 Right (+)
"#3" Connector
1. Shield 2. 6 LeIVMono H 3. 6 Lell/Mono (-I- 1

4. Shield 5. 6 Right H 6. 6Righl(+)
7. Shield 8. 7 LeIVMono H 9. 7 LefVMo no (+)
10. Shield 11 . 7 Right H 12. 7 Right (+)
13. Shield 14. 8 LeIVMono H 15. 8 LefVMono (+ )
"#4" Connector
1. Shield 2. 8 Right (-) 3. 8 Right ( + )

4. Ground 5. LeIVMono Out (-) 6. LefVMono Out (+)
7. Ground 8. Right Out (- ) 9. Right Out (+)
10. Ground 11. -N/C- 12. -N/C-
13. -N/C- 14. -N/C- 15. -N/C-
210-I...S Seri es Multiple Input Selectors 11-7

L-------=
Cl
U
I~
0)
(j)
CD Cl co
«: u (j)
CD
«:
'-"
u
I~
CD Cl ill
«: u (j)
-\~1 CD
<t:
0
( ,
I~
~~ CD
«:
Cl
u
I~
CD a n
«: u (j)
~~ CD
«:
a
u
I~
~\l CD
~(
Cj
u I(Jl
. D'agram
Figure 3, 21 0-LS 10 Component Location I .
. Ic I nput Selectors
11 - 8 210-1....~ Series Mulllp
.....4
5
S1E
0.
1 SID oT
I
CONNECTOR 4
NONE
-- MVS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
[;;;-==---1210-LS8, INPUT SELECTOR
.,," ,-
1l/29/90 _1_· OF_l_
I
I P.FJ,jOTE INPUT 1 I
~1~i~~i+~1:1~~i+ITN1~I:i~~i·~i~I~~i+r~1~1~~i·~1~1~I·r~l~i~~I·~i·~i~~I·r~i~i~~i+~i~I~~i·r~l~i~~l·~l~I~~l~r~i~1~~1· ~1~1~~1·Y~I~I~~I·~I·~I~~I·r~I~i~~I·~i·~r~~I·r~lfl+~i~i~i+r
«««
1
< : « ' <" '
< < 1
II,Clem
«< 1
aJI!IClIIIIDCl
1
!
0"
111111
....
' ,I'
•• 0
1
t.luoouo
1
OUOUlul
U 1
.
uou
11 °00
1
OC COQO
1 " occo 1
a:' ~,
~
, , , n, 1 ' ,
N- ~~J1! ~r ~~i~~ I ~ TI7
, -,
N
• • ~• I~B ~
-.I. ;
. ~ N
, -'
~T
1 ~., "~N~!7
A
-ii: ~ ~ ~~.I
~ )',J,..).+"i. N'L - "
~ ~- "~ -m
A
~"
' ,
•• •~
1r
N -
J,.b~.i,J...;.
~
N
• •
N
N
Q. 51,., '"
0.
pO)
Do. II.. D,. Q. II.. SIB II.. CL. r : 111.. : S1B •• ••
, N
~
li: ~ S18 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 SIB ii: ii: iL iL SlB
N
ii: 0: ii: 0: ii: iii: ISlB

I
~ ~ ~
N
••
I I
1S'1B I
~
N
• ( ~ "N !,
N
I51B
3'
P22 ,
~T II ~T :1- ~I IL-<i~T I ~I ~r
L.<;"-O-- ~T I ~I
1L.<;"-<>-' L.<; 11
P22 1
,
: "'NTl
1 ~~G :~~~
-0 -0 "<>-
-0 --<J
-0-
cr, f-<,I I ~l, ::f, W '.11: W ~1 T~ wT
'\)- : ~ 1 1', T%
1
%T T 1 T" .• T T 1
- 1 w 1
~ P21 ~
SHIElD
I :1 I I II
I
.--<> 1 1 ,I 1 :1 I I' I I :1 I I I I P21-'/ : l£:JTPlfT 1

L- 'I
I
~ - I -.-:L ,I T -<>~ L , ;:r---'~ ~
I 0 1- 0-
- CI 1 P21-2/
, SlOW
I
P22-3
P22 1
P22-2
/
:
SHlEU>
"~Tl
PZl-3 O\I11'lfT 2
PZl 1
PZl 2 :SHlill> ~J
~
-
-
-
NONE
KVS <it auditrOQ.!.~cinc.
~~ u.s...o..
RCO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

210-LSIO-2 INPUT SELECTOR
~9/90 "i OF--L

Chapter 12
210-Series Tape Remote Modules-
210-TRS and 210-TR6
210 TRli 210 TR8

INTRODUCTION
The 210-TRS and -TR6 Modules are available for controlling tape machines directly from the console. Mounted in one
of the accessOlY module positions at either end of the console, the TR6 is Identical to the TRS, with the exception of
an additional switch for a ' Pause' control. The switch leads in both modules are terminated in connectors mounted on
their rear panels.
Complete Installation instructions may be found on Page 12-3.
As the controls are rather self-explanatory, the Abbreviated Control and Pushbutton Overview will not be necessary In
this chapter.
12·2 210-Scrics Tape Remote Modules

INSTALLATION
The 210-TRS and -TR6 Tape Remote Switches are identical In function, the only difference being the addition of the
"Pause" pushbutlon in the TR6. Either module can be supplied with the console or ordered for field retrofiUlng. like all
210-Series optional modules, the input and output connections are found on the rear of the module. The TRS and TR6
schematics will show the installer the configuration of the switches and their connector pins. Note that connector J1 is
the one located at the top rear of the module. Installation of the module can then be undertaken by simply mounting
the module in the desired location on the console and using the remote control data taken from the tape machine
owner's manual.
All switches are supplied with illuminating lamps, which may be accessed by snapping off the switch caps with a
fingernail. The lamps may be removed by pulling up on the small brass tab inside the switch body.
A fourth connector with no pins Installed has been provided in the event that the user may wish to connect the extra
set of contacts on each switch for secondary uses.
210-TRS Connector Pinouts
Jl
13. Lamp 5 14. Lamp 5 15. -NIC-

10. Lamp 4 11. Lamp 4 12. -NIC-
7. Lamp 3 8. Lamp 3 9. -NIC-
4. lamp 2 5. Lamp 2 6. -NIC-
1. Lamp 1 2. Lamp 1 3. -NIC-
J2
13. Sw. 5 Common 14. Sw. 5 Normally Open 15. Sw. 5 Normally Closed
J3
Connector Body mounted with pins but not wired at the factory.
210-TR6 Connector Pinouts

Jl
13. -NIC- 14. -NIC- 15. -NIC-

10. Lamp 5 11. Lamp 6 12. Lamp 6
7. Lamp 4 8. Lamp 4 9. Lamp 5
J2
10. Sw.4Common 11 . Sw. 4 Normally Open 12. Sw. 4 Normally Closed
4. Sw. 2 Common 5. Sw, 2 Normally Open 6. Sw. 2 Normally Closed
J3
13. -NIC- 14. -NI C- 15. -NI C-

10. -NIC- 11. -NIC- 12. -NIC-
7. -NI C- 8. -NIC- 9. -NIC-
4. -NIC- 5. -NI C- 6. -NI C-
J4
Connector Body mounted with pins but not wired at the factory.
210·Scrics Tape Remote Modules 12·3

~
N
.;.
N
:5
&,
n REC START STOP FF RW
".
--- --- --- ---
n
~
51 52
----
53 54 55
;;;l
'0 I I I I I
n
'3"
0
0
o-r,::NC
ONO
o-r,::NC
ONO
o-r,::NC
ONO
o-r,::NC
O NO
o-r,::NC
ONO
;;
ill ill m u~N01151

NC
;:
..
8.c
~
J2
to
1
t>K
~NO
("
3
4
("J ~;
6
v;L i-J
10
6L
I11
O
12
13
6t:.'
L' L2 L3 L4 L5
e ~ ) )C\l
!l II l II
\
c: 0
5.
•;;
Co I
0
~
J1 8 10 OJ]
w
.0
N
I
J3 OJITlITJ 0~~ 00m ~OJ]~ fi]~[i]
NOTES: SCAlE'
®
1.
2.
3.
4.
L 1 - L6 ~ 28V Lamp. No. 85, Wedge 6ese
$1 - 55 == Momentary. DPOT, Break- Ol.:~ Clicker
Pins of J4 ore user-assi gnab le
The abb re viations "NO" and "NC" ston d ~or
_v. NONE
M\.IS
(NGIt<Eft.
(fj
~ auditronics,i[1sc
MEMPHIS . lENNESSEE, A
•
"Normally Open" and "Normally Closed", respectively M,·I~
~~~2/90 I"'r OF_I_ I 88A00308

REC PAUSE START 5TOP FF RW
S1
-'i"-
o--ro NC ~NC
52
-'i"-
---
~NC
S3
I -'i"-
o-r:e
S4
NC ----
~NC
S5
I
S6
--"l"-
o-j~NC
rn m
I ONO ONO ONO NO ONO ONO
~.\jC
m ill ill
I
J2
4 ~NO 6
[;1
10 :-' 1 12
~ ~O~
J3
L1 L2 L3 LS L6
2;
J\
II II U tl
\
~ 0 0
~~
~
•;;
~ I
. I,
~
'~
J1 QJ!7i
.~
'"
N
J4 OJ 12:
<, QJ
,0 8J @J [Ii [?J 0 rn ii:2l [DJ @I II] 8 !ill
N
~
o NOTES, Sto'l..[· ® I
@ ?E~pc;j,istrT~NQ~£~: i~SCA I
In
n
o. 1. L1 - L6 = 28V Lome , No. 85, Wedge Bose NONE
~ 2. 51 - 55 = Momentary. DPDT, Break-Out Clicker -~.
:;l 3. Pins of J4 are user-.:lssignable "VS
'0
n 4. The abbreviations "NO" and "NC" stand for [lG[),£U,
1;'
3
o
"Normally Open" ano "Normally Closed", respectively "VS
~_IJV(II
SC HEMATI C DIAGRAM
210- TR6 -:-APE REMDTE I
".:2- CDN'i"ROL
c
~
~ Al(.
10/2/90 'j' OF_II S8100412

-
!
'"
12 • 6 210·Scries Tape Remote Modules

Chapter 13
210-Series Mixer Modules -
210-L13 and 210-MX6
.._----_ .... - " ._. _._- '-""
@I @I
.!.
·'C)'. ON
,
" 0
.!.
·'C)'. ON
,
,
" 0
·'C). ON
ei
,
~
0
·'C)'. ON
o·
,
~
0
·'C)'. ON
o
,
\0
0
·'C)'. ON
o· io
0
210 LI:J 21' MXO
INTRODUCTION
The 210-MX61s designed as an alternate mixing module to Interface with a given 210-MIS Module. It allows the
operator to mix line-level inputs from six sources to the 21 O-TEL or to some other line-level source.
Input Characteristics are:
Input Type: Active unbalanced

Input Impedance: 3kQ
Nominal Input Level: +4dBu (1 .228V RMS)
Due to the nature of the cable harness involved, this module Is intended primarily for factol}' installation at the time of
console manufacture. The Aud~ronics, Inc. Customer SeNice Department will be happy to provide a quote for special
retrofit cable harnesses upon receipt of the detailed information necessal}' for application design.
Designed as an auxllial}' mixing input for the 210-Series consoles, the 210-U3 provides three (3) stereo mixing Inputs
to the Program and Audition Busses.
Note that the connections to the mixing busses of the console do not occupy the send/return points In the output
modules, but instead lie directly to the motherboard busses by way of standard connectors.
Input Characteristics are:
Input Type: Balanced transformerless

Input Impedance: 20kQ
Nominal Input Level: +4dBm
Complete installation instructions may be found laler in this chapter under Installation.
13 - 2 2I0-Series Mixer Modules - LI3 and MX6

The following Is a brief summary of the features and functions of the 21 O-Series Mixer Modules.
This section is Intended to familiarize the Service/Installation Technician with the controls of these
modules, as reference to the controls Is frequently made in the text.
210-MX6 . 1•
There are essentially two controls on the 21 O-MX6 Module. These two controls appear on each of
..(!):
' , 6
the six channels.
' , 6
· I .
. (!):
1. ON/OFF
.1.
• • 6
The ON/OFF pushbutton, when depressed, simply enables or disables the selected channel.
{!J:
2. Level
' ,6
·I .
The Level Control adjusts same for the selected channel.

. (!):
· I .
210-L/3 -.(!):, 6
;
There are three channels on the 210-1I3 Module, each Identical to the other. We wi ll therefore
· I .
' ,6
describe one channel only.
..(!):
1. PGM ... ~
This pushbutton, when depressed, assigns the output of the 1I3 Module to the Program bus. Figure 1,
210-MX6 Mono
Mixer Module.
2.AUD
This pushbutton, when depressed, assigns the output of the 1I3 Module to the Audition bus. -0
NOTE: The PGM and AUD on any channel may both be depressed, sending the signal to both bus-
"0
ses.
3. Level O©
This rotary potentiometer simply controls the level of the signal to the chosen bus. -0
-0
4. CUE
This pushbutton, when depressed, assigns the signal In the chosen channel to the CUE system, al-
lowing the signal to be previewed through the console-mounted CUE speaker or in the head-
O©
phones. ~O
-0
Q©
... u.
Figure 2, 210-1I3
Line Level
Stereo Mixer
Module.
2tO-Series Mixer Modul es - 1.13 and MX6 13 - 3

INSTALLA TION
210-MX6
There is a number of options available for the wiring of the 210-MX6 Module depending upon its intended use. In its
most basic function, the 21 O-MX6 Module might be used to mix several mono microphone signals into one module
such as the 21D-TEL Module. As th is module requires a line-level Signal, connections from microphone modules must
be made from either the mlc module's Insert point send or the Insert point send mult pins (see Connector "B" in
Chapter 4 for pin assignments). External line-level sources may be used as well.
There are two IS-pin MR connectors on the rear of the 21 O-MX6 Module. These connectors contain all input and out-
put Signals, power, etc. If you are following these instructions, you are apparently retrofitling this module to your
operational system. In the Introduction to this chapter, it was suggested that the specific intentions for this module be
explained to our Customer SelVice Department so that Auditronics, Inc. might make up the cables for your particular
application. This Is highly recommended. If, however, you are making the cables yourself, the MX6 Pinouts below will
be of assistance.
If the 21O-MX6 Module Is to be connected to an MIS Module, it may be introduced through the insert paint. See the
pinout list for the "B" Connector on Page 4 - 5.
As in all installations of this kind, refer to the Crimping Instructions in Ctlapter 3. Normal professional wire dress stand-
ards should be applied.
MX6 Pinouts
"#1" Connector
13. Shield 5 14. Input 5 15. Input 6

10. Shield 4 11. Input 4 12. Shield 6
7. Shield 3 B. Input 3 9. Common
4. Shield 2 5. Input 2 6. Common
1. Shield' 2. Input 1 3. Common
"#2" Connector
13. Common 14. -15VDC Qulpu! 15. + 15VDC Qutpu!

to. Common 11. Common 12. Common
7. Common B. Audio Out 9. Audio Out Mult
4. Common2 5. Common 6. Common
1. Common1 2. + 24VDC 3. -24VDC
210-L/3
This module allows the user to mix three (3) stereo line-level sources into the Audition, Program, or Cue busses of the
21 D-Series Console.
Input connections are in PI and P2, located on the rear panel of the module chassis. Connector PI is located closest
to the meter panel. See the Pinout table below.
One of two cable harnesses is used to wire the outputs to the console motherboard, depending upon whether the
mOdule is to be mounted on the left or right side of the console.
If the 21 D-L13 Module is mounted on the left side of the console, harness connections are as follows:
The IS-in AMP connector plugs into P3 on the L13.
P1 on the harness plugs into motherboard connector .J., (See Console Connector Location Diagram at the end of
Chapter 3).
P2 on the wiring harness plugs into motherboard connector "H".
13 - 4 21O·$eries Mixer Modules - L13 and MX6

P3 on the wiring harness plugs into the connector located between the ' B' and ' C' connectors at the left edge of
the motherboard.
The remaining white wire with a terminal lug on the end should connect to common via a screw in the console
mainframe.
Double check all connections before applying power. Pay particular attention to the "H" connector, the power connec-
tor. Wires should be connected to Pins 1 and 3 (+24VDC and -24VDC) . Be sure all plugs are properly oriented In their
sockets w~h the locking tab properly seated.
If the 21 D-Ll3 Module is situated on the right side of the console, harness connections are made as follows:
The 15-pin AMP connector plugs into P3 on the rear of the Ll3 Module.
P1 on the wiring harness plugs into motherboard connector "J ' .
The three unshielded wires must be inserted Into the motherboard Program "0" connector as follows:
Purple Pin 3 (-24VDC)

Red Pin 2 (+24VDC)
White Pin 1 (Common)
The four shielded wires must be inserted into the motherboard Audition "D' connector as follows :
Program Left Pin 2
Program Right Pin 5
Audition Left Pin 11
Audition Right Pin 14
Double check all connection before applying power to the console, especially the power connections to the Program
"0" connector.
Installing the output wiring completes installation. Apply power to the console. Using an external oscillator set for
+4dBm output at 2kHz, verify proper operation of all inputs, assign switches, level controls and CUE switches.
Improper operation is most likely due to wiring errors during installation.
L13 Pinouts
"#1" Connector
13. -N/C- 14. ·N/C· 15. -N/G-

10. ·N/G- 11. -N/C- 12. -N/C·
4. Shield 5. Input 1 Right H 6. Input 1 Right (+)
1. Shield 2. Input 1 Left (- ) 3. Input 1 Left (+ )
"#2" Connector
13. Shield 14. Input 3 Right (- ) 15. Input 3 Right (+)

10. Shield 11. Input 3 Left H 12. Input 3 Left (+)
4. Shield 5. Input 2 Right H 6. Input 2 Right (+ )
1. Shield 2. Input 2 Left H 3. Input 2 Left (+)
"#3" Connector
13. Common 14. + 24VDC 15. -24VDC

10. Common 11. CUE Audio Output 12. CUE Logic Output
7. Common 8. AUD Right Output 9. Common
4. Common 5. AUD Left Output 6. Common
1. Common 2. PGM LeN Output 3. PGM Right Output
21 0*Sc rics Mixe r Modul es · J.l3 and MX6 13 - 5

13 - 6 210-Scries Mixer Modules - LI3 and MX6

PGM AUD
I 1
I-
T'$a Y"S5
, C?,7
~
,
R3'"
10K
.7 I
R37 ~J..c-t
1
- 10K
...L
I-
Cit I
RIGJ.iT
1-
I-
1-
_ " L
p.r6,., T
'-
N!)T[!;,:
c.w. :.
L£.=T I. UNI..,,5~ c,Tf.I£RwLSG SP£-:'ZF1ED:
/?cc "'~~A)Jl'C V.lJLU£c ARE JAJ()J..IMS
Mr~RQI=AI?.lJDS
1- C!JPACITAii2£
t:. Lt. c ,
VALVES I N
c..DMPQroJEMT D ESIGJJAT7/JN S9
NU-;;'S;'RS USED : (:.?B, D4.,It:B, P-!,R48,
c 1.
0 1
R31
f!!.--.--_ +15V
(10
10 IN4CJ'.')j
+ CZ0 D4 iO'ltE·
~ 9E~P~,iSt rT~Q~S~~:
10 IM4(JOJ NONE
-- iUnScA·
("::;1.-0;1,
SCHEMATlC DlAGRAM
""'VOV[l) 210-LI3 3-LINE
INPUT MIXER
UT[.
1217 /90 ~i' or_I_I

NOITS:
I. RESISTANCE VALUES ARE JAJ OJJMS. CAAllCITANC£
VAWEf1 ARE IN MICRrJJ:ARAll5'..
2. LAST C{JMPCJIJENT DESIGNATIONS US£l);
t:.7, D4,IC3, P-Z, RZI,su,
OIJ
"YSI
I C.I 53pF
RI3
7 RIA
~
OIJ 16K ('.5 RliD
~I--"':"'::...jl(-~Mt 1M@) OUT
lsz 1:'3 ~ 47 100
Sl-l.
f'-Z 7
1
C4~
-t5V -=-
+15V
RI7
10
P-Z 15 +/SV
l
,
~ RI8 j P-2@ COM
P-2 14 -t5V
OUT
J
10
ON [:5 Rlq
""V7 D ICe. T P-Z Z ..;.24V
154 +/5V 7815
]IJ4()OI /0
G
+ C7
CI
,,
I
o.........,-~
IN4aJll 110 1"-2 @CO!Y1
.&. AA/AWb Cf)MMON PiN IVO'.!..
,
I~&
,
i P-/: 3,"!9 .l
ON -=- DZ
""V7 ! P-2: -i, c., 5, lD, 10, II~ If. .
lAI4flOI
IS5 RZO
-15V , P-Z :"; -ZAV
I 10
TN4001
ON
YsiD
1
SC"lE·
NONE
tl'tMIH.
(10
~ 2E~P~,ist rT2.Q~£~: i~.cA·
l
Dt&J,..;U.
' ·RZI SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
10K
"'~RQV£D 210-MX6 6 INPUT
MONO MIXER MODULE
110.,[,
1217 /90 ~0j' OF_I_I

Chapter 14
Voice Controller Modules -
210-VCP and -VCN
@\
~
Q.
OUTPUT
1g
R
• D
e
... DT
N
~:I
'.f
" .•
,..0
10..
••
~ I H ~~~
R
E
.a.•
o
!, : : 0
I...
COMPReSSOR
(;5=
D 10
r,::- i
18
e
~I
RAllO
THRESHOLD 18 ",,,,,,I
- COMPRESSOR -
le ;1
18 ......1
"©D 0
81C1W.
l':: ~ J
Ci
THRESHOLD
-NOISE GATE-
S"!W.
"©D
NOISE GATE
0
IN/OUT
210 VCP 210 veN

INTRODUCTION
The 21 O-Series Voice Controller Moduie is a stereo signai processing device comprised of a Noise Gate and a Com-
pressor/Limiter, each section being capable of operating independently or in unison with the other, The module's
design uses peak sensing circuitry to control fast transients along with log release characteristics to allow long
release times with fast Initial recovery, Both of these features are ideal for maximizing average audio levels,
input to the module Is left and right stereo, and the output is a 20dBNoit control voltage to be used on the VCA in an
associated Input module (210-MIS or 210-SLI/SLB), Since, in stereo operation, only one control vo~age is generated
and applied to both the left and right VCAs, stereo matching is beHer than 1%,
The 21 O-VCP and -VCN are essentially the same, the main difference being that the -VCN Module's controls are
recessed under a blank panel, ensuring that control calibrations are not changed,
14 - 2 210-Scries Voice Controller Module

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER CIRCUITRY
,
DYNAI1ICS
I IN/OUT
G
SUBTRACTDR
GENElI"'TlJl! I AA,:::l S'lJITCH
" - I n CD""'.IL1l\lT~~ ~
<5.
0:
a;
DrNH1ICS
GD-ICRATO R IiTL--=:-J
II •• I + T ceNTRO\.. VIl. .
. ,J.,. ~ "~"",.
I~.J:.AA. ~,·l ;~Em'6,
O-i
.,1..... I , I'
'" A"AL:~
T I1R(~J..O..~
'""",G
""" '''''''' I I
t
~
~~G'< r;u~t
S(u:C;~
0 VAALt.BL( lAne
-"< il:~>;Tn _ _
:tv>\JTLJ~
IR£~
lJUI'TER
OU TPUT
Q. CO" LEVEL
CQNTHOl
"0
<1)
G01£ .... !~;;!

"'HI'Urt[R
0 ., AlIPI..lTODI:
G;;>(AT(i<:
CGNlROl
"~ (ITKil
MeASURE
20,,9 ... "
t:ITHCR
VOLTAGE
"'"' """' ""

~
$:
0
!.. ~ ... ~
:.~3t.JT D---;~
~'--------.!
,,~
OU TPU T
a.
c
m
Cf)
<5.
INPU T SIGNAL CONDIiIONING AITACKIR(L(AS( ~"'NGE
OUTPUT CIRCUI TRY
"
~
GENCRATllR ::"_lNG IN/OUT
svnCH
fl "0" CCHPMATOR
¥
"< '" DYNAMICS
i--+--j! Cl.AI'P I ! GATt
:;.J oc~W-
~. 9 #
0
..J,.. ~
Q ""'"
T~SI-O...D
ATTACK R(L(JIS(
,~'" .1
GAT(
en
"
~ NOISE GATE CIRCUITRY
""5:
c
~
"
"
~
~
:.
1. Output Control
The Output Control con trols the main output signal of the module. After an input signal has
been processed by the module, this control is used to maintain nominal unity gain through the
input module.
Q CD
2. Gain Reduction Display
This bargraph meter (which operates regardless of the module's INIOUT status) Indicates the
difference between input and output level, assuming no gain has been added (output control at
l·@l
0 ! ~O
0
.::
"'""'"
III
·0") .
~~
3. Ratio Switch (VCP only)
The Ratio switch allows the operator to select the ralio of change between input and output.
0 ~Q 0
4. Threshold (Compressor section) 0 ~b
With approximately 50dB of range, the Threshold control sets the audio reference level above
which compression or limiting is to occur.
6 0
-
WRflHOLD
5. "Signal Muted" LED ...

-NOi&' fl.I.TE-
Figure 2,
This LED Illuminates any time that the Noise Gate calls for muting of the signal. 21 O·VCP Voice
Controller
6. Threshold (Noise Gate section) ~"d Ul~
., ...,~I 0
The Thr eshold control varies the audio reference level; if the audio input level is below the refer·
ence, the signal is muted. Ii
'
'j
7. IN/OUT Pushbuttons
Both the Compressor/Limiter and Noise Gate sections of the Vo ice Controller Mocules have an O ~O
eo"'"'-&!Iaoll
0
IN/O UT Pushbutton. This simply enables or disables lis respective section within the module.
The Noise Gate and Compressor/Limiter sections of this module may be used independently of 1;:-- ,
one another or slmullaneously. CD I~::;;I
1--
e ~
I 0
8. Ratio Control (VCN only) 0 I~~
e .~
0
Ifa ::1
The Ratio control allows the operator to select the ratio of change between input and output. 0 . to-. J
9. Range Control (VCN only)
The Range control sets the amount of attenuation applied to the input signal whenever it is 0 -
~w
OJ 0 0
below the threshold reference level.
~
NOlI' QATE
Figure 3,
210·VCN Voic e
-
"""'
Controller
Module.
14 - 4 210-Scries Voice Controller Module

INSTALLATION
Normally, the 21 O-VC is supplied pre-wired in the console mainframe from the factory . A situation may exist, however,
where the module is ordered for retrofit or the user wishes to change its assigned input module to another position or
add another optional module such as a 210-PEQ, for example.
As all 210-Series Modules, the 210-VC has Its input, output, and power connections mounted directly on the rear of
the module. This allows the module to be Intertaced to any module location In the console through the use of the ap-
propriate connector harness, which is supplied with the module. As always, power to the console should be OFF
during installation.
After mounting the module into Its desired position in the console mainframe, the meter turret should be opened and
the module/motherboard assembly flipped up to reveal the motherboard connectors mount on its underside.
WARNINGII Be sure that the module/motherboard assembly Is securely locked In the UP position. Serious In-
Jury can result If the assembly Is accidentally closed while hands or fingers are Inside the console shell.
Referring to the Console Connector Location drawing at the end of Chapter 3, the installer should remove the shorting
plug on Connector "S" of the input location to which the VC Module Is to be connected. If the input module is an SLI
Module, cable harness #19079 is required to join Connector "S" to the VC connector.
If the VC Is to be connected to an MIS Module with no other modules In use, cable harness #19075 Is required be-
tween the Input's M B" Connector and the VC connector. Again, connection of thIs wiring harness completes installa-
tion.
If the VC Is to be connected to an MIS Module in conjunction with a 21 O-EQ or -PEQ Module, cable harness #19080
Is required. One end of the harness is plugged Into the Input position's ' S' Connector, the other end into the VC's con-
nector, and the center connector to the EQ or PEQ's connector. This completes Installation.
The installer may now refer to the 210-VC Checkout Procedures detailed later In this chapter and to the Set-Up and
Operation section, earlier in this chapter.
A schematic diagram of the 21 O-VC Module may be found at the end of this chapter.
P1 Connec1or
13. Common 14. + 24VDC 15. -24VDC

10. -N/C- I\. -N/C- 12. VCA Control Output
7. -N/C- 8. -N/C- 9. -N/ C-
4. -N/C- 5. Aud io Input 'A' Mult 6. Audio Input 'B'
1. -N/ C- 2. Aud io Input 'A' 3. -N/C-
2ID·Serie$; Voi ce Co ntro ller Module 14 - 5

- -
~ •
- e-o
-~ - -I>+-
;;
~p
®B ®1~1r:: :~~M:: 5®®JJ@B
~
~
~
,-
- r <D ... a Q C_M
rt.1I'l «I() -+4-
IU-OJ ITI 1( "I

~ ~
- (~~
--B
~
n. ~
I 1111 I II :;;
U'
®Er]EIJ ~
~
em
~.
~
«~
G~[~~l:: :-~::: 5Et~t ~®®8

~o~
o_~
-~ -
~ ~ ~
-CJ-
~N. g
- + -~ ~ ®
i m
c-::(i)H-
®~B ~~ [:~o: :5~B~ r-)

c~
~
,-
;;
~ ~ _ +U_N
-0-
"" ~o~
- ~ GV
I
--ta: ,...~ a: ~
-rrr::wl -· ~IC01 :t;~
-o~
- ~-
~I/Hf ;; I'.l 1. ___ .1

I U'
-{§)- Gf c::U
:':: J D~~
-~ -o n
~[(01 _~_ lo~O -:-~Wo ~'o _~ 00) -
- ~J- ~ - - [~-oJ -
1-; ~-=-
g -~ -
0
- uoe~IB®~0P.~S®~
- -,.
~
U~ C~ I
c~~~ M ~-==~:
;; 0
~i!'J-- -'
Figure 2. 210-VCP Component Location Diagram.
14 - 6 2I0-Series Voice Con troller Module

SETUP AND OPERA TION
In that it Is rather difficull to adjust Ihis unit with both sections operating simultaneously, it is suggested that the
operator set up the Noise Gate first, followed by the Compressor/Limiter.
Adjust the console for normal operation. If the 210-VC's associated input module is an MIS Module, use a live
microphone as the source. If an SLI Module is used, the suggested source material is pre-recorded music with
medium to high dynamic range.
Noise Gate
The Noise Gate's function Is to remove all audio below a given, user-designated threshold. The Threshold control on
the VCP Module Is front panel-mounted due to the fact that voice levels vary from person to person, as well as from
music source to source. The un~ should be adjusted for each situallon, this adjustment best being done by ear. The
red Signal Muted LED will illuminate any time the module audio Is OFF.
On the 210-VCN Module, this (and all other controls) is located beneath the blank panel.
Adjustment
Depress the Noise Gate's "I N/OUT" pushbutton (to the "IN" posillon). Release the Compressor/limiter's "IN/OUT"
pushbutton (to the ' OUT" position). Set the Noise Gate Threshold control to "0" (zero) (full CCW on the VCN Module).
Stop the Input material so that the only signal in the Input module is noise from the source reproduce electronics, or
studio background noise if a microphone is used.
Rotate the Threshold control clockwise until the Signal Muted LED just barely illuminates. Now rotate the control Just
a b~ farther so that It stays lit brighlly.
Re-introduce the program material. The LED should extinguish and natural-sounding program material Should be
heard. It is recommended that the user take this opportunity to experiment with different setlings and to take note of
their effect on the program material. This is the best way to become familiar with the un~'s general operation.
NOTE: If background noise is particularly high, the action of the Noise Gate may cause a "swooshing' sound as the
gate comes in and out. In such cases, the gating range may be adjusted via RS8 on the module's printed circuit
board (see Figure 2).
On the 210-VCN Module, the Range control is located with the other adjustments under the panel (see Control and
Pushbutton Overview on Page 14 - 4).
Compressor/Limiter
The Compressor/Limiter acts to suppress transient signals above a given threshold in order to keep the output of its
associated Input module from exceeding a desired level. This portion of the 210-VCP Module operates In three basic
stages: First, a Threshold control on the front panel determines the level at which compression is to begin; Second, a
compression Ratio control determines the amount of compression applied; Third, an Output Level control varies the
overall signal level after processing.
Adjustment
Release the Noise Gate's "IN/OUT" pushbutton (to the "OUT" position) . Depress the Compressor/Limiter's "IN/OUT'
pushbutton (to the "IN" position) .
Set Compressor/Limiter Threshold and Output conlrols to "0" (zero) (full CCW on the VCN Module) . Set the Ratio
switch (VCP Module) to '2". This provides for a mild compression ratio of 2:1. Gradual CW movement of the trimpot
on the VCN Module will increase the compression ratio.
21O·Scrics Voice Controller Modul e 14 ~ 7

Although the front panel controls have been reduced to the bare minimum to reduce the likelihood of operator and
confusion, all controls associated with each device are available for adjustment. Those controls most capable of sig-
nal degradation due to Improper setting are set via circuit board trimpots. Following are the internal controls and their
factory settings:
Noise Gate
Attack .3ms/20dB
Release .. 5 sec/20dB
Range . 60dB
Compressor/Limiter
Attack . . . 3ms/20dB
Release . . . . . . . . .5 sec/20dB
Variable Ratio . . . . Infinity (hard limiting)
Due to the fact that field adjustment of these controls is extremely difficult to achieve without seriously degrading sig-
nal quality, Auditronics, Inc. recommends that units be returned to the factory for recalibration if/when required.
Field Alignments
Situations may arise wherein the user may decide that the particular application of the 21 O-VCP Module will reqUire a
departure from the factory settings. NOTE: The attack and release trim pots for the Noise Gate and Compres-
sor/Limiter are extremely sensitive even though they are 20-turn devices. Note the following recommendations:
1. Attack trim adjustments should NOT be attempted. Even if the factory setting of 3ms is doubled or halved, no
audible difference will result. Realignment to 3ms requires a sophisticated pulse generator and a dual-trace storage
oscillator.
2. Release trim adjustments should be undertaken with utmost care. Although they are best executed with a pulse
generator and a storage scope, they may be attempted by ear. Be sure, however, to mark the factory set starting
position and to keep track of all adjustment turns so that the trimpot may be returned to its original position ~ neces-
sary.
3. Be sure to check and double-check that the pot to be trimmed is the correct one. They are located quite close to
one another and may be mistaken.
Refer to the component location diagram at the end of this chapter for the location of the trimpots and the direction
they should be turned.
Noise Gate
The gating attack time should be fast (3ms - factory setting) and the release time should be long (.5 sec - factory set-
ting). If the audio sounds choppy, it is usually due to an overly short release time. Also, an excessively fast attack time
tends to blur beginning syllables, due to the abrupt interruption of the wave front. The range control determines the
depth of attenuation of the audio signal when the input module is gated off. This is factory set to 60dB. In instances
where the background noise level Is very high, the action of the noise gate may cause a "swooshing" sound. This
may be alleviated by decreasing the amount of gate attenuation through adjustment of the Range control:
1. Using an external oscillator set for 2kHz, set the console up for +4dBu IN/+BdBu OUT for SLI Modules, or-
SOdBu IN/+BdBu OUT for MIS Modules.
2. Depress the Noise Gate ON/OFF pushbutton to the ON position and release the Compressor/Limiter ON/OFF
pushbutton to the OFF position.
14 - 8 2I0-Series Voice Controller Module

3. Rotate the Noise Gate Threshold contralto "0" (zero). With only the test signal assigned to the PGM output,
verify the\atthe console's PGM output Is +8dBu.
4. Rotate the Threshold control clockwise; stop rotation at the point where the Signal Muted LED Illuminates.
5. With a voltmeter across the console's PGM output, adjust the Range trim until the console output reflects the
level of desired attenuation. For example, for -25dB of allenuation, the range control should be adjusted until the
console's output reads -17dBu (25dB below +8dBu).
Compressor/Limiter
Attack times are adjustable between 100 pseconds and 10 seconds, and release times from 2 mSec to 2 minutes. Ad-
Justment of attack and release times are factory set to 3ms and .5 sec, respectively, a combination which covers the
vast majority of requirements.
While the VAR position of the ratio selector switch is factory set to a ratio of infinity:1 for hard limiting, the user may
wish to set this contralto some other ratio:
1. Using an external oscillator set for 2kHz, set the console up for +4dBu IN/+8dBu OUT for SLI Module, or-
50dBu IN/+8dBu OUT for MIS Modules.
2. Release the Noise Gate ON/OFF pushbullon to the OFF pOSition and depress the Compressor/Limiter ON/OFF
pushbutton to the ON position.
3. Rotate the Compressor/Limiter Output and Threshold conlrols to "0" (zero) (full CCW on the VCN Module).
Place the Ratio switch on "VAR." NOTE: On the VCN Module, the ratio Is preset at the factory for 2:1.
4. Rotate the Threshold control until the top segment of the Gain Reduction Display begins to illuminate, then
back off slightly.
5. Increase the external oscillator output by 10dB. The Gain Reduction Display should indicate 10dB of gain reduc-
tion and the console's PGM meter should indicate no change in output level. This is due to the action of the factory-
set infinity:1 hard limiting ration on the VAR position.
6. Adjust the VAR trim to achieve the desired ratio setting using the 10dB oscillalor increase as a reference poinl.
For example, for a 10:1 ratio, adjust the VAR trim so that the console output indicates +9dBu, I.e. the input has in-
creased 10dB and the output increases ldB. For a 5:1 ratio, the output would increase 2dB, and so on.
In the event that unqualified personnel may have tampered with the sellings of the 21 O-VCP and the user is unable to
return the variable settings to their proper levels by physical realignment , the user may implement the follow ing proce-
dureto return the controls to a close approximation of the original settings:
1. Place a 3.5-digit digital voltmeter from ground to the wiper of thetrimpot being adjusted.
2. Adjust the control so that the proper DC voltage shown on the chart below is indicated on the wiper of said trim-
pol.
Noise Gate Attack -13.57VDC

Release -13.86VDC
Range + 2.98VDC
Comp./Llmitef Attack -13.36VDC

Release -13.93VDC
If satisfactory performance cannot be obtained after these adjustments, the module must then be returned to the fac-
tory for recalibration. This procedure is not covered under the standard One-Year Parts and Labor Warranty. Return
authorization must be secured from Customer Service before returning any goods to the factory to prevent any ship-
ment from being returned unopened.
Contact: Auditronics' Customer Service Department

3750 Old Getwell Rd.
Memphis, TN 38118
(901) 362-1350
21O-Series Voice Control ler Module 14 - 9

CHECKOUT OF THE 210-VCP
Prior to checkout, it is assumed that the seNice/instaliation technician will have selected and completed all module
option wiring as described in the module wiring section. The console should be properly grounded and Intercon-
nected with all auxlllal)! systems.
Test eqUipment required: AC Voltmeter, Calibrated Oscilloscope, Audio Frequency Test Oscillator terminated with
600£1.
Turn console power ON.
Referring to the console connector pinout tables, connect the oscillator to the input of the SLi or MIS Module as-
sociated with the VCP.
Adjust the oscillator to produce a 2kHz sine wave at +4dBu (1.9v RMS) for the SLi; -50dBu (2.45mv RMS) for the MIS.
Turn the associated Input module ON and set the fader to '0' attenuation. This should put a -2dBu output at the Input
module's direct out. If not, adjust the fader accordingly.
Engage the PGM assign switch. PGM left and right meters should read OdBm.
Depress the Noise Gate IN/OUT pushbutton to the "IN" position; release the Compressor/Limiter IN/OUT pushbutton
to the "OUT' position. Rotate the Noise Gate Threshold control back and fonh slowly fro '0' to ' 10". The Signal
Muted LED should illuminate slowly and extinguish quickly as the threshold reference level passes through the actual
Input level. The PGM output meters should go down slowly and come back to "0 VU" quickly, Indicating that the VCP
module is, in fact, controlling its aSSOCiated Input module.
Now, release the Noise Gate IN/OUT pushbutton to the "OUT" position and depress the Compressor/limiter IN/OUT
pushbutton to the "IN" position. Set the Output control to "0" (zero) and Ratio switch to "VAR". Rotate Compres-
sor/Limiter Threshold control from "10" to "0". At a point near "5", the Gain Reduction Display will begin to illuminate,
one segment at a time from the top down, indicating increasing gain reduction. Stop rotating the control when the dis-
play Indicates 20.0dB. Note also that the PGM meters have been dropping and should now read "-20 VU". This
verifies th at the Compressor/limiter Is, In fact, controlling the associated input module.
'Flip' the Ratio switch to "4' ; the Gain Reduction Display should now read 15.0dB and the PGM meters "-IS VU". Flip
the Ratio switch to "2'; the Gain Reduction Display should now read 10.0dB and the PGM meters "-10 VU"
Rotate the Output control clockwise and obseNe that the PGM meter is increasing its reading. Stop rotation when the
meter indicates 0 VU.
Release the Compressor/Limite r IN/OUT pushbutton (to the "OUT' position) and note that the PGM meter still indi-
cates 0 VU, while the Gain Reduction Display still Indicates 1OdB. This Is because the amount of gain reduction Is al-
ways displayed even if the Compressor/Limiter is not in control of Its associated input module. Note that moving the
Compressor/limiter Threshold control will change the Gain Reduction Display but not the PGM meter reading.
14 - 10 2I0-Series Voice Controller Module

r - - - - - - - - FVI.. .. WA V E - - - - - -- --,1iIolAG ,cO WP." R. ! r - - - - - LCG liMP 206 8 /V-- - - ---, ,--- SUBTRACTOR~ r-------------.c.SYWETRICJ.L. I.Y£AAG£R-----_ __ _ _ _,
."
2~OTI(~
.. "" $I.O W
tr:l V
.,0
--:'~O~,-,
+
o
co f",
I 5V - - : , . , . : - - - - 15 V
RE\..EASE
I~ 'O:~, % ~'~" C) r------'"'~ .,," ,.

'w
I
"C2
I
" 33 #""
• {"". \' RI6
1. 82 1<,1'1'.
IIZ I
r-:-:~":::;--'I-"---i."
l O. I'I,I% C'it"
;C W THRES HOLD
101(
1'1 £ 5511 le9S
J
~ """ I ',"" L
,. , ~ CI RI
:.:.,-,r....,r--':'::""..,.---~
1~e>B
,L~5l , , I~!'!;'" . ----:~~·~,:~':'~,~-',!.'~'~'..,.---l',,~",,
,j.l/o<,,?-l,
02
V; ,; ,
• i""r
"
.. 7",
I C7
[leiA
- ,
$',0
.",,%
'"
,:Ie!!s , 20d8/V
1~"'''''%
:..
'"
lC 5:'
"j
, SU8T;ucrOA
'.r::--.......
!lCI~';':'c...~_-1
1'127
CIO
~: JI
• -
1CI04 :..
~ ~gO K fgK-;~;V ltl

l '~;'c'
,I~.'.8 " . ';".:,."',, t-C:~:':c,-,-r--'1J L-c"'.'--If-f---r-1'~ t--··,:·'--1~-----~-,-,-l.I~V~
~ ';~K! fA2: ~~v·~5V 1~
10 101( 1/0' 4148 R I7 , ' 3 !!3 353 • 101( j5,.. GAIN + 15\1
_ .". • AI: 1"10 10 K R26 .. - 15V 'X"OIO -15v REDUCTION
, •
3 53 f1 30.
1% 11( 10. IIl,I % I I( " .. ' t ~ 1... 4 148 r;-~-:-:t--=·~'tMJ~~4
' =-
...• HE5517 :C9 j, ' _ .... ,
AS R9 i . .; ;15V ' . , R:S Z LM391 .. d.~
! 10K,I"4 1101C,1 "4 11 06 L------i-+---...-----+---t----;;,:,,~,~o---· ~;: II( " : 'C/ #
I-~ L,,~>-; L ,,;~., 1"1' rtJeGB ~~' C~

IN2: ~~I-'=-',"::-:-_j-_,~---'-J(/;~~;B
10 10K
" 'I '~ ~;6:
I '", .. ,
'"
IH~ I:: '~;~vI /, m'V- I
'1,-~-;-"-.~
L..-..:....
'0 0' I " L ~~'
",0
.-'r,-~-o,-,010 AI2 I ~F
'lOK '-
","
"
R~
3K
"-?".,
~~~~.. ,c
i@0 i: ,::..,
IO""
3
!:3
~I~V+~V
t-----------------j"
GROUHO CL AM P
•
+';':T---~;"f~~,C·--S-l..~~v
"n"
20 r Ui'fN
-
IN
.
::c ..
"
'.
.. ~~
..
r:3
"I 'C/
c-.
It'
f.":\
R" RIO ,1!eTS
I. ~ ! 35! r-f-----------r-------"----i-------------------------t-------------------------------"'-. ,., ~
L-..;Ii.'-OO-'----+'-O'I ----T-----+'--l...--~I-· '---r-t_-----ilt-l-

I
____-J.~r===~I::::========:::;I_--------;OU9u'
Ii A !.I9 [«: 1> 4'
.c- , j~i
10 ''-::\
CI
F4sr
'"
+ 15V
'" .,
'0 ' TO S Ll VC,l,
C O NTROL
THRESHOL :l
"', " ,
" 0"
SU MMING
INPUT
;13 4 10K lC 138 ..
-+- I :IV --:,~o·,'""'cc."t'-
_-_-'-0
•
, !~CI28
OJ,
'"
R:!!
, '". '0' I
" NONE
'0'
~ C"
"
.,
"
ouditron
MEMPHIS,
IC S, Inc ,
TENNESSEE, U .S. A .
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
"
i-::~;;;;."v=,.---j 210 - V CP vor CE
CONTROLLER MODULE
- - - NorES---
12/6/90 . . ~l OF_l_j -----I
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED : :'I.L DIOOES 11«"'.8

RESIST"HCE ..... LUES "AE IHOHWS .
C"P'&CIT"HC( V"LUE5 "JIIE 1/11 MICII DF.&l'I "OS.
COM .. ON~~"~---------_+----_r----,.---t_-J LAST COMPONENT DE SIGNAT ION HUIoIBERS USEe :

CI&.020.IC ..... LEO I. M I . R60 . Sl
~ . ' '<I PONENT DESIGNATION S NO":" us;:: : :)"7
Chapter 15
210-Series Line Output Selector

Module - 210-LOS
~ A
, LINE 1
fEED
U
~
-P
G
! LINE 2
~ FEED
'=='
2jO loa
Introduction
The 210-LOS Module provides the ability to feed Program and/or Audition output to two destinations, for example, an
AM and an FM transmitter.
The "6" connectors associated with the DLO Modules in the Program and Audition positions are the output connec-
tors on the 210 Console (see Connector Location Map on Page 3 - 15). The 210-LOS Module Is essentially an exten-
sion of these connectors In that n allows the user to split the signals and send them to two destinations rather than
just one.
As there are essentially only two self-explanitory controls on the front panel of this module, a Control and Pushbutton
Overview will not be necessary in this chapter.
lS - 2 210-LOS Line Output Selector Module

I LINE 1 SELECTOR
AUD
L R PGM L R
-+ - +
T -+ - + T
.-+++-+-0::.-J..-o-t-t---t-'
1
__ 0 1
'-----""' '1-0 --
--
-- -10---
I n
lr---o+
1
u-
RIGHT l
01-1-- --0 I ~I_o'--D -
(J" L- _~--__
~J
~+ LEFT J
OUTPUT
I LINE 2 SELECTOR
I
AUD
L R L R
- +- + - +-+ T
lr---o+
I
ro----o-
RIGHT l
--0
. -I--
-0
-n
~ ---_J- C!..I-O------D I-
I
-0
-C!. I"-O----D- -
I EFT
J
OUTPUT 2
L-_~
Figure 1, 210-LOS, Line Output Selector Signal Flow_
210· LOS Line OUlput Selector Module 15 "3

INSTALLATION
INPUT CONNECTIONS
After physically mounting the module in a suitable position in the console, a cable must be constructed to run be-
tween the OLO Modules (main console outputs) and the LOS Module. See Crimping Instructions on Page 3 - 6 of this
manual.
There are two variations on the wiring of the 21 O-LOS Module, both of which are covered in the following text.
Using the Program OLO Connector Pinouts on page 8 - 6, the Audition OLO Connector Pinouts on Page 8 - 7, the
Connector Location Map on Page 3 - 15, and the LOS Module Connector Pinouts (immediately following), construct
a cable connecting the PGM Left and Right outputs on the OLO to the PGM Left and Right Inputs on the LOS.
PGM 'S' CONNECTOR LOS CONNECTORS
B13 · PI - 1
B14 · PI - 2
B15 · PI - 3
Bl0 · P3 - 1
Bl1 · P3 - 2
B12 · P3 - 3
B4 · PI - 4
B5 · PI - 5
B6 · PI - 6
Bl · P3 - 4
B2 · P3 - 5
B3 · P3 - 6
AUD 'S' CONNECTOR LOS CONNECTORS
B13 · PI - 7
B14 · PI - 8
B15 · PI - 9
Bl0 · P3 - 7
Bll · P3 - 8
B12 · P3 - 9
B4 .Pl-l0
B5 · PI - 11
B6 · PI - 12
BI · P3 - 10
B2 · P3 - 11
B3 · P3 - 12
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Output 1 Output 2
P2-6. Line 1 Right (+) P4-6. Line 2 Right (+)

P2-5. Line 1 Right H P4-5. Line 2 Right (- )
P2-4. Line 1 Right Shield P4-4. Line 2 Right Shield
P2-3. Line 1 Left (+) P4-3. Line 2 Left (+)
P2-2. Line 1 Left H P4-2. Line 2 Left H
P2-1. Line 1 Left Shield P4-1 . Line 2 Left Shield
15 - 4 21O-LOS Line Output Selector Module

A variation on this w iring configuration would be to jumper the signals from the Line 1 Selector on the LOS Module to
the Line 2 Selector rather than to run two sets of signals from the OLO Modules as described above. In essence, run
the first set of signals (Program and Audition Left, Right, and Shield) to the Line 1 Selector as described above, then,
jumper the signals on the LOS PI connector to the same pins on the LOS P3 connector. This will achieve the same
final results.
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
The P2 and P4 connectors on the LOS Module are now the main output connections, P2 is Line 1 and P4 is Line 2.
By selecting either PGM or AUO on the LOS Module, the Program or Aud ition signal will be sent to the outputs of the
module and to the devices to which it is connected.
Construct a cable (for each output) w ith a IS-pin MR connector on one end and the appropriate connector(s) on the
other for the device to which this cable will be connected. See Crimping Instructions on Page 3 - 6 of this manual for
details.
Output 1
3. Left Out( + ) 2. Left Out (-) 1. Left Out Shield
6. ~ight Out( +) 5. Right Out (- ) 4. Right Out Shield
9. -N/C- B. -N/C- 7. -N/C-
12. -N/C- 11. -N/C- 10. -N/C-
15. -N/C- 14. -N/C- 13. -N/C-
Output 2
3. Left Out( + ) 2. Left Out (-) 1. Left Out Shield
6. Right Out( +) 5. RighI Out (- ) 4. Right Out Shield
9. -N/C- B. -N/C- 7. -N/C-
12. -N/C- 11 . -N/C- 10. -N/C-
15. -N/C- 14. -N/C- 13. -N/C-
210-I.OS J.inc O utput Selecto r Module 15-5

1S - 6 210-LOS Line Output Selector Module

, - - - - - - LINE 1 SELECTOR - - - - - - --- - -
I
, - L T ---, , - RT ---, T
PGM
, - L T ---, , -- RT ---, T
AUD
"1 :
SHLD - + SHLD - + SHLD - + SHLD - +
!" ./ '':;
I I'
~
[L
~
I
[L
, :" ~
I
0:::
I
(L
I
11:
-0
1
_{j"i
S1 A
0 - I
-
I
11: 11:
~~ '';;
I
[L
I
't '.!I
[L
I
n: 'l '
-
[L_ --<J..i
- -0
S1B
0 --- _ _f'2 ~ ~) -I-
-
RIGHT
----- -{) 1()
. - {j"
1-- - .. ,,~ -
,.-._ ... ._-_ ... -----Q..I () P2-5>
1 °1 ,.£.2- 4 ) SHLD
~ 1-" 1 P2 3,
+
OUTPUT 1
°1'-' /
LEFT
---01
4fO- L __ - ----
LINE 2 SELECTOR
- --
---- - - Q
--------{)- J
----
P2- 2
P2- h
:t
"7 SHLD J
I
T
PGM
T h
AUD
:'';' ;;' "'£'t

,- L T ---, , - RT ---, , - L T ---, , - - RT ---, -
S HLD - + SHLD - + SHLD - + SHLD - +
~i'.!~ ~' :" ~',£'
I I I I I I
1 I I I ~ I ~
r0 nnn n I
[L [L [L [L [L ~ .LS2A '"
[L
'"
[L
'"
[L
I
,"
[L ;;:
I
'"
[L JS2B
P4-6,
-{j'f>- '-' / +
RIGHT
~I~ 1 P4 5 ,
---01'-' /
1 P4-4,
/ SHLD
I~ -
- - --
1 P4 3,
"7 +
OUTPUT 2
J °1 LEFT
L - - -
"-
_=-4
-
--- P4 2,
P4-1-...
/
/ SHLD J
NONE
RCG Iii auditronics,inc_
u.s.. ....
~N!:SS'E!:.
IoI£MPHlS.
Chapter 16
210-Series Studio Remote Module
210-SRC
a 210-8RC
a
a
DJDDD
ON OFF COUGH T1(-BACK
a
INTRODUCTION
Designed as an accessory to the 210-CSM Module, the 210-SRC Is user-installed in the studio for remote control of a
microphone input module and the console's intercom system.
The "ON', "OFF", and 'Cough' pushbultons externally control a deSignated 210-MIS Module. The "Talkback" pushbut-
ton Interfaces with the 21 O-CSM talkback system, allowing talent in the studio to alert the console operator that Inter-
com communication Is desired. A mounting plate holds the four momentary switches which are prewlred and easily
installed.
Complete installation Instructions may be found on the following page.
16 ~ 2 210~Series Studio Remote Control

INSTALLATION
The 210-SRC Panel may be mounted in the studio in a location convenient to the talent. The leads to the switches are
brought together In a connector for easy installation.
It Is recommended that the usual variety of shielded cable for audio circuits be used to interconnect between the 210-
SRC and the console. Normal professional wire dress standards should be applied.
The 'ON', "OFF", and 'COUGH", remote controls should be connected to the MIS Module corresponding to the
talent's microphone; the lamps in the ON and OFF switches may be connected to parallel the Indicators on the
module Itself. The 'falk Back" remote control switch should be wired to the 210-CSM.
Schematic diagram and pinouts follow:
13. -N/C- 14. -N/C- 15. -N/C-

10. -N/C- 11 . -N/C- 12. -N/C-
7. Remote Cough B. Remote Talk Back 9. -N/C-
4. +24VDC 5. Remote ON Lamp 6. Remote OFF Lamp
1. Common 2. Remote OFF 3. Remote ON
Sl S2 S3 S4
ON OFT crJUGH TALKBACK
D D D D
0-----, o 0-------, o
L1 L2
3 8
COM OFF ON +24 ON OFF COUGH TALK
LAMP LAMP BACK
Figure 1, 210-SRC, Studio Remote Panel Schematic Diagram.
210-Scrics Studio R emote Control 16 - 3

16 - 4 2tO-Series Studio Remote Control

Chapter 17
210-Series Microphone Control
Panel- 210-MCP
...... _--- - - ,
GUEST
MICS ©
-0-
8- :
II OFF II :
GROUP SELECT
210 MCP
Introduction
210-MCP MICROPHONE CONTROL PANEL
The 210-MCP Is a guest microphone select or control panel which provides external control of up to five 210-MIS
microphone input channels in the console. This module may be located in either the studio itself or in the 210 Over-
bridge.
Those microphones which are selected on the control panel are activated or deactivated via the illuminated ' ON' and
'OFF' switch. Mics may be added or deleted from those already "ON' as required, up to the maximum of five. The
panel size is 3.0' wide by 4.0" high. Power is obtained from the console.
Inasmuch as there are only the select buttons and the Module ON/OFF pushbuttons, a Control and Pushbutton Over-
view will not be necessary In this chapter. Additional insight may be found in Appendix A, 210 Series Overbridge .
17 ·2 210-MCP Microphone Control Pane l

I GUEST MICS ~
~-- GROU P - -1
MIC 1 ON OFF
ON
-<
- ---<]- 0 FF I~ -- IN TeR-
LOCK AND
POWER UP
---- ----
-
OFF
START S
CLEAR
LOGIC
MIC 2
ON ~~G0
~--__
'~_____________
Figure 1, 210-MCP Signal Flow Diagram.
210·MCP Microphone Control Panel 17·3

INSTALLATION
The following will be broken down into several possibilities:
First, if this module is ordered for mounting into the 210 Overbridge, it will ship with the module, the mating intercon-
nect cable (Part Number 19283), the bracket for internally mounting the 15-pin MR connectors (already in place if part
of original order), and the appropriate mounting hardware. If specified at the time of order, a second harness will be In-
cluded for Interconnection between the above-mentioned bracket and the "C" Connectors on the module/mother-
board assembly, sending logic signals to the input modules. If this Is not specified, this cable will have to be
constructed. Refer to the following instructions.
If the MCP Module is to be fined in a console already in seN ice, a few considerations must be made: Location of the
module itself, location of the connector bracket, and length of cables. The MCP Module is designed to fit into the 210-
Series Overbridge, however it may be installed in a remote area such as a studio in either a "guest turret or a custom
.installation. The following text will anempt to cover all of the above situations as succinctly as possible.
Supplied in the MCP kit is: One 210-MCP Module (as per order), all connector cables (if ordered), connector brack-
et(s), and appropriate mounting hardware.
NOTE: This procedure should take place with the console power OFF.
The first consideration Is a suitable location for the connector bracket. The MCP mating interconnect cable terminates
on one end with a 30-pin edge connector and on the other with two 15-pin MR connectors and one 6-pln Molex con-
nector. The Molex connector mates to another which runs to the PGM "D" connector for the MCP's power reqUire-
ments while the MR connectors, P1 and P2, will mount in the connector bracket. The bracket is mounted Internally
and may be placed virtually anywhere, provided the cables reach and it Isn't in the way of any of the console's inter-
nal components. When choosing a location, be sure that the meterbridge/overbridge and the module/motherboard
assembly may be closed without interference. In addition, sharp turns of the cables should be avoided. The best loca-
tion for the connector bracket is the inside rear panel at the console, mounted in a vertical position.
When a suitable location has been established, simply peel the protective backing from one side of the two-sided
tape (included with Installation kit) and fix it securely to the connector bracket. Now, remove the backing from the
other surface and position the bracket. NOTE: The tape included with the installation kit Is extremely effective, so be
sure the bracket is in the proper place because removal of same is no picnic.
The next step is to mount the P1 and P2 connectors into the bracket. These simply push Into the holes in the bracket
and "click" into place. The third 1S-pin MR connector on this cable goes to the PGM "D" Connector. See Figure 1.
Installation of the MCP Logic Cable is next. This cab le terminates on one end with two 1S-pln MR connectors and on
the other with as many as five (5) of same, depending upon the number of input modules to be controlled. The end
with two MR connectors anaches to the mounting bracket in the P1 and P2 position. If this cable was ordered from
the factory, it will be clearly labelled. The opposite end of this cable will run to the "C" Connectors In the positions of
the modules to be controlled. These connectors are located on the module/motherboard assembly area, accessible
by lifting the entire module assembly. This is achieved by lifting the wooden armrest. The entire assembly will lift open
and when fully extended, it will lock in an upright position via a spring pin located near the hinge.
WARNINGIt Be sure that the module/motherboard assembly Is securely locked In the UP position. Serious In-
Figure 1 in this chapter is an approximation of the connector arrangement as it appears when the module/mother-
board assembly is open. A more detailed view may be found on Page 3 - 15.
The module is now operable. The console may be powered up and normal operation resumed.
17 -4 2tD-Mer Microphone Control Panel

Input Position
PGM -0"
"G" Connectors
Connector
I
o
o
0
n u
0 0 0 0
[I
ooooooBO
[J II 0 ...... - ~ --
o0 0 0 0 0 ~fHlnDOO rJ
U U U
[J [I
000000 [lO[lO[lrJrJ U IJ IJ
0= Mount~ to In side
of Console
Figure 2, 210-Series Module/Motherboard Assembly.

Connector Localion Map on Page 3 - 15, ..... . - ~
Construction of Logic Interconnect Cable

Construct a cable with two 15-pin MR connectors on one end (for co n-
nection to the bracket) and as many MRs as needed on the other (i. e.
if five microphone modules are to be used in conjunction with the
MCP Module, five MR connectors will be required) for logic connec- Figure 3, 15-Pin MR Connector
tions. For each microphone module to be connecled to the MCP Bracket.
Module, only three pins on the module/motherboard end of the har-
ness will be utilized; Module ON, Module OFF, and External Lamp ON. The Module ON and OFF connections (Pins 2
and 4 for the 'A' input; Pins 3 and 1 for the 'B' Input) go to the PI MR connector while the External Lamp ON (Pin 8)
will go to the P2 connector (causing the LEOs in the MCP Module to illuminate when a module is On. For specific pin
assignments, see the schematic diagram entitled 210-MCP Logic Interconnection Cable In Appendix B.
The main connections required are logic and power connections between the module itself and the console. The
logic connectors are located on the module/motherboard assembly and are labeled ' C' . There are three 15-pin MR
connectors for each input module, labeled "A', "B', and "C". The connections mentioned above go the 'c" connectors
In the positions occupied by the microphone modules to be controlled by the MCP Module (see Figure 2, Console
Connector Location, on Page 3 - 15).
After the MCP Module has been physically mounted into the desired location, the console should be opened and the
connector bracket mounted.
This bracket may be mounted basically any place that there is room and that the cables reach. The lower inside rear
wall or inside bottom of the console are preferable. If the Inside rear wall is chosen, access may be gained by open-
ing the top of the meter turret. If the inside bottom is chosen, access may be gained by lifting the module/mother-
board assembly. The only restriction for placement of th is bracket is the length of the input cables from the module
itself and the existence of other components that may be in the way of a direct connection. Sharp turn s of the cables
should be avoided. Mounting of the bracket is achieved with Scotcll® Brand VHB 01ery High Bond) double-sided
tape. Once installed, the MR connector coming from the MCP Module may be snapped into the bracket in the PI
position.
Auditronics strongly recommends that interconnection cables be ordered from the factory, however, if for some
reason they were not part of the order, they must now be constructed. Two cables must be built; one to be run from
the module Itself to the interconnection bracket (mounted inside the console), and one that runs from the bracket to
the module/motherboard assembly. Remember that these cables can be ordered from the factory at any time.
P1 Connector (to "C' Connector in Input Positions)
13. -N/C- 14. Mic5 ON 15. Mic 5 OFF

10. -N/C- 11. M;c4 ON 12. Mic4 OFF
7. -N/C- a. Mic3 ON 9. Mic 3 OFF
4. -N/C- 5. Mic2 ON 6. Mic 2 OFF
1. -N/C- 2. Mic 1 ON 3. Mic 1 OFF
21Q·Mcr Microphone Control Panel 17-5

Interconnection
Inlerconnectlon of this module should be performed with the console OFF. First, run the cable from the MCP Module
to the console, connecting P1 to the mounting bracket and P2 to the PGM "0 " connector (see Figure 1).
Now, the cable joining the logic connectors on the module/motherboard assembly to the bracket may be installed. If
this cable was ordered at the factory, It will be clearly labelled concerning the destination of each connector. If It has
been constructed, it Is recommended that the same be done to avoid confusion when it Is time to use It. The single
15-pin MR connector goes to the P1 position in the mounting bracket while the multiple ends go to their respective
input modules via the 'C' Connectors in the underside of the module/motherboard assembly
The console may now be powered up and the MCP tested.
Simply depress push buttons on the MCP Module that correspond to the microphone modules to be activated. When
the "ON" pushbutton (MCP Module) is pressed, the selected microphone modules will turn On. The LEDs adjacent to
the pushbuttons In the MCP Module will illuminate to Indicate the modules' On status. Modules may be added or sub-
tracted from the selection whether or not the MCP Module Is On.
P1
C
N
,.
<D
59 -G:RDI-
Figure 4, 21 O-MCP Module Location Art Diagram.
17· 6 210-MCr Microphone Control Panel

PI-55,56 CR, 1 7805
Ul '--r-----
:!. +5V
+VIN
lN4148
~
.- rour +C2
Iour C, +5V
R,
,
+5V
f
220
=-. -. P2-1,3
COM ( Pl .• 59'G'l ,
~
ON MIC,
r ,OOK R51
~ P2-2
n1~Hli~ 1 ON
-. lN4146
O- il! P, - 2
GROUP 3 2
J .J
~_,c .. '.'.'.'"
CR4
+5V r S,
lN4146
M!C 1
14 P'-~
, OFF
P" - ',3
-7'
b:
""
,/
P~":.2 h
r
6
5 U+A
4001
• ~
~c
'3 UJ,b. 1
6 <
4 S "-
- r--2 ~ ., ¥--.
~ r
R2
t ·
CR5
PB-l,3 GROUP
~
f
ON ~
220 P3-1,3
~
7
~
P9-1,3 .£ PH
~3~ J ~'3
ON "'C 2
--4' <..,,, 2 U? ~C r- f P3-2

4001 ~s~ 0
1N414B
14 P'-4
1 ON
~RO J CR6
"'j~
~
C4 MIC 2
r~37UF rur
9
~o Q lN414B
P1-3 ) OFf"
I :0-
1111
CR']
-. .
R6 . . ..
2N3904
0' -, R3
S.lK
i4~R7 I 220
f
02 P4- 1,3
CR2
. lN414B
2N390 4 ,
51K
+5V ! +5V
j20
~AO
ON "'C 3
. t CR3
lN 4148
~
.
3
VCC 801:7
A, U2
4 A2 If! B 15
",
2~ :t P4~ 0
lN4146
I. Pl-6) ON
PI-4 S
QN-J
DN-2
~ Pl··,., I
T SA3i,B3
-AM~B~3
4
.J
J I S3
CRB
lN414B " 'C 3
~
Pl-49 P1-5 ) OFF
ON- 3 7 AS ~ Bo 1? 14
CR9
ON- 4
Pl-51 .J!. A6 B6 , -
Pl--53
ON- 5 , -
A7
.-J. aiR B7 1 )
..:
-1-·
R4
~ 220
f
-fa PS-l,3
ON "'C 4
Jy. 13
12 U4C
4001
11
~ P5-2
J ~S4
0
lN414B
'
CR'O
lN414B
.. P,-8
Pl- 7
1 ON
OFF
MIC 4
+0 CRll
-·
'l1
~o
I
9 U40
-:!:-
17_
.
4001
220
f
P6-1,3
ON ."'C 5
f
@i
P6-2
J J
0
lN4146
'III
Pl-1 0 ,
) ON
-NONE
~ auditr'&Q.!£&'~.:
®"c
-
CR12 JOP MEMPHIS.
S5 lAlC 5
lN4148
- --l...o -
1
CR13
P'~ Ofr
L_= SCHE:tpTI~ICDIAGRAM
JDPgo-, 210-
L
CONTROL PN .
-10lV9tl l' Df_'_ 88B00803-00

Chapter 18
210-Series Microphone Control
Mixing Panel- 210-MCMP
@l
GUEST
MICS
©
©
©0
©D
©D
SELECT
210 MCMP
INTRODUCTION
The 210-MCMP functions essentially as an Input mixer. It is capable of introducing up to five microphones to one
Input module through the selection of any or all pushbuttons on the panel.
Mics may be added or deleted as required, up to the maximum of five.
Inasmuch as there are only the select push buttons, a Control and Pushbutton OvelView will not be necessary in this
chapter. Additional Insight may be found in Appendix A, 210 Series Overbridge.
18 - 2 210-Series Microphone Control Mixing Panel

I ' GUEST MI GS ::--l
MIG 1 C~
1+ D~'j-: I
0 +
MI G
MIG IN
1 _ 0..1 0 - OUT
D----O 1
D- -{)G..lo- S J
Mle :' (r~
1+ "-To-
MIG IN
2 _ D- - 0
o..L
D-
~I-o-
MIC 3 (0)
o..'j-:
1+ D--
MIC IN
3 _
~I
D- ~Lo-
~~:
a.:: C~
1+ r
MIC IN
4 _ o..lo- - - -
~I
D-
v-
MIC 5 C~
1+ ~1o--=f-
MIG IN 01
5 _ D--
f-<J
Ol:,_
D- -<5"
-L
Figure 1, 210·MCMP Signal Flow Diagram.
210·Series Microphone Control Mixing Panel 18·3

INSTALLATION
Up to five microphones may be connected to this module by way of the PI connector found in the associated user
connector bracket. The output of this module may be found in the P2 connector which connects, via a 3-conductor
cable to the "A" Connector in the Module/Motherboard assembly in the same manner as a single microphone. See
Cable Schematic, Figure 2. NOTE: The pin numbers shown on the Connector ' A" end are for the 'A' input of the
microphone module. If the 'B' input is to be used, use Pin 12 (+), Pin 11 (- ), and Pin 1 (Shield).
CONSOLE MICROPHONE INPUT

210-MCMP CONNECTOR" A"
CONNECTOR P2 210-MIS, 'A' OR '8' INPUT
15 PIN MR, M/F 15 PIN MR, M/F
I I' ~--"" --"" .-' . - ' - ('c ~+ I
SHL~lP1 ---.------+e--/)~:HLO
MIC
OUT
L J
I 3T
Figure 2, SchematiC, Input Module Interconnection Cable.
Interconnection
As usual, if this module was part of the original order, all cables will be included
and clearly labelled, The only connections required will be the Interconnection of
the microphones and the installation and hook-up of the overbridge. Instructions
for mounting the overbrldge may be found in AppendiX A.
After physically mounting the overbrldge, locate the PI and P2 cables running
from the 3D-pin edge connector joined to the MCMP Module (a schematic of this
cable may be found in Appendix B ; Cable #19284). These snap into the user
connector bracket (Figure 3), Also in this harness is a B-pin Molex in-line connec-
tor which connects to another which runs to the PGM ' 0 " Connector for power
requirements.
Now, join one end of the Input Module Interconnection Cable to P2 and the other
end to the ' A' Connector in the Module/Motherboard assembly assigned to the
MIS Module to be used.
The only connection remaining is from the microphones themselves to the PI

connector, which sends the mic signals to the MCMP Module. NOTE:
Audilronlcs highly recomme nds Ihalldenlical microphones be connected 10 Ihis
module, If several different Iypes are used, Ihe resulling imbalance in levels may
produce less than satisfying results,
The following pin assignment will assist in Ihe connection of microphones to the
P1 connector.
13, Shield 14. Mic 5 (-) 15. Mic5 ( + )

10, Shield 11 , Mic 4 (-) 12. Mic4(+)
7. Shield 8. Mic3 (-) 9. Mic3( + )
4. Common 5, Mic2 (- ) 6, Mic2 ( +)
1. Common 2. Mic 1 (-) 3. Mic 1 (+)
Figure 3, User Connector
Please refer to Crimping Instruction on Page 3 - 6 for assistance in connectlng Bracket.
microphones.
18 - 4 2I0-Series Microphone Control Mixing Panel

P1
51 co »
---DU:l- co
a
<D
- rn:J- 52 co
co
»
ro
[.3 53 co ".
-DlD- co w
a
--CllD-
54 co »
a
co w
55 "co ".
-DlLJ- ro
-[]l[J- [3
59
Figure 4, 210·MCMP Module Location Art Diagram.
21O-Series Microph o ne Control Mixing Panel 18 - 5

This Page Int entionally Left Blank
18 - 6 210-Scries Microphone Cont rol Mixing Pane l

MIC 1 IN MIC 2 IN MIC 3 IN MIC 4 IN MIC 5 IN
S - + S - + S - + S - + S - +
/ ~/ 1'/ I' / 1'/1'/ I' / 1'/ ~/ ~ / ~/ ,/ ~ / ~/ ~/ "-
~ ~
N n n ..;- MIC 2 U) U) <£) MIC 3 r--- r--- co MIC 4 Ol Ol 0 MIC 5
I I I I ~
I I ~
I ~
T T T
I ~
I
I
CL
~
CL
~
CL
MIC 1 I ~
CL
~
CL
T I
~
CL CL ~
I ~
CL CL
I
~
CL
I
~
T
CL CL CL CL CL
,
+24V S1 +24V 1
S2 +24V 1
S3 +24V
oJ S4 +24V 1 S5
~~G ~ ~~
°l~ -, t .r-.
~ol
ch ~
~o
-~
G~
' - 00 I
_1
G~ ,
I
Q~ P1-45 "
/ +
~
o-L~ oJ.
l
1
MIC 4
~
MIC 1 0 MIC 2 MIC 3 MIC 5
LED 1 LED 2 ~ ~ LED 3 LED 4 LED 5
~b - I ~b
1
~b 1
P1-47 "-
-
t~~
/
oJ I~
>R1 >~3 ~ R4 R-
1
~ 2K ;2~
~
?2K 0 , ..(}-- ?2K 1 MIC
cl °c 1 ~ r>c 1 ~
cl
OUT
~ d
I
I,
~
d
~
°d
I
~
d
+24V
~
d
PH3, SHLD
/
J
~ R6
VV\ P1-55,56 ) +24V I
2. 2
P1-59,60,
...L P1-21 THRU 41 / COMMON
- ODDS ON LY
SCALE,
@f 9,~e~,~tr,i'"~!.<;;ii,: iE',c,
NONE
..."" RCG
ENG......
RCG SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

-.avt1> 210 - MCMP, MIC CON TROL
MIX ER PANEL
>Am p"",,
12/13/90 _1_ OF_l_ 88AOO811

Chapter 19
210-Series Monitor Speaker/
Headphone Control - 210-MSHP
-0-
HEADPHONE
LEVEL
.(2)
o 10 V
MONITOR
LEVEL
2 10 MSHP
INTRODUCTION
The 210-MSHP monitor speaker and headphone control panel Is a stereo studio monitor system panel. The system In-
cludes a five position input monitor selector with a sixth ' OFF" position. Separate level controls are provided for the
speaker and the headphone outputs. Stereo operation is maintained throughout the system, with optional mono
operation selected via an internal jumper.
The monitor portion is capable of receiving console talk back audio and logic. A monitor speaker mute logic function
is also provided.
This panel is designed as an in-studio replacement for the 21O-CSM module optionally available with, and mounted
in, the 210 console. This system panel gives the "host", or guest, control over the speaker/headphone source to be
monitored. Separate monitor and headphone amplifiers are required externally for the system to function.
19 - 2 210·MSIIP Speaker/Headphone Monitor Module

r---------------- INTERLOCKED INPUT SELEC TOR----- ---------------- ,
IN 4 OF;
L R IN I
T .....
_+_+
LLI L
-+ -+
R
!I L..,~ 1
"T1
<6.
e
(i)
~
0
1 L -1 __
t
en SPKR
I MONITOR
---0 MUTE
"en
<6.
LEVEL
I LOGIC
::J
. hMONO ";UMPERS _.
!!'.
"T1
15 + 1+"
11,'1 ED : 11: ") yy;.. i2Sl---rl ) 0 L
~ ::: MONITOR
? 0
0;. OUTPUTS
;:
to
=
."
""iil TAU(SACK ) OR
to
~
? AUDIO
••,.. HEADPHONE
LEVEL
1--
0
LD-- __ _ -.1
'•"
:;
~
'0
~ IL ") HEADPHONE 0 L
,,- OUTPUTS
0
~
0 TALKBACK...J ~ IL ) OR
;: PRE OR POST
0 SPKR MUTE
~
~. JUMPERS
;:
0
~
c
0-
-
~
w
The following is a brief summary of the features and fun ctions of the 210-MSHP Module. This section is Intended to
familiarize the Service/Installation Technician with the controls of these modules, as reference to these controls is fre-
quently made in the text.
1. Monitor Select Switch
The Monitor Select switch array allows the operator to choose the source for
monitoring on the speakers and headphones. There are five selectors, all of
which are user-assignable.
0.
HEAOPHONE
LEVEL
2. Off Pushbutton
What appears as the sixth pushbutton In the Monitor Select Switch array is ac-
tually the On/Off Switch for the module. When depressed, th is switch turns the
module Off. 0.
"""'L<V"
"OR
3. Headphone Level '"
....,
Figure 2, 210-MSHP Module Front
The Headphone Level control, located at the top left of the module, is used to Panel.
set the level of the signal sent to the external headphone amplifier.
4. Monitor Level
The Monitor Level control, located at the bottom left of the module, is used to set the level of the signal sent to the ex-
ternal monitor amplifier.
19 - 4 210·MSHP Speaker/lleadphone Monitor Module

INSTALLATION
In spite of the similarities between this module and the CSM Module, the connection is quite different. While the CSM
gets its main signals from the motherboard, all of the input signals to the MSHP Module are through the PI and P2
MR connectors found in the user connector bracket.
There are several scenarios concerning the hook-up of this module: 1) Included with original order; 2) Ordered later
for retrofit; 3) Changing assignments to an existing module. In all three cases, the basic connections are quite similar.
If this was ordered with the console (Example 1), the required connections will be Installing the PI through P4 connec-
tors into the user connector bracket, connecting power, introduCing the signals to the module through PI and P2,
and connecting the outputs of the module to the speaker and/or headphone amplifier(s) ..
The following procedures should be performed with console power OFF.
After physically installing the overbridge as per instructions in Appendix A, locate the MSHP User Connection Cable,
#19282. This cable has a 3D-pin edge connector on one end for connection to the MSHP Module and 4 IS-pin MR
connectors and a 6-pin Molex in-line connector at the opposite end. The MR connectors are labelled PI through P4.
These snap Into the connector bracket. Running from the PGM "D" Connector Is a 4-c onductor power cable with the
mating end for the 6-pin Molex connector In this harness.
Next, Introduce the Signals to the MSHP Module via the PI and P2 connectors In the bracket. These signals may
come from any source, the most typical being the Program and Audition Signals, accessible at the "A" Connectors of
the 210-DLO modules, located on the Module/Motherboard assembly (See Figure 2 on Page 3 - 15). All audio mult
sources are accessible from the motherboard as well. See the individual chapters for specifics concerning the pin as-
Signments of these connectors. Another source might be from an FM receiver to monitor the signal directly from the
air. Essentially, any audio signals may be fed inlo this module. The following pin assignments will assist in the connec-
tion of these signals.
P1
13. Shield 14. Le~ 3 In (-) 15. Le~ 31n (+)

10. Shield 11. Right 2 In (-) 12. Right 2 In (+)
7. Shield 8. Le~ 21n (-) 9. Leff 21n (+)
4. Shield S. Right 1 In (- ) 6. Right lin (+)
1. Shield 2. Leff 1 In (-) 3. Lefflln(+)
P2
13. Shield 14. Right 5 In (-) 15. RightS In (+)

10. Shield 11. Leff Sin (-) 12. Leff Sin (+)
7. Shield 8. Right 4 In (- ) 9. Right 41n (+)
4. Shield 5. Le~ 4 In (-) 6. Left 41n (+)
1. Shield 2. Right 3 In (-) 3. Right 31n (+)
P3
13. -N/C- 14. -N/C- 15. -NIC-

10. A Monitor Out Shield 11. A Monitor Out Shield 12. R Monitor Out (+)
7. L Monitor Out Shield 8. L Monitor Out Shield 9. L Monitor Out (+)
4. R Phones Out Shield 5. R Phones Out Shield 6. R Phones Out (+)
1- L Phones Out Shield 2. L Phones Out Balanced 3. L Phones Out (+)
P4
13. -N/C- 14. -N/ C- 15. -N/ C-

10. -N/C- 11. -N/C- 12. -N/C-
7. -N/C- 8. -N/C- 9. -N/C-
4. -N/C- 5. Mute Logic 6. TB Logic
1- Sh ield 2. TB Audio (-) 3. TBAudio (+)
Please refer to Crimping Instruction on Page 3 - 6 for assistance in connecting audio inputs.
210·MSHP Speaker/Headphone Monitor Module 19 - 5

P1
1
I.
R51 Sl) I n
0
>
=
II
~\\
I. RS? ,~ >
ru
~;m , "
Sl ~I ~\-t
I.
n >
BII 0 =
sl~ 1 ~t-\.
(.
>
I'" "
0
=
I' P3 II,
Rso S1 ~ I n
~
,..
m
~\\
Sl FI
~-t
n ,..
=
~~m
P2 I 0
8B
Figure 4, 210· MSHP MirJdle Board Localion Art Diagram,
Figure 3m 210·MSHP Side Board Localion Art Diagram.
19 . 6 210·MSIIP Spcakerfllcadphonc Monitor Module

RT LT RT LT RT LT RT LT RT LT
$+-5+- 5+-5+- $+-5+- $+-5+- 5+-5+-
C24
R2 1
J1 '20K.2
RS12 20K-
4053 C32
UB I .t----; P1-49) LT
l
+ 353 47uF P1-51 SHLD
P.Sl00~_1:===1_...:4~U9
11
113
4053
12
40r' 16r~V R22

R:~~>
10K
AUD 2
____________-, C13
(
3:lpF R15
MONITOR
AMPUFlER
CONNECll0NS
J
3 20K.-
' - - - - - -...i4""'21lk~3 l.C26 ~ 15 C31 L..Y 13
C9
Ii 1"" I ?
P5 I HEADPHONES 10K. I I 1
12 RIO
100
PM2-9 PS2-2 Pi-SO
i PI-52)
RT
R2~t-M-'\
9 6.7.B f+ SV SHLD
L-'. .'- -" '- - il.--'-"~~ --'~6~

11 ' 4053
I R12
10K
AUD I 2 20K ..
20pF Rl 1
TB LOGIC <P1-53 P",2-2»PS2-9 C,~7 ~.
--+-
li _ _ _ 3 \1/ R24 CR6 PM2-9 PS2-2 P1-54 MONITOR
lN4148 100
40.21-:- L-----------------~~~::"!~-.!:~~'4_~:..£J...!.''=-"~ MUTE LOGIC
2
(1
I 100 lN4148
1 ~C~
? ______~____--, ..lC25
U7
5532 47uF .-or-.1uF
CIS CI6 + I
~tK
100pF RSa L-____________________~~y_--~P~M~2~-~9~P~S2~-~2~P~I~-~.~7~ LT
2'0K ", 1 2 10K. 1 CIO 100 P1-~
r + (PI-41 PM3- 1O) PS3-1 RI9 4 RS9 J 6 SHLD HEADPHONE
-( )
TB 10K __ 7 pO 20pF RI3
AUDIO Pl-42 PM3-9 PS3-2 R20 U5 ______________________:~R7~----~PM~2~-~9~~P~S~2=-~2~P1~-=!48~ AMPUFlER
353 5 + 4 353 47uF 40.2k r 100 RT CONNEC1l0NS
L SHLD (PH() l
10K.
4
3
~6~.
B
15V
C6
~7~'r---~r-----'
R3
Pl-46
SHLD
10K
+v f'-
+V _Pl -56
S5
.1
CRI
lN4148
~_-I~-~P~M~2-=4~)7~P~S~2-=7~-~
2.2
~-"'--""""1-- +5V 15V
f'-
CR3 CRS
~7 PM 2- 6
f
PS2-5 lN4148 lN4'~
7 __ PM:>-h, PS3-10 NONE
COM NOTES:
PM;}-6 7 PS3-5 - ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS. EXCEPT AS MARKED
COM _P1-7
f'- .!J3.._....T_~_·~__'P_""c=_2-....:S'_i).)P....:S2"'-...;6'------"i
CR4 - All CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS. EXCEPT AS MARKED RCG
CR3 lN4148 - PIN NUMBERS SEPARATED BY COMMAS ARE CONNECTED TOGETHER
7 - SHADED CONTACT Of CMOS Sy.nCH IS CLOSED WHEN CONTROL IS HIGH
-V I- 1"--'----------15V
lN4148 2.2 - • IS A 17. METAL FlLM RESISTOR
-V _P1-7 - ... IS A 5% STACKED F1L..M CAPAClTOR RCG
79'5
- CR'S ARE lN4HB DIOOCS EXCfFT AS MARKED
- RS"S AR£ 2% SIP RESISTOR NElWORJ(S
- RD'S ARE .1% OJP RESISTOR NElWORKS
~'"
11/19/90
-
_1_ OF_1_ 88B00806
Chapter 20
210-Series Telephone
Interface Module - 210-TEL
1.:,.
"ON OUTPUT
[J 3
.~ ill "
Q
SEND TO
LEVEL
Q
'm
N
'===
U
°
C....LLER
CAllERS IN
Cl Cl []
ON ON ON
Q, Q, Q 3
CJ
CUE
C CUE
CJ
CUE
MIC MIX
Q Q Q
, , 3
D D ON / OFF
210 TEL
DUMP
INTRODUCTION
The 200-TEL (Telephone Inlerface) Module provides complete handling and processing of up to three incoming calls
without compromising other console functions. Each line develops its own mix-minus within the TEL module permit-
ting each caller to hear and talk to the other callers but without hearing his/her own voice returned.
The TEL module interfaces directly with up to 3 announce Microphones, and the selected output bus, permitting a 6-
way conversation - 3 callers and 3 announcer/guests. With its unique design providing the mix-minus for each of the
callers, it removes the need for the third console bus usually req uired for Telephone operation. And since it Is an Input
module in its own right, it does not need an additional input module for bus insertion and mixing.
Standard factory installation wires the 2t O-TEL to the Program output, it may be ordered for wiring to the Audition out-
put, or, if desired, can be easily retrofitted In the field to either or both outputs.
20·2 2ID-TEL Telephone Interface Module

- ,. - 0
- -- ----
'"'
L ~,
L~
J: , _J
~
I~
~
_.
'--It>-~-
__'>M.
./ I -'::1 f". -_ .. ::--0-
I
~
0
- - - --L
~~f:';
J: 11111 I oot
~
~
0
.'
11\'8 I Off
(')
.< ,
..."= ~-
~~' ~l'8
~
•~ ) OH
~
(') ~
(') •
~
IIle 2
r-
."
WIC 2
,. P
~
UNO
.., (') ~
."
"~ f#.: I t,;.
r~~
_.-
~
(') DU~'III
=,
I_-c>-·
I> ~,
l l'-1:l
~
~
~
l
~
,
~
E>L~
(')
: :: C> c -
~~ ~
~
-
~
,0- ()
- -~ .~ ,
• ., =,
~"'H
-f>-- E>L~
Figure 1, 21 O-TEL Signal Flow Diagram,
2i0-TEL Telephone Interface Module 20 - 3

The following Is a brief summary of the features and functions of the 21 D-Series TEL Telephone Interface Module. This
section is Intended to familiarize the Service/Installation Technician with the controls of this module, as reference to
these controls is frequently made in the text.
1. Monitor Switch MON

0
OUTPUT
!Cl •s
I~
The Monitor pushbutton, when depressed, sends a sample of the
QJ
TEL signal to the CUE speaker In the console. The level of this Signal
is controlled by the CUE Level control on the CAM Module.
s rn 0
0 Q I
rn
G
2. Send to Caller * SEND TO
LEVEL
N
CAlLER
The rotary potentiometer labelled ' Send to Caller" sends a sample of
CALLERS IN
the entire console mix to the caller. This function is operable even
with the module Off, unless the logic controls th e telephone hybrid.
This Is a 'pre mix-minus' signal which may be sent to the caller{s).
CON
C ON
CON
3. Output Level 0 Q Q Q
The Output Level bargraph meter permits the operator to ensure that 2 3
the correct signal level is being sent th o the hybrids and the recorder.
4. Output Assignment
CCUE
C CUE
CCUE
MIC MIX
The TEL Module may be assigned to either or both of the main aut-
put busses on the 210 Console by depressing the desired pushbut-
tones). 0 O 0 Q• 2
5. Caller ON, Level, and CUE
0
The ON pushbuttons, when depressed, simply turn that caller's chan-
nelOn, allowing that signal into the 21 D-TEL Module.
Each caller's signal has an individual Level Control, allowing com-

plete control over the mix. Each caller's signal may be previewed
0 0aN/OFF
210 TEL
DUMP
0
through the CUE system In the same manner as the CUE feature on
the regular input modules.
Figure 2, 21D-TEL Module Front Panel.
6. Mic Mix *
The level (to the caller,,»)of each guest/announcer microphone may be individually controlled by way of the Mlc Mix
potentiometers.
7. ON/OFF
This is the main On/ Off control for the 2to-TEL Module. This returns the caller and/or the mic mix to the console out-
put(s). The switchcap illuminates to indicate the module's On status.
8. Dump
The Dump switch Is built-In to allow the operator to instantly defeat the incoming caller signal should the need arise.
This will operate only of a delay system Is In use.
* NOTE: The send to caller and Mic Mix may be set to foll ow the MOW switch 10 alternate the feed to caller and return to console
20·4 2ID-TEL Telephone Interra ce Module

INSTALLATION
There are four IS-pin MR connectors labelled PI through P4 on the rear panel of the 210-TEL Module. All incoming
and outgOing connections Interface with this module through these MR connectors. The following installation proce-
dure will begin with PI and continue through P4. Pinouts of these connectors may be found at the end of this section.
P1 Connector
The TEL's PI connector deals primarily with the audio interconnection between the TEL Module and the 210 Console.
Most connections are to the "C" Connectors on the motherboard In the PGM and AUD positions. These "COConnec-
tors are located on the bottom of the module/ motherboard assembly and may be accessed by lifting the assembly
(see Figure 2, Console Connector Location, on Page 3 - 15). This is done by lifting the armrest. The entire assembly
will lift open and, when fully extended, it will lock in an upright position via a spring pin located near the hinge.
NOTE: The module/motherboard assembly of the Model 210-24 is bolted in place and does not flip up, primarily due
to the weight. Removeable panels have been provided In the bottom pan of the console to provide access.
WARNINGII Be sure that the module/ motherboard assembly is securely locked In the UP position. Serious In-
Jury can result If the assembly Is aCCidentally closed while hands or
fingers are Inside the consote shell.
"8" Connectors; "e"Connectors;

Input Positions
PGM ;UD
I~
o o 0 00
DOD 000000000
~DOD
8B
11
DOD 0 000000
000000 DDDDDDg=
Figure 3, 210-Series Module/Motherboard Assembly.

Connector Location Map on Page 3 - 15.
A schematic drawing of this cable may be found on Page 9 of Appendix B, 210-Series Cable Diagrams . This drawing
Is entitled 210-TEL, PI USER CONNECTION CABLE.
P2 Connector
The P2 Connector deals with the TEL Module's Logic signals and the microphone inputs. The microphone signal
comes from the direct out located on the "B" Connectors on the motherboard in the Input positions of the microphone
channels to be used. A schematic drawing of this cable may be found on Page 10 of Appendix B. This drawing is en-
titled 210-TEL, P2 USER CONNECTION CABLE.
21O-TEL Telephone Interface Module 20 - 5

P3 Connector
The P3 connector deals with the TEL Module's outputs to hybrids, outputs to recorder and start logic output. Con-
struct a cable with one IS-pin MR connector on one end for connection to P3 and with the appropriate connectors on
the other end for the devices to be Interfaced. A schematic drawing of this cable may be found on Page 11 of Appen-
dix B. This drawing is entitled 210-TEL, P3 USER CONNECTION CABLE.
P4 Connector
P4 deals with the Input from the hybrid, hybrid On/Off logic. Construct a cable with one IS-pin MR connector on one
end for connection to P4 and with the appropriate connectors on the other end for the devices to be interfaced. A
schematic drawing of this cable may be found on Page 12 of Appendix B. This drawing is entitled 210-TEL, P4 USER
CONNECTION CABLE.
Connector Pin Assignments

PI
3. L PGM Insert Ret 2. L PGM Insert Send 1. Common
6. R PGM Insert Ret 5. R PGM Insert Send 4. Common
9. LAUD Insert Ret B. LAUD Insert Send 7. Common
12. A AUD Insert Ret I 1. A AUD Insert Send 10. Common
IS. -24VDC 14. +24VDC 13. Common
P2
3. Mic Mute Logic 2. CUE Logic 1. Common

6. Ext. On Logic 5. Cue Audio Sum 4. Shield
9. Mic2 (+) B. Mic 1(+) 7. Shield
12. Mic3 (+) II. -N/C- 10. Shield
IS. Dump Logic 14. Common 13. Common
P3
3. Hybrid I Hi 2. Hybrid I La 1. Common

6. Hybrid 2 Hi 5. Hybrid 2 La 4. Common
9. Hybrid 3Hi B. Hybrid 3 La 7. Common
12. -N/C- I 1. Start Logic (Pulse) 10. Common
IS. Rec Out Hi 14. Ree Out Lo 13. Common
P4
3. Calier In 1 HI 2. Caller In 1 LO 1. Common

6. Caller In 2 HI 5. Caller In 2 LO 4. Common
9. Caller In 3 HI B. Caller In 3 LO 7. Common
12. Hybrid ON Logic 3 I 1. -N/C- 10. Common
IS. Hybrid ON Logic 2 14. Hybrid ON Logic I 13. Common
20 · 6 210-TEL Telephone Interface Module

·_--
0lS2D ~
~~ ~m~
-rnlD-
-rnn:lJI-
-mm:n-
•
~~ U12
--(El[:}-
I c:mD
§~fi
• 7 G •
c:=J I I c:=J
-aiP; ~ ::f ~ Cll>ZD
m-
C51 C50
~o~0~ ij ;:
( 165 I
CR5U
~
C45 UlO
~; )
C44 U9
::> I
J
I
. ~ :::~1 S ~ x
====' ~ ~~ cb~ c0
o~(~,@~ii ~oY': ~,~~D ~
c:::t:]D { !.69 J C49
Figure 5, 210-TEL Left PC Board Locati on Art Diagram.
Figure 4, 21 O-TEL Right PC Board Location Art Diagram.
210·TEL Tclephonc Inlcrracc Modu lc 20 · 7

R65
O-~
77
~d
R60 R61 R62
mBG ~d 1~ ~
O-~ 0-0.
Figure 6, 210-TEL Top PC Board Location Art Diagram.
20 - 8 210-TEL Telephone rnterface Module

TO TtlP PC BOARD TO RIGHT PC BOARD
1 2 l 4 5 1 7 1 • 10 7 , , , 8 123451 7 8 , , , , •
1~5
'WI<
2
1'---+--+__________-""p....""'-"1~ STAAT
= , RS4S 2
.,
, RS24 2
'
20K
4 P:S". 3
"'"
• RS25 l
20K
4 P.S27 3
....
"I< H.'
Cl7 1
...,
~~5 "',3
~f
"" '00
rim
.-----. 3 R3' lY"
p+-, RS'16 l ?f"'.,. 201< 47!OF R30 1Jt2 ~ J u...... 2or. Zov.
m TO RECORDER
"" ""+ ,'" JU~ f.&?

I ,
1;- --=:!~ ~u.7-"?,'
1 RS272
." Pl-14
","';'y Ji>'
P+-3 'CY.
~~f 'OK
, '00
~. _t~
,V 353 ~ I 40SJ ':' +11 53
4~~3 • "':12 t113
~~ = +'5V-
2<,t:
4 RS22l 1 8
=
- CR. 20K
= +,sv-
'H~'.o4a
.52 P3-l ~ +
~P+-l" CRg ,00
"'" I '" UH148 = 11l H)13 1
P .... 2
0.,
~ 1"'\, .33 I • 'S233 I

R32 1 ~0I(
I-i'Z -.1-' 2or.
l r
10< '5~ ---=-d: 9P 7R~~'53 4 I
10 ~~ ~'.l- ·""f-'----+--',-'.'Y:~"29;..::.'--+++1
,>t:.~ --1- Pl-6 7+
10 4053 +,5V 1 RS22 2 I CO, 100
"". 20K .43

"..... 1 0 K I '!:3Jpf~
'::....~·;;..:-M""'~--J.P....
~''7
ltI HYB 2
~~-----~J~:~t11~'2~~,~:~
I~~:OK7
1N4'.oWI
P_15 am '00
"\'112 ...
lN4146 J. v + 5532
~' C58 +'5V-

.,.
JOPF RSli
"" ~l r
11 !Ja>F RJ.6 1 RS2.ll
r;]"
"" 3 ~
+
P+-8
P"'"
,o [~
"1:1~10 1
47uF
~
R34
'1J("L~:'~u,. 7 , _~'
lSJ ~~F
Ri".. 201(
'OK
... 3,f-'---,
I,jp" ...
'00
.57 P""
~'
~3 11 405J +
~sth
1 RS30 2.
,<t:.~
11 4003
1- 'OK
1 RS21 1
. =
+'5V-
2<,1<
eft"
,H"'44
P+-12 au)
If"" ... 1"''''''
- <if auditro~ics.inc_
--
NOTES:
- All RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHUS. EXCEPT AS UARKED REFER TO RElATED SCHEJ,4ATIes:
_ ALL CAPACTANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROfARADS, EXCU'T AS I.4ARKED 88800825 RIGHT PC. BOARD
_ PIN NUM8ERS SEP ARA rro BY COMMAS ARE CONNECTED TOGETHER 88800827 TOP PC.BOARD . . - . . . w:HI u..a...o..
- SHADED CONTACT or Colas SWlTQ-I !S Q...OSED 'M-I£N CONlROl IS H1G1 88800820 210- ill
- • IS A T" iot£TAl Flt..J,A RESISTOR
- .. IS A 5% STACKED FU..M CAPAaTOR ..,. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
- CR'S ARE lN4148 DIODES EXCEPT AS MARKED =~-j210-TEL LEFT PC BOARD
- -
- RS'S ARE 2X SP RES1STOR NE1VttlRJ(S
- RO'S ARE .1% DIP R£S1STOR NETWORKS
tV21V'JO ...L <>,2. 88B00826
r, m
10 IIR 2 TO RIGHT PC BOARD TO LEFT PC BOARD TO RIGHT PC BOARD TO RIGHt PC BOARD TO LEfT PC BOARD
I ill. , 121
I I
JI~l
I I ~ ~ ~ ~ ~8~
1 : 1: 1 1 1 1 1 7
, I 21
I I
J
I
1415
I
SEND
2
Lills
R59~
oI
10K~
MIC 1
~
"ON
Mle 2
~
o
fo'il~ ,--
RS9
1.2K "'-"
59
MIC 3
o
~8~~
flY13
ON
R70
1.2K
~~ =
,.0
..IYD 2
CLR 1 ON
o
~Mr
eLR 2
R71
1.2K
~'t1
= ,11
~8¥ m'B 3
ON
eLR J
RS5>
10K~
oI
R72
1.2K
~1J 'U'
CUE 1 ,'2
~-1 -~1l---.-- ,S
e72
~--I~~I_f
3
U17
U1 8
+3
"'2
CUE 2
~Jt;- o
;~
vu
~b~~ 51 'J
SET
,. o
~
RS"l
1.2K
"'"
,7
15 I~
}?
R74 161Q
1.2K
CUE J
p 17 ,'2'
r~~ R75
1.2K
'8
RS8
'VV'v
1.2K
t4--,~~
2
- 20
58
e7J
L---------------~ ____~--~~I~
20uF
REFER TO RELAlED SCHEM ATICS:

- ®
-- Cil auditrq,~~s~~:i~ss.:
88800825 RIGHT PC.BOARD
N01>:5:
88800826 LEfT PC.BOARD
NONE
- ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS, EXCEPT AS MARKED
- ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS, EXCEPT AS MARKED 88800820 210- TEL
- PIN NUMBERS SEPARATED BY COMMAS ARE CONNECTED TOGElHER JFe t-IE:I>4PHIS. n=;
- SHADED CONTACT OF CMOS S'MTCH IS CLOSED 'M-IEN CONTROL IS HIGH
- , IS A 1% METAL fiLM RESISTOR
- •• IS A 5% SlACKED F1l.M CAPACITOR orp
- CR'S ARE lN4148 DIODES EXCEPT AS MARKED
- RS'S ARE 2% SIP RESISTOR NETWORKS
- RO'S ARE .1 " DIP RESISTOR NElWORKS
~~2el9O 13 or 2/ 88B00827
NJtl L. (Pl-t P1-
AUO R (Pl - l2.
ntaI DLQ ooer

POll L ~(P1=-'''-_ _..-_ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _-,
PROGRAM ....UOlllON
_ ~ ~(J:Pll::-'-'_--,
CI C'
-~A---",P";": CO
.D
LJj51 17~S'"!~ I~'

l RS7 'I
,./t---~
35 L--~l~ C11
l i7~F ioo , I ~ C 201< J J5J
,' 100 0
'SO
• ~~' C r-
~ "" ~ I
47~f
co
Mo
Rsl
~
," -"~'
7bW ~.
~
el2
!!.\', =
,01( ,
ON ·,.
.D
~
~ I
LfJ
"I<
R$11l "-<>-
o A G"
i<iII
~I o -0-
,
I
~
~
4"
1 1' I, 'l'I·I'I·l
I
+a4V (Pl-1. ~'
11'14001
... 15'1
T
1..
p
-'24'" ~P1l::-'",,'_:;;CR~'=-'~~=:''1
11'14001 .2 CJ5
.1
-15'.'
'NJ~' ~ GAIN TRIM
~J
~,
PM~~PIl::-~I'~--~_ _~_ _f--~-~--"
r.cUTt (P2-J CR'

••
ltHl'1B
, - - - - - ----_._---
~ I I
fuOH4
2NJ' 6
=
l .Juf'
~j8.
.
~,h~:
1-="~ J',}w
4.7K
'1':>.
UJ
-=
RII~
°iW
.,.
CR. CR.
OM (1"2 - _
C2I
" "'"
J:lpF
elll
--;Lr 10k
111 1H41411
~ (Pl - l,4,1,IO = o
~ H5
cu. /'2- 1.4.7. 10.13.14, C21 ~J

- ·A."'--<47~
C20
= rl-----------~I~·~ ·1 ~~~-
CR' lOuf
=
''''414&
elfl ~_lJ
CR'
loUr
CI'
-l~
10K
I II IN.... I I I P2-.:_.
~ P1-2
l()"F 10K
"00<
SlliCT
C20
r,1,t-~
= TIT
~l
'ro TOP PC8
,
TO "rop
'fl,
PC8
TIl Ti-I'!-] ,
TO lEn pea
1 I 2 I 3
TO u:n !"co
,
oro TOP PCO
,
MOO<
sam
Sl-1 0PfJ{ BEND TO CAI.UR FOl.LO\ItS tH£ ON ""'Taf
a..osro KND TO CAUDt IS ON
53-2 OPEN wlC fttO IS ON
a.OSED IoUC rEED FOllOWS ll-IE ON S'MTCH
OP~AnON
S3-1 OPEN I 53-2 ClOSEt> » !otIC FEED WILL GO OFF AND SEND TO CAU£R WILL COME ~ 'M-1EN lHE "ON S'MTO-l" IS ACTIVATED
NOTE'S;
- ......L AESISTANCE VAWES ARE IN OHMS, EXCEPT AS MARt<fI)
REffR TO Ra...o.TEt> SOi(MATlCS:
158900026 l£F1 pC.aoMa
88900827 TOP PC.SOARD
- <Iii
=-
NO/4£
auditronlcs,lnco
JF'
: :M-
-
~~~AN~~~S e~~:~~~~\g,w~-::'~KEO
SHAOED CONTACT OF Q.lOS SWITCH IS ClOSED v.tiEN CONTROl IS HIGH
- • IS A ,,, METAl flW RESISTOR
- .. IS A ~" STACKtD f11..M CAPACITOR
- CR'S ARE ItHU8 OIOOES EXCEPT AS r.tARKED
88800820 21!>-ltt
-.IF,
I
~210-TEL
I SCHEMA TIC DIAGRAM
~J).o_"1VI~
RIGHT PC BOARD
u.......
- RS'S ARE 2" SIP RESISTOR HElWORKS

- RD'S ARE .111; DIP RESISTOR NET'NORKS
1';';/1/90 j'i' Of....!.. I B8B00825
AUO L (f"I-' PI 2. ) PW L
PI - 5
..... R.
AUD It. (PI-12
"'our
fJlarII 0Ul 1i.,.1 ~""T
f"QoI L .. P1-3 PI-II) AU1> L

eo"""'" C7
AVOIllON
PQ.1 It. (f"I-1 PI - II
.0 .0 MJO R.
lJl,F2.P:S7 I
, 2 A51 ,
"
------'YY.'r'
., "
-~5R ~ 1 I ~I"
~VJ5l-4.~~
1.1
DU"'
, C "J5J .f7u.· foo
, C
.0,
'"
20K ,
~~2
, ·.-Ii ~
o o 41 ~cJ
o
C' co ~ if PH' ) OV"'
-.511.1
J AS:!.
RS4
""~
j
I./IF
'" 2OK
J
0 11-00
Cr>
47U!-"
7~ 10
lill
'OK 4
•o
o ." -,---,------,
U"
IRS!I
UI1
ro .,
4~~!iJ II
, "
~~
o
o ,
." o
"
~~ "
".
UY.
ON • 11
, ,
.0 VU SET
o ~.~R "
MUlE (P2-3
at (P2-8
---""
IH"148
Q'~~~
2N~1 ° 1- I 1 10 o
." !&l
C72
J .Juf
, C'/l
.,....
-lO
o o ,'"
)j<
CR'
UHI48
..... <:;. fD pT~·~LLI_+_-------' l.:3u" ·~

cn
GAIN -mlt.t
;ll, ~-I y7l-

0
C'!.II
f~
o ,i18. ~lL ''''

I I ctl f .... ·'K .7L:F
CU
",C ,
~f------,O
. 7ul'" ·1-15 1 P.225 1.
!6l ,.:r~ , +i5Y-
~
2-' '"
"CI"" Y Cl~ I , ~.
= '80
lOt<
~!I! ''''' 2et:" "ON
• P.~211 J
9
r_.
Io4IC 2
CR" 1.~
~
2-' C1~
MlC2.IH
~
IN.H8 I RSH
'" "'-m =I I !t'i II

= ,
1000r " • ~~~4 J 59 ~d.'t 'OK
;>
1.1' _I"OO€
~Bi WiC JC'lO
~2._12 ""
9 ~~~L~'~~_+~~~G
wac J Ii • P.S2~ J
'--<Y'"' ( 0 SELECT :!vr•
.. P.S 27 J
I TN.. . Pl-' ~ ':0
10\11'" :OJ( p.z .2) lOGIC
-+15 R21
lrl:)"'+---= P.llS C20
037
C<6
"'"
.. P.S?.1 l o4 7uF
10K CS2 ,~ PJ-IS ~+

-----L~?....
rll
JlPF
'00
'<-2 70t( 11) PF.COPOfJI
CU 1 "'-+ (f"4-3 ~~1I11~~ ~ P'}-H) _

J53 ...,~,-or. ' 00
• P.SJO J
lor.
.. RS2.:? J
o
·'\5"-
+TO
1 ON ~"4-1" C:,'
1144148
o
--------m·
' 1- 100 Pl-J ?+
10 H'rB I
C39
CIT .~ '>--2)
'00
... IIS~ l J
o
W 2. ~... (P4-1 1')100 I
llY " P'S~II J
I ~~~II'2
+ioY··
cos ~.. pJ-~e ) +
rll ,00
1 R522 '2
~ -- ' - ... JJPf C'7
o
.,IS-%
\. o
I.).)f't
~PJ-5?_
R~ 1 R~5 TO HYB 2
2. OH (,..-15 <::'
114"'48
C" ....
~
co,
,
1 RS'lJ '2 C58
rll
J3" 05'
,oe PrO) +
526.) TO H'rB J
CU3 ..... ~y
.7UF ~ PJ-II) _
,s"" III
,:,'" j
= OK
+"
3 OH ( '.... ,2 C:1 3 = =
11'1.'48 flUtR 10 otlM. SQIEMAT1CS:
+ :ltV I0800cs2,s RlCHT PC.SOAAP
111180011'211 WI PC.SOMO
11511001127 lor PC.BO~O
+24V (PI- '. CRI + 15V
...~L
-24V I.y~
(PI-I" ,", " I ... '1
f~,
-15\1
NOT£S.:
- M.L RESISTANCE VAUJES AA[ IN OHt.tS, EXCEPT AS ~.ARKED
: ~M- ~~:~~~<J.~~~ B":~t.t~r~AA~\Fcil5~~=KEO
- SHADED COfoITACT Of CUOS SM~ 15 a.OSED WHEN COtfTROL IS HIGH
lID'"
JCe <if auditronics,inc.
1U<NDS"a. v........
~0<r',",,1l.
fM, - • IS A IX IoI.ETAl fl..M RESlS"TClR

- .. 15 A :;~ STACKm nt.M CAPACITOR
I .lFP I SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
CQI (Pl-'3 - QfS ARE 11'44146 DIODES EXCEP1 AS ~ARJ(f]) 1=-1210-TEL TELCO I NTERFACE
- RS""S ARE 2X SIP RESISTOR NETWORI<S
= - RO'S ARE . I~ DIP RESlS10R NElWORKS
-.._.,-_ ..... _________ _ I "'''' Ii. OF..L 1BBB00820

Chapter 21
210-Series Relay Interface
Accessory - 210-RY2
200/210-RY2 Relay Interface Accessory
As originally designed, the 200/2 10-RY2 was intended to serve as an interlace between the 200 Series of consoles,
and "ON AIR" lights used with a studio or control room. Today, Innovative engineers find many other applications for
this popular accessory.
The relay contacts are rated at SA, 120V, and can be used to control a great assortment of external equipment, not
just the "ON AIR" lights(s). Due to the fact thai In many of these applications the relays may be switching high voltage
alternating current, this accessory is intended to be mounted only outside the console mainframe.
By following the connector pinout chan and schematic, many common switching needs in a studio may be met. The
200/210-RY2 utilizes the same connector as is commonly used for all other inlout wiring connections to the 200/210
Series consoles.
As the standard logic output of the 200/2 10 Console Series is a ground closure (100ma. 24V maximum), the relays of
the 200/210-RY2 need only to be furnished +24VDC for operation
PI Connector
1. Relay 1; A -N/C-
2. Relay 1; A Common
3. Relay 1; A NO
4. Relay 1; B -NIC-
S. Relay 1; B Common
6. Relay 1; B NO
7. Relay 2; A -N/C-
8. Relay 2; A Common
9. Relay 2; A NO
10. Relay 2; B -N/C-
11. Relay 2; B Common
12. Relay 2; B NO
13. +24VDC
14. Relay #2 Coil
15. Relay #1 Coil
21· 2 21O-RY2 Relay Interrace AccessOlY

"'t-Z
w
i5t-
,,-0
",,,
ot-
uZc:i
Ow
wo o
"'
wwww
" 0: Z
t-w
"en
o ~
o
"t-z
>- -
:J 0
_
0 en
"~o:en
~-w
00:
a.
0: " a.
wo:J
'" " "'
r
~:~l
ot-"
'">- >-
'""' 0:
0:
;;:
.-> z "-
'"+ 0 0
~
! !!
0
.-0
-z
0_
oo
"'.-
o:!O
~L-r_-~-l
Figure 1, Schematic Diagram - 200/210-RY2 Relay Box.
210·RY2 Relay Interface Accessory 21- 3

21- 4 210-RY2 Relay Interrace AccessOlY

Chapter 22 .
210-Series Submixer Input Module
210-SM11
®
'C)
· . ~Cl
"". "" .
• 10
~o
• • ~Cl
'C)'. ~Cl
·
•
"". 10
Ck2
~o
• • ~Cl
'6'
·· ..
"".• 10
~Cl
CIt>
~o
• • ~Cl
.'C)'. ~Cl
CtI. •
•GAl.10
~o
• • ~Cl
,.. 1104/1
INTRODUCTION
The 210-SM11 Is a 7' module mountable In any accessory slot In a 210 console, It Is a 4 in x 1 out mic mixer sub-sys-
tem whose output may be connected to any mlc-Ievel or line-level input,
The balanced mic Inputs are sunable for any lo-z type microphone with a nominal -50 dBu level, A front panel
mounted pot Is provided for each of the 4 pre-amps for gain trim of 20 to 60dB, In addition, a front panel PWR switch
provides +48V phantom power for each mlc Input,
The lighted anernate action front panel ON switch adds the associated mlc signal to the composite output mix, All 4
ON/OFF swnches form a mute bus capable of being Jumpered by the Installer to mute the appropriate monitor system
In the console, For operator convenience, there Is an associated lighted CUE switch which is wired Into the console's
cue speaker system,
The Installation of the module Includes the mounting of a 4-posltlon connector bracket at the back base of the con-
sole, These connectors use the same MR pins and shells as are used in the rest of the console, All mic inputs, out-
puts, and muting selections are made wnh these connectors, '
22 · 2 2ID·Series SubmiJeer Input Modules

+48V 21O-SMll, SUB-MIXER MIC INPUT
""T:...o- + 48V GAIN
~ ~ (') ON <i'l~
!; - MIC MUTE LOGIC
~-c.I---- - - - -
r&t
MIC INPUT 1 ~UUO~

+48V CUE BUS
.T- 0 - + 48V GAIN ~ I
~ ~ (') ON <i'l:> I I ~ SUM OUT
~~~ ~~--~~~~~~
I¢L I I
~--1",-
X:oJ I I
MIC INPUT 2
V CUE
T
<i'l:>
~
I
---.J. H [.JV\I'~ +
V>---.----U
OUT
+48V t- I I
T- 0 - +48V GAIN --®

[ V>-----C
I ~-"-"'V'J\'~fV
' v-~ MIC AMP
~ ~ (') ON <i'l~ I I I" - OUT
. ~'C-+ I
r&t I
MIC INPUT
+48V
3
~~~J
J, I ~
SEE OPTIONS
FOR INPUT
:T.-o- + 48V GAIN " + OUT

~ ~ (') ,--I "~---C
!; ~ V
:> ~J\fV-~ AUX AMP
l V>-----C
'~
I "- - OUT
li-------------IV
MIC INPUT 4
Figure 1, 210·SMI Module Signal Flow Diagram.
210-Sc:ries Submixer Input Modules 22·3

The following Is a brief summary of the features and functions of the 21 D-Series Submixer
Input Module. This section Is Intended to familiarize the Service/Installation Technician
w"h the controls, as reference to same Is frequently made in the text.
[2J .6'
.... ~Cl
1. Gain . ~~
,
""
L2.J " .
Each Input on the SMI Module has hs own rotary gain control as a means of level setting rol ~o
w"hin the module. In real"y, " Is not a true level control and thereby can only be turned
completely off whh the On/Off pushbutton (#4).
.'C) ~C1
,....
,
2. CUE ""
When the CUE pushbutton Is pressed, the selected channel signal Is fed to the cue bus. " .
~o ~C1
The signals on the cue bus may be heard on the cue speaker or the headphones. This
slgnalls In a post gain, pre On/Off configuration. This Is an alternate action (push-push) il-
luminated sw"ch. When pressed once, the Internal LED Illuminates, indicating that the
6,..... ,iCl''''
'
CUE function Is enabled; when pressed again, the LED extinguishes, indicating that the ~o~C
• •
CUE function Is disabled.
.(t).. ~Cl
3. PWR
~
'
....
,
""
The toggle swhch labelled ·PWR· Is the Phantom Power enable switch, supplying
+ 48VDC to a condenser microphone, ff required.
• • ~1Cl
0
." .wn
4. Channel ON Pushbutton
The ON pushbutton, when pressed, illuminates, Indicating the channel's ON status. When
pressed ega In, h extinguishes, Indicating that that channel Is OFF. Figure 2, 21D-SMI
Module - Front Panel.
22 - 4 2ID-Series Submixcr Input Modules
"
R28
Figure 3, 210-SM11 Input Module Location Art.
210-Scries 5ubmixer Input Mod ules 22 · 5

INSTALLATION
General Information
This section consists of two parts: Connection of an existing 8MI Module and
retrotitting an 8MI Module Into an operational console.
To Introduce munlple mlcrophona signals Into a single Mono Input Module,

tirst , locate the connector bracket. This bracket Is located inside the console
against tha raar wall and holds tour lS-pin MR connactors which lead to tha
8MI Modula In quastlon. This bracket Is accassibla by lilting the metar turrat
cover.
l
lIj o....,t ~
of
10
Con fol ~
In,,~e
According to the Crimping Instruct/ons In Chapter 3, construct a cable w~h ap-
propriate connectors on one end for the microphones and w~h a lS-pin MR
J
connector on the other for connection to the Inputs at the 8MI Module. Pin as-
Signment may be found later In this chapter.
NOTE: The lS-pln 'MR' connectors are mounted such that Pl Is at the top at
the connector bracket, P2 follows, and so on. All four microphones connect to ' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
the P 1 connector while the output and the logic signals are handled by the P2 Figure 4, lS-Pin MR Connector
connector. P3 and P4 are not connected. Bracket.
There Is a series of 1.5' diameter access holes In the bottom of the console. The mlc cables may be run Into the con-
sole through the access hole nearest the connector bracket. The output from the SMI Module to the desired Input
Module, along wnh all power and logic connections, will have already been connected at the factory.
General Information
Normally, this module Is part of the original order, however, ~ one is desired in a console that is currently in operation,
or the usar wishes to reassign an existing module, the following section will supply stap-by-step installation instruc-
lions for same.
IMPORTANT: ~ la NOT recommended that any preliminary work (be done before the module and associated
peripherals are In hand, Thla will algnlflcantly reduce the chancea of error In calculation, both In the choice of
location of the module and of ~a .ssoclated hardware,
8upplled In tha 8Mllnstallatlon k~ Is: One 8MI Module (as per order), all connector cables, connector bracket(s), ap-
propriate mounting hardware, and extra MR connector shalls and pins.
A glvan 8MI Module comas wnh a complete wiring harnass (#19426) which terminates on one end wnh a 60-pin
edge connector for the module nsa~, and on the other w~h four (4) IS-pin MR connectors and Molex connactors of
varying pin count. The lengeh of the wiring harness Is determined by the user at the time at order. Two of the MR con-
nectors, PI and P2, sarve as Input connections to the 8MI Module. All connectors are labeled for ease In Identifica-
tion, Tha four MR connactors must be attached to the connector bracket sacurad to the insida of tha consola body.
Signals from outside will antar tha 8MI Modula through these lS-pin MR connactors (pin assignment for the input con-
nactors follows this section) .
The output of this module Is configured in a fashion similar to tha Inputs, In that the signal originates on the main
board of the module and terminates at the P2 connector. NOTE: Tha 8MI Modula may ba mounted In a variety of
placas and the output cable must be of sufficient length to reach ns destination module. For this reason, tha output
cable must be constructad by the user. This procedure will be described In the Installation Procedure section, Immedi-
ately following
22· 6 210 .Se~e, Submixer Input Modules

NOTE: Console power should be 'OFF' during the installation process.
To begin, find a suitable blank accessOlY space, preferably one near the destination Input module. Remove the blank
panel, setting the mounting screws aside for re-use. Attach the supplied cable harness (#19426) to the module's 60-
pin edge connector (PI) and feed the opposite end of the cable toward the Inside rear area of the console. Secure
the module In place with the above-mentioned mounting screws.
The next consideration Is a suitable location for the connector bracket. The SMI mating Interconnect cable term inates
on one end with a 50-pin edge connector for the module itse~, and on the other with four (4) IS-pin MR connectors
and four Molex connectors of valYlng pin count. Two of the MR connectors, PI and P2, serve as Input connections to
the SMI Module. P3 and P4 are not connected.
The bracket must be mounted Internally and may be placed virtually anywhere, provided the cables reach and it Isn't
in the way of any of the console 's internal components. When choosing a location for the bracket, be sure that the
meterbridge/overbridge and the module/motherboard assembly may be closed without Intelference. In addition,
sharp turns of the cables should be avoided. The best location for the connector bracket Is the Inside rear panel
of the console, mounted In a vertical position.
When a suitable location has been established, simply peel the protective backing from one side of the two-sided
tape (Included with Installation kit) and attach it securely to the wider side of the connector bracket. Now, remove the
backing from the opposite sulface of the tape and position the bracket· Inside the console. NOTE: The tape Included
with the Installation kit is extremely effective, so be sure the brackells in the proper place because removal 01 same Is
no picnic.
Once the bracket Is In place, the MR connectors (PI through P4) can be mounted. PI mounts In the top position, P2
in the next position, and so on. Guide the connectors through the openings In the bracket from the rear, pushing
them through until they 'click' Into place. NOTE: The MR connectors can be mounted In this bracket with Pin 1 at the
top or at the bottom. We recommend that they be installed such that Pin 1 is at the top.
There Is a series of 1.5' diameter access holes in the bottom of the console. The microphone cables may be run Into
the console through the access hole nearest the connector bracket.
Output Interconnection
The output cable must now be constructed for connection to the destination Input module. II should terminate on
each end with a IS-pin 'MR' connector (female shell wllh male pins) ; one for the SMI Module's output (P2) connector
and one for the destination module's input (A) connector. Use the Connector Pinouts section of this chapter and Fig-
ure 5 for assistance.
lifIthe module/motherboard assembly and lock it in the open position.
WARNINGII Be sure that the module/ motherboard assembly Is securely locked In the UP position. Serious In-
Referring to the console connector localion map, Chapter 3, Page 15, locate the 'A' Connector for the Input Module
position to which the SMI Module will be connected. If this module has been previously in use, the existing cable
must be removed. This must be replaced with the output connector from the SMI Module.
Remaining Connections
The various olher connections may now be made. With the module/motherboard assembly open and the Console
Connector Location map (Page 3-15) handy, connect PS (6-pin In-line Molex connector) to a convenient H connect or
on the module/motherboard assembly. Connect P6 (4-pln in-line Molex) to a convenient J connector; connect P9 (2-
pin In-line Molex) to the M connector found near the Channell A connector..
P6 appears as a bundle of 4 female MR-type pins. These are the main power connections which run to Ihe PGM 0
connector on the module/ motherboard assembly. They are Inserted into an existing MR shell according to Crimping
Instructions In Chapter 3.
21O-Sc rics Subm ixer Input Modul es 22 - 7

Each row of three pins on the PGM D connector is Identicat. Specific pins are named in Figure 5 (SMllnterconnect
Cable Drawing) ; however, any available pin WRh the appropriate signal may be used. The table below illustrates the
PGM D pin assignment.
PGM 0 Connector
3. -24V 2. +24V 1. Common

6. -24V 5. +24V 4. Common
9. -24V 8. +24V 7 . Common
12. - 24V II. +24V 10. Common
15. -24V 14. +24V 13. Common
The Console Connector Pinout sheet at the end of Chapter 3 will also be helpful In Identifying all signals on all connec-
tors.
Field Options
There Is one jumper option on the 2tO-SMI Module. Unlike the usual shorting plug configuration, this takes place be-
tween pins on the P2 MR connector on the wiring harness.
Depending upon the specific use of the SMI Module In your Installation, monRor muting may be desireable In the loca-
tion of the microphones. This option makes n possible to mute the monnors in eRher the Control Room, Studio A, or
Studio B whenever the SMI Module Is active.
A jumper must be constructed for this option. According to the Crimping Instructions In Chapter 3, crimp a male MR-
type pin to enher end of a single lead no more than two Inchesln length. Connect one end of the lead to Pin 12 of the
P2 connector and the other to the appropriate pin for the desired mute as follows:
Control Room Mute . . . . . . . . P2-12 to P2-15

Studio A Mute . P2-12 to P2-14
Studio B Mute . . . . . • • • . . . P2-12 to P2-13
22 · 8 210 ·Seriu Submixer Input Modules

Alignment Procedures
The only alignment on this module is the main output alignment. NOTE: All alignments are made at the factory and
should not require adjustment. If, however, a particular component In the clrcu~ry is replaced for any reason, such
adjustments may become necessary.
General Information
Test Equipment Required: Fluke Model 8020A 4-dig~ muUlmeter (or equivalent) and a Select Section Extender Card.
NOTE: Never remove or Install a module wnh the main power ON. This may resun In damage that will not be covered
in your warranty.
Alignment Procedure
The first step In this alignment Is to remove the module In question (main power OFF) , Install the Module Extender
Card, and plug the module onto the card. This will allow the technician to gain access to the trimpot wnhout Interrupt-
ing power to the module.
Introduce a balanced t kHz signal at -€OdB into an input. Set the gain on that channel to full and measure at User Con -
nector P1, across Pins 3 & 2, adjusting R28 (~necessary) for +4dB.
210-Series Submixer Input Modules 22 - 9

PI
olD PIN ORO PI
TWIN LEAF EOG£ CONN. USER CONN.
07J27,PINS 07J29 15 PIN MR, F1M
"'~N SHL~i 0 0~ EDGE

CONN.
,{I-------..
"'[" SHL~i 0 0~ P7
"'[,N
L SHL~~
+~ 0•
C ~79
J m
x·
L
CONN.
uSER
COHN.
BRI(T
~t
+~ 0 C~'~O: P5 P6 P9
L SHL~0--jL~f---------t~1t--j~
"'[,N CONN. CONN. CONN. CONN .
NOTE: LENGTHS AS REOU IRED

P2
USER CONN.
15 PIN MR, F/M
~ REO ~
+~MD-,or---~,-~~---~J +
.... e
IAIX BLK r,. - LINE LEVE~
OU1 -~ +4dBu NOM. I
L SHLO 'n-......'----"-I-H----"1""'11 SHLO ~ Mle MIX
RI ,R2 - 1(-2492
R) - K-0787
Rl I ; SHLD
2<.9K . ~~~.7' ~ +
~Ey{L
-52 d8u NO~
,T
,--:"Ri-{2,.-.J_ _-{~5 _
24.91(. ~ PS
MUT[ SYSTEM
A.NY MIC ON I 'H' MS CONN. .........
LOGIC~I-_ _ _"G"R"Y"WH,,"1'--_ _ _ _ _-I~ MOLEX a IN-LINE
[!]]_-,C"R~N_ _--1[ID CRM MUTE
JUMPER P2-12 TO
13,14, OR 15 Ii] YEL 00 SID A MUTE
P.
CUE SYSTEM
AS REQUIRED
' J' MB CONN.
IIlI Y£L(WHT III 51]) B MUTE
!.IOlEX .. IN-LINE
:::~~,n
v-----':~~~
r
cuE
-=--_---;;;;--_ _
iJ :gJ
~ SHlD~
ow -----'>J
\.7
SHlD P7 P8
6 PIN I.1OLEX PGM 0 p~ CONN.
IN-UNE CONN. I.1R FEMALE PINS
07088
+2<v ITif----'O:::.RC"-_M..;./-j'ITiI-'I;..."_-'OR=C_ _ _ _-j~
-t24V[IJ ORG 0 ORG 0
- 24VQ]
PlNI(
BlK
rn PINK
BlK
rn P9
!.lIe POWER +48V
'".( INPUT !.IS CONN.
C()I.jIAON@:j 0 QJ MOLEX 2 IN-LINE
-t4BV~ CRY UDI-__=CR~Y'___~22~C~A~.------f-CD
C~MON[IJ BLK [ID BlK CD FILENAME: A19426.0WG
20 GA. 20 GA.
SCHEMATI C DIAGRAM
I...i";.:G--j210-SMlI SYSTEM CABLE
,co \,I I REAR MOUNT MR. BRKT
5/ 19/92 I' or-L 88A194 2 6
Figure 5, 210·SM11 IntBrconnection Cable (#19426).
22 . 10 2I0·Series Submixer Input Modules Updated 5·22·92

210-SMI1 P1 Connector Pinouts
+10V 1 A +10V
+10V 2 B +10V
+48V 3 C +48V
+48V 4 0 +48V
COMMON 5 E COMMON
COMMON 6 F COMMON
+15V 7 H +15V
-15V 8 J -15V
Aux In 9 K -N/C-
AuxOUl(+) 10 L Aux OUl (-)
MicAudio OUl (+) 11 M Mic Audio OUl H
-N/C- 12 N -N/C-
-N/C- 13 p -N/C-
-N/C- 14 R -N/C-
-N/C- 15 s -N/C-
Mlc On Logic (+) 16 T Mlc On Logic (+)
-N/C- 17 u -N/C-
-N/C- 18 V -N/C-
-N/C- 19 w -N/C-
Cue Audio (+) 20 X Cue Audio (+)
Cue Logic (+) 21 Y Cue Logic (+)
-N/C- 22 Z -N/C-
-N/C- 23 a -N/C-
-N/C- 24 b -N/C-
-N/C- 25 c -N/C-
-N/C- 26 d -N/C-
-'-
Mic InpUll/5 (+) 27 e Mic InpUll/5 H
Mic InpUl 2/6 (+) 28 f Mic InpUl2/6 H
Mic InpUl3/7 (+) 29 h Mic InpUl 3/7 H
Mic InpUl4/8 (+) 30 J Mic InpUl4/8 (-)
Upda'ed 5-22-92 210-Series Submixer Input Modules 22· 11

.,
·1
22.12 2tO.Scries Submixerlnput Modules

HIe lIN OJ(
HIe GAIN HIe GAIN
rI ~~ r~~
(- HIC PD\oI£R
..0- HSV
9 9 ttIe Go\lN [FTlON
R!I1 ~
«
am Hle GAIN
~ ~
~ WJ +. R40
1.21< '<.>' +. R41
1.21< 1 lN4148
P3-2.3 /
~bK. ~&.. all ,<,,_2 :r17. ~'r.I1,. - S1
"
S2
a!16 , R17tl{J FRONT
1'.'24.5 lN0245
~.+ + lN4148 -.!'l' P3-1L. ~... I ElDAENT
,/Pl-. +~ RJ .\1
•• 2- 8.87_ P4-2.J ) I
+
l00uf 10 o ai" 7
5 3
• REAA
R~~
Hie iNPUT GAIN SET
e2 r¥100F _ INf'UT
II
EillIENT
, Pl-27 + R4
o
L2
6
ROJ P+-l /
, RA
SHLO (PI-25
l~F I 10
ClI<N
~.
CU£ 100
REVERSE AUDIO POTS
1 "!'~ CR4
--DB 40 dB GAIN RANGE
r~~
lN5245 lN5245 ~
HY-l CRI. to41C ()l R NUM. P HUM, SERIES R IS
HIt POVER
Hev
+. R4J
',21< I "-'- lN41-48 1 R17 P:\.. R19,R5J
-0-
~ 5.
~~ INPUT PRE-PATCH HYBRID CR20
2 R18 P6,7 R2e,RM
~a.. ~s.. "CR~

l R21 P9,10 R2J,RM
""_" AU2 U
1N-4148
, R22 Pl2, 13 R24.R58
co 1' . '
240
'.0245 ~. ~
Hie IIIPUT
+ ~P'-f +-
l00uF
R7
'r INf'UT
10 0 aiN
L3
T'ijOoF
- +n2B
~+
10
• ~P~I-~2~6~~ __ ~+1C7r-~~R8~~L~4~~~~-=,- +24V Pl-7,H
~
'
SHLO (Pl-0 1 l00uF "!'l10 0 ~6
aiN I
ClO
2K.
0 ~ + "UX OUT
13D---------------------------------------------++t--'P:>.1:::-L'-7-
14 D____________________________________________-++t--!:P'c:-:."'0'!-')], - AUX OUT + ISV

lN524.5 lN5'45 ~
PI-6; SHLO
~:49
..L 7
"UX IN "Pl-K
10f(. ~ 16 17 1 15 3D 19
c SEE INPUT OPTIONS

REF. R49. RSo. R:51. R:52 R481111'
10K. - +15 -15 +5
Ct.<:
-241,' P1-8.J 2
KIe GAIN HIe GAIN MIC !:It

-151,'
r~o •• r~~
Hie PO\I(R 9 9 .1uf
C2.5
~ -S +4ev ~ ;.tJ ~ :iJ ~. +. R44

1.21<
-
R40 CR21
_~~~-9~++~~~--~~2P~I:::-2~I~Y~
1.21< I -":". lN414t!
7
i
• CUE: LOGIC
i
'---t----'
~8.. :r ~~ P ~. so so H8V (3.4.e.o

I CR,
o•
.2OK.
Cll
'2'
' •• 45 IN 240
"I'!O
NO:
S!.;
I
-=
b.'i,.
f8.
r-[}--u--D--lj-Ll--t,.-DJ---i=J-KJ-n-,
b.3Ji,.
f8. "
IN4148
-
t-______-+-::;.~-+t_t--!:Pl!.:-:.!!I"!.JT'-7
CR22
+ HIe ON
t<JT£ LJlGIC
+48V
+
Pl-h +i: Rn LS +:5 3 29 26 16 'v' 'is -,.l.,o----______________-' 7815
HIe IHPUT l00..F 10 0 GiN :~t;~ ~:..ur GAIN SET ey- +241,' f"~!.:-~I".2.~A.>.!.!JR0JO~--T"--_..!i + IS""
3 .';',2 RH .1,6. T -r., 6 un.rT'l---------------' 2.2 Lwe
l00uF I~~ 0;,~ S!.~ r' • ¢ ;:'CJQ I ~NICONe

-b ,.5240 '.~245 -= 4 .J., +it' +5 [
HIC PO\iER
HY-2 47uf R46 r ~o 'r' NOTES:
-0- +48V +·--~'=tt~t=t1
1.21< I - AU RESlST.A.NCE VAlUES ARE IN aiMS. EXCEPT AS MARKED
- AU. CAPA-CrANCE VALUES ARE IN WlatOfARADS. DaFT AS ~
~~
_ 57 - PfN NUUBERS SEPAAArro BY COWwAS ARE CONNECTED TOCE1M£R
INPUT PRE-PATCH HYBRID - SHADED CONTACT ry 0105 SWlTOi IS CLOSED 'lllllHEN ca.lTRQ. IS I-IG'H
- • IS A 1S METAl ntJ.I RESlSTOR
~6il. ~1;. -
-
.. IS A 51; STAQ(£D f1U,t CAPA-alOR
Of'S ARE IN414e 0100[5 EXCEPT AS wAAKED
20, - RS's AA£ 2% S1P RESSlOR NE'1"WCfU(S
- Jt[)'S ARE .IX DIP R£.SISTOR NEl"t«JRKS
':~
13 'T'1---------------------------------------------------~P~I-~"~;'+ ~c AUDro
lIN( IJJTPUl
- /ClN[
~U[Dmr~O~ijcs
14 frl------------------------------------------------E~~-~lIt;), / _ fiCIC AUDIO ~
OJ2 SCZlOSMJ
22 [~----------·1rr----~~~~·~~--------------------------~P~I-~I~;~v7'
"} ~e ruM _
1 10 3ll
" lei. 1
t«lT(, Ll-{..nnrsClo.cl3.Cl:5.0B.C20
USED eM... Y m KlGt Rt" ONtRl:H£HT
... . T - .,
47uE
- OeG
0""
SCHEMA TIC DIAGRAM
210-SMIl. MIC INPUT FOR
" 00; SUBMIXER. CH.1-4
3/21/'R 'j <»,_,_ 88BOO878

Chapter 23
210-Series Phantom Power Supply -
210-PPS
INTRODUCTION
An optionat plug-In accessory card {210-PPS} is available for use with the PS-BO Power Supply.
Field installation of the 210-PPS may be accomplished easily within the chassis of the PS-60 Power Supply.
Installation
First , turn oN the supply and remove the cabling to the unit. Remove the chassis from the equipment rack and move it
to a suitable work area.
Remove the bottom cover of the supply. Inside, note the existance of a 5-pin in-line connector, and four {4} mounting
holes In the adjacent end panel of the chassis. Snap the nyton circuit board standoNs into the four holes with the long
pin facing into the power supply. Snap the board onto the standoHs and plug the connector onto the board, taking
care to note the polarity of the pins.
All other necessary wiring is already installed in the PS-60; installation is complete.
Connector 1 Pinout
1. 55VAC Input
2. -N/C-
3. reg . 48V Output
4. reg . 48V Output
5. 55VAC Input
210-PPS Parts List
Descrtption . . . , . . . Part No, Quantity
Pin MLX Female . · 07003 .3

Pin MLX Male .. . . . . . . · 07004 · 1
Conn MLX Recpt . .. .. . · 07036 1
PS 48V Regulator Assy{Mic} . 40667 · 1
(Assembly Includes:)
Res Carb Film 2.7K 2W 5% · M-272 .

Cap Etect 25flF 50V NA · 00031 · 1
Cap Elect . tt<;uF 150V NA · 00059 ·1
Conn MLX 5-Pin · 07039 · 1
PCB 48V Reg Board · 12089 1
Diode 1N4004 . . . 16039 . 4
Diode Zener 1N4752 · 16085 1
Diode Zener 1N5359 · 16127 .2
Xstr Power MJE3055T 16190 · 1
IC Voltage Reg. MC78M24CT 16195 1
Nylon Ckt Bd Support · 17034 . 4
Headsink for Plast Pwr Xstr .. . 24198-02 .2
23·2 210-PPS Phantom Power Supply

0
""l' ~ "1
/ -""'
UN
I
/1'
l\
en
r--n>
DIf)<r
""'
-zOJ
0;-
-)
(J)
"':l1>
0"",,,"
"'L- C;ZCU
0 ...
u
C\J
(\J ,-
)
U
',---
"
'-;:;"'"
, If) N
0 ~>
r-
0' r,,"M
ZM
0
""'
""'0
"1
-
0 ....,
W
~:2
rdJ
oF: 3
- ·OJ
IfA~
IV
a
""'
-'-
ao
-a
~I
I\
nO
""0 0
,,"0
""
0,," 0,,"
-z
D-
- Z
O-
I
_0
0 "" NO
""
0
0,," a""
-Z
-Z
D- O -
J ,1/
If)
Figure 1, 210-PPS Schematic Diagram,

DWG #88AOO318-01
21 0-PPS Phantom Power Supply 23 - 3

This Page Intentionally Left Blank.
23 - 4 2I0·PPS Phantom Power Supply

Chapter 24
PS-60 Power Supply
and
PSI-60 Power Supply Isolator
PS-60 Power Supply
The Model PS-60 Power Supply Is designed to mount In a standard 19-inch equipmenl rack, and requires three verti-
cal rack spaces (5.25'). As the 210-Sorles Consoles feature regulation on each module, the PS-60 supplies the con-
sole whh unregulated ±24VDC, reducing ventilation requirements.
An optional PSI-60 (Power Supply Isolator) Is available for redundant powering requ irements. An optional 210-PPS
(Phantom Power Supply) card to supply 48VDC may also be ordered. Documentation for the PSI-60 may be found
later in this chapter; documentation for the 210-PPS may be found in Chapter 23.
Prior to installing the PS-60, the manner of system grounding must be determined (see Grounding in Chapter 3, Sys-
tem Installation) . If the power ground of the PS-60 Is to be opened, reter to Paragraph 2 on Page 3 - B under Installing
the Power Supply.
The PS-60 Is factory-configured for 11SVAC operation. If 230VAC operation is desired, refer to Paragraphs 3 and 4 on
Page 3 - B under Installing the Power Supply.
PS-60 Specifications
INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS : 110/220VAC (Internal Jumper Selectable) :
50/60 Hz
OUTPUT: ±24VDC (Nominal); 3A (Max.)
Optional Phantom Power Supply (200/210 PPS) :
+48VDC (Nominal); .1A (Max.)
J4 Connector (to Console or Optional PSI-60).
1. Common
2. +24VDC
3. (- )24VDC
4. Common
5. +24VDC
6. (-)24VDC
7. Common
8. +24VDC
9. (-)24VDC
to. -N/C-
11 . Common
12. 48V Phantom Power Supply'
13. -N/C-
t4 -N/C-
15. 48V Phantom Power Supply'
- (Optional 210-PPS Card Required)
24 · 2 rS-60 Power Supply & PSI-60 Isolator

PS-60 POWER SUPPLY PARTS LIST
Description . .. . . . . . ... . Part No, Aefll
Circutt Breaker, 2A, 1) , 05174 ' CBl
Transformer, Power , 09019 ' Tl
Rectifier, Bridge · 16003 · BRI
Resistor, Carbon, l00W, .25W.,5% . · El01 · Rl

Resistor, Carbon, l00W, .25W.,5% . · El0l .R2
Resistor, Carbon, 4.7kW,. 25W.,5% , E472 , R3
Resistor, Carbon, 4.7kW, .25W.,5% · E472 , R4
Capacttor, Ceramic Disk, .II'F, 600V · 00051 · Cl

Capacttor, Ceramic Disk, .1I'F, 600V · 00051 .C2
Capacttor, Electrolyttc, 9OOOI'F, 50V ,00022 · C3
Capacttor, Electrolyttc, 9OOOI'F, 50V ,00022 . C4
Light-Emitting Diode, Red , .. 16029 · LEDl
PS-60 Power Supply & rSi.-60 Isolator 24·3

PS/-60
The Audnronics PSI-60 provides tor automatic swnching between redundant power supplies. Installation instructions
tor the PS-60 will be slightly a~ered trom standard procedures if two supplies and the PSI-60 are used.
Follow the checkout procedure tor each supply as described under the installation instructions tor the PS-60 in Chap-
ter 3. The tirsl PS-60 should be rack mounted in the desired location, the PSI-60 Is designed to be 'sandwiched' be-
tween the two supplies; upon mounti ng the PSI-60, the second PS-60 may be added to the rack .
The ' piglail" connections trom the rear at the PSI-60 plug into the PS-60 output connectors wHh the supply cable to
the console being plugged Into the connector mounted in the rear panel ot the PSI-SO.
Operation 01 the PSI-SO may be verified by turning on both supplies. The plus (+) and minus (-) LED indicators tor
each supply should illumlnale. While monnoring the output ot the PSI-60 accessory terminals, turn oft one ot the sup-
plies. Little or no change should occur In the output vo~age . Turn the supply back on and repeat wHh the other supp-
ly. Please note that the PSI-60 must be tested wHh a dummy load or while wired to the console.
The PSI-60 also mon~ors the optional4BVDC Phantom Power Supply, it present. In the event ot a tailure in the 4BV
supply, the PSI-60 will change over the 4BV supplies independently ot the ±24VDC supply.
Any tau~ conditions (short or overload) will cause both power supplies to shut down via the ir panel-mounted circuit
breaker/power swnches. Also note that it there is no load on the power supply, the discharge time will be quite
lengthy.
24 - 4 PS-6Q Power Supply & PSI-60 Isolator

~G~ LED I ~G~LED 2
---++-t-t~ Rl R2
/" • 47K 4.7K
PS/I @@7"')\"4'\{'1" CRl ~
CONNEC TOR
~9J 8)(5 2 r-'
l~cl'p~~~
(FRONT VIEIJ'
+24 ----,
.Ace. CONN
t t C "
II CR2
TO CONSOLE
(REAR VIE"" -24 ---.J
+24 ----,
@@ 7)(4 l' -'" " J -FJ C "
~~~}\S 2 Fl ~ -24 ---.J
,~~2)~'4'~ \~~P ~~ +24 ----,
L-----------------+------~r_------~~--_t--------1Il II F2
n
~
C
-24 ---.J
"
CR5 3 AMP
S-B
CR6
~~LED 3 ~~LED 4
R3 R4
::..c::: • 47K 4 . 7K _
PS/2
CONNECTOR
@Qgl1 7)( 4 J5. CR3 ..:"'" ~lQl\fii'OO
G]C 6)\5 2
1~!WlO«::~
(Fs)~(9')\ ..'",-t-S-C-HE-M-A~n:-C::-::O::-:I
I.IWS
<FRONT VIEW'
6 3
( ) b• A'
' I' Y I PSI-50 POWER GRAM
t 11 L CR'
I
TRANSFER UNITT
;,....... '"I ~OF -!..- 88Boe0312-01

This Page Intentionally Left Blank.
Appendix A
210-Series Overbridge Installation
INTRODUCTION
If ordered, the overbridge section of your 21 O-Series Console has been removed for shipping. The following text will
assist in the mounting of the overbridge to the console.
The overbridge is removed from the console and is usually shipped in a separate carton. The following instructions
will explain how to mount the physical overbridge as well as give soma generic instructions for cable connection.
More specific information concerning cable connection may be found In the chapters concerning the specific over-
bridge modules.
NOTE: It is strongly advised that at least two people be used whenever any operation involving the overbrldge is per-
formed. This Includes installation of the bridge and any later operations where the bridge must be held open. See
'WARNING' inside overbrldge.
The only tool needed for this installation is a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
A . 2 21D-Series Overbridge Installatio n

Physical Installation of Overbridge
The first step Is to attach the overbridge to the console Itself. Because of the weight and center of balance of the over-
bridge, It is recommended that two persons be involved in this procedure, one to hold the overbrldge from the rear
while the other lines it up with the frame from the front of the console.
At the hinge points on the overbridge are spring pins. Align the hinges with the receptacles on the main body of the
console, pull the spring pins Inward and, when they line up with the holes in the frame, simply let go of the pins. The
overbrldge Is now In place. IMPORTANT: DO NOT ALLOW THE OVERBRIDGE TO FALL PAST ITS BALANCE POINT
INTO THE FULLY OPEN POSITION. ITS WEIGHT MAY CAUSE IT TO SLIP OUT OF THE HINGES IF ALLOWED TO
FALL INTO THIS POSITION, CAUSING DAMAGE THAT WILL NOT BE COVERED IN YOUR WARRANTY. When the
overbridge is opened for any reason, it is strongly advised that it be held upright or gently laid open.
Securing Cables
The cables must now be secured. Cable interconnection will vary depending upon the modules present in the over-
bridge. Many of these module connect to the main console via 15-pin MR connectors. In most cases, these connec-
tors mount into a 'user connector bracket' mounted agaInst inside rear panel of the maIn console. The connectors are
clearly marked and their counterparts In the console, are also marked, so this should be a simple procedure.
The MR connectors from a given overbrldge module will snap Into the above-mentioned connector bracket They are
usually labeled P1, P2, etc., and it is advised that they be inserted into the bracket In order, P1 on top, and so on. The
counterparts to these connectors may now be joined to them. In most cases, this is all that is required. NOTE:
Depending on the number of modules in your overbridge, there may be several user connector brackets. It Is best to
use the bracket closest to the overbridge module in each case. Whenever possible, the bracket will be mounted
directly below its intended module.
Those overbridge modules that require power will receive same by way of 6-pin Molex In-line connectors. These are
polarized so that no error in connection can be made. As above, they will be clearly marked as will their counterparts
inside the console.
l
Mounts to Inside
of Console
..... -~
J
Figure 1, User Connector Bracket.
2tD-Series Overbridge Installation A - 3

A - 4 2ID-Series Overbridge Installation

Appendix B
210-Series Cable Diagrams
'"
INTRODUCTION
This appendix contains information concerning the various interconnection cables, both factory-supplied and user-
constructed, required in the 21 D-Series Console System.
All factory-supplied cables are clearly labelled with their destination connectors' names, so matching Is easily ac-
complished.
B -2 210-Series Cable Diagrams

10 PIN .1 CC 10 PIN .1CC
AMP IDC AMP IDC
FEMALE ITMALE
D7240 D7240
OJ I!]
rn ~
QJ--_ .__ . _---- - @]
[I] [I]
!]] l1J
@] ill
[2] G.J
lID I}]
I]] -121
I!] ill
r 5 IN.
~
'-
22 GA. WIRE
U
sc ...... c· ®
(§l9E~p(;!,is~rT~N~~£~~ i[1E·.
NONE
:D."""'~
RCG
[N(;JNC(R'
RCG SCHEM ATIC DIAGRAM

III'NIO\,ICD- 210-MSHP PCB ]NTER-
CONNECT CABLE
IATC·
7/18/90 'j' OF_l_ 1 19281

L -_ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .. __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _--'
21O-Series Cable Diagrams B-3

JJ
'"
-
"
'":"
~
"
30 PIli: ORO
[IN::: CONN .
07300
P'
USER CONN.
lS PIN MR. f 1M
P'
30 PIN ORO
EDGE CONN.
07300
P2
USER CONN.
15 PIN t.lR. F /~
:::.
~
~
:)
~
".
iD
r
LT IN
L
+~
SHL~~ U
~ ~
u~
~
t SHL~~iJ---A--O---A--O~
r
EOG,r~ --.r
L SHL~i 0 0~
:J r +~ ~ ~ ~
SHL~~ U U~m
0;' RT IN
y'
""<il LTC CONN. I '\
'3
r
'" r
.~ ~ ~
+~
~ 1\
~
nm
~
SH':~) u~
LT IN A R"N ~
L SHL~§ \1 \J ~ -r-
I ~~::r
2
L ,
r IT:; x"
"r;;. :~ 0 ~
.0,
RT IN
~ ~3
_17
r..
il l! Oil (\ -.Lu::'::t r-!"': CONN
L SHLDQ!l \ 1
2
~) I'
\ I
~
11 0; \1 IIQ) ~ 6RKT '
L SH,j)~
r
/1
PGIII D
e
-+~ ~l ~
t SHL~5 0 0~
CONN.
,
SHLO~ h~
IT IN '----
11 8
L \
p,
30 ?If\ ORO
P'
USER CONN.
P'
30 PIN ORO
P.
USER CONN.
EOG::: CONN . 15 PIN MR. F/M EDC::: CONN. 15 PIN MR. F /~
~Nf~la :5 0
07JOO
r ~
u~
.""'r-f~'I--------'r-f~\--~ 07300 "
HE;~Pfa:~~Lo:J) U~ L SHLO RED/""' m

+~~ ~ TB~
I
RT OUT
HEADPHON~S
:.:=1)1 \I
A
5
LOGIC
IN?~S MUTEI[!]
PUR/WHT [ID
L SHLO@ I. Pl 6 PIN MOLEX P5
"~ ~~~~:1) 0~
lO PIN ORO IN-LINE CONN. PCM 0 P'NR CONN .
EDGE CONN. MR F"EI.1AL( PINS
1"~"/f
r
+24V
+=
07300 RED
RED
f
4
REO
REO
07089
~m .
FILENAME: A19282.0WG
L
~ I "'"'
"~ ~~:HL::/O 0~
@\aUditranicS,inc.
r + PUR PUR
-~ PUR~ ~m "" wt,,/"HI$, . .... s. ....
Tt_u~n: t
- 24V PUR
L SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
~
t RC~
r - BLK BLK ,.,...- 200-MSHP, USER
NOTE: LENGlH AS REQUiRED

COMMON
L
~~ BLK ~ BLK ~m ;;26/90 Il
CONNECTION CABLE
Dr .2....119282
ALL WIRES 22 GUACE
- . -_._-_.
PI PI
30 PIN DRO USER CONN.
EDGE CONN. 15 PIN MR,F 1M
07300
OllG
I I
MIC 1
ONiIJ IlJ
C ORG/WHT
H L OFF IT] I]]
BRN
0
I ON[±] ~ -',l
N MIC 2 BRNiWHT Y"
ill
~
L OFF [}]
I GRN EDGE
0 r ON ill ffil CONN .
F MIC 3 GRNiWHT
F OFF~ [I)
I
L
I ON[ID
BLU
OJ] 'i.:.f-.
N MIC 4
T
et
BLU/wHT
P
U L OFF 0 [j]
T YEL
S
I ONITQ}- IDl X"
L
MIC 5
OFF [I)----
YEL,IWII r
@ _L ® USER
CONN.
L
PI P2
e BRKT
30 PIN DRO
EDGE CONN .
07300
GRY
USER CONN.
15 PIN MR, F 1M
PGM D
CONN. e
MIC 1~ [}]
I
CHAN,
MIC 21±2J
GRy/WHT
BLK/WHT
ill
START MIC 3§] [gJ
OUTPUTS PUR/WHT
MIC4~ [j]
L MIC5~
RED/WHT
~
PI
30 PIN ORO 6 PIN MOLEX P2
EDGE CONN. IN-LINE CONN, PGM 0 PWR CONN,
07300 M/F F1M MR FEMALE PINS
RED
~---.!.'.'="------1IT]411 - - - - - - - - -
I
+~
07089
+24V
L + 56
RED
[±] ~~
BLK
f.--~~---Q}I--- -.--- -
~~---=--~0
I
COMMON
L
BLK
~[±]
FILENAME: A 19283,O,WG
NONE
JiiiW; ---
peG
NOTE: LENGTH AS REOUIRED
ALL WIRE IS 22 GAUGE. ReG SCHEMAT IC DIAGRAM
""_=_"",'-----1 200-MCP, USER
CONNECTION CABLE
7/i'0/<10
210-Series Cable Diagrams B - 5

P1 C CONN .
USER CONN. INPUT POSITIONS
15 PIN MR , M/F 15 PIN MR, M/F
,-
~3
I OFF[Ij
C MIC 1 111
ON [}] - -..- - . ...
H L
,-
~3p
0 OFF@]
N MIC 2
L ONW
/
,-
~3p
0 OFF@]
F MIC 3
F ONi1l
4
L
I
N
P
U
T
MIC
,-
L
,-
OFF[DJ
ON~ ~ 3#4
~3#5
OFF[j]
S MIC 5
L L ONij]
P2 C CON N.
USER CONN . INPUT POSITIONS
I MIC 1[}] @]MIS # I

CHAN .
START MIC 2 / I l - - @]MIS # 2
OUTPUTS
L
MIC 3[IJ---- ---
MIC 4 ~--.---.
MIC S[j]
@]MIS
@]MIS
@]MIS
# 3
#
#
4
5
~"
-,- <t12E~.2,istr.£.~jSc;,~: i~.cA

NONE
"\.IS
NOTE: LENGTH AS REOUIRED fJlGl>ltt<
ALL WIRE IS 22 GAUGE. SCHEMATIC DI AGRA M

ReG
_l(I\I[l.
210-MCP LOGIC INTER-
CONNECTION CABLE
.......
12/11/90 'I ' or_I_. 1 Filename: MCPLO GIC
11 . 11 ?10·SnriflCj r:nhln rJiArymms

P1 P1
30 PIN ORO USER CONN.
EDGE CONN. 15 PIN MR, riM
07300
,-
SHL~~ 8 ] ~
MIC IN
L
,-
SHL:~ 8 E
MIC IN
2
L
,-
~L~[D O-@
MIC IN
-r,,,,,,
3
L .!..-.QJ
,-
SHL~I 8 ~j -~J~
MIC IN y"
4
L L-[§I
EDGE
CONN. ~
5
,-
MIC IN
L
+~
SHL~~
8 e @
--I"I
-li:iJ
-, ~I-
,-I_--
r
P1 P2 X" ®
,-
30 PIN ORO
EDGE CONN.
USER cor'lN .
15 PIN MR, F1M
l ® USER
CONN.
o~ 6J BRKT
SHL~EO e
MIC PGM 0
OUT CONN.
L -'-cD '----
P1
30 PIN ORO 6 PIN MOLEX
PS
EDGE CONN. IN-LINE CONN.
PGM 0 PWR CONN.
07300 MR FEMALE PINS
,- RED M/F~F/M RED 07089
+24V
L
,- :=
C~
RED
BLK
I}]
RED
BLK
~m NOTE; LENGTH AS REOUIRED
ALL WIRES 22 GUAGE
COMMON
L cl@ BLK
[}J
BLK ~QJ
FILENAME: A192B4.DWG
®
NONE
ReG
(I
~ Qud itroni cs ,inc.
I<.IEMJ'>HlS. TENNESSEE. U . S . ....
RCG SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

J-,_~.:........j 21O-MCMP, USER
CO NNECTION CA BLE
.~
12113/90 _,_ or_'_ 19284
210-Series Cable Diagrams B - 7

CONSOLE MICROPHONE IN PUT
21O-MCMP CONNECTOR " A"
CONNECTOR P2 210-MIS , 'A' OR '8' INPUT
I
MIC
OUT
+~
SHL~ciJ
j 0 ~~HLD
[I] + "I
MIC
INPUT
L J
B - 8 210-Series Cable Diagrams

P1
210- TEL
15 PIN MR , F1M
~ ----------- - - ------ ------- ] l

-L; PGM "c" CONNECTOR
IS- - PI N MR. F1M
~8
7
lE ~-
8 m
9 v ~ -N/C-
10 [ill
11 [i]
12 v rr]-
COMMON 13 13
+2 4VOC ij] --- --- .._" .- ---- ~J

-24VOC [j] - --- --- -----[ill
1 AUD "C'.CONNECTOR
15-PIN MR, F1M
8
'--------- Id--m
- ---U=l
u ....[· ®
Ci19E~pc;j,ist 2,QJ£ii:: i~.cA·

NONE
~,-
MVS rT
_.
Co.c.lltt[IIo
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
210-T EL, PI USER
ClJNNECT ION CABLE
- -- -
.Alt·
,,"
12/1S/90 __ 1__ DF_I_
I Filename: TEL - Pl
21O-Series Cabls Diagrams B - 9

P2
210- TEL
15 PIN MR, F/M
OJ 0 COMMON
[IJ 0 CUE LOGIC
rn 0 MIC MUTE LOGIC
~0 00 CUE AUDIO SUM
~ 0 ON SWITCH LOGIC
[Ih
~-~ -
0-0 MIC 1 AUD IO
~0 00 MIC 2 AUDIO
llil -N/C-
ITlI 0
Ij] 0 -
0 MIC 3 AUDIO
I8J --- -
0 COMMON
Ii] 0 DUMP LOGIC
sc ..... [· ®
@l2E~p~,ist r,~N~J£~: i~\CA·.

NONE
DRWNo
MWS
- .. - ..
DIGlf.c[~.
_., _.._-- - - - _ .
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
""'PROV(D- 210- TEL, P2 USER
CONNECTION CABLE
MH·
12/18/90 'I' OF_I I Filename: TEL-P2
n 1n ?1()·Snrlor: r:nh{n niAqrams

Auditronics 210-Series Console System Service and Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Auditronics 210-Series Console System Service and Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

210-SERIES

This manual should be read in its entirety before

HERE'S WHAT YOU'LL FIND INSIDE THIS MANUAL .. , . 1-4

ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SPECIFICATIONS .2-4

Stereo Line Input .. .... .. . .. . .... . .......... . .

Mono Microphone Input · .2·4

Stereo Program, Stereo Audition and Mono Outputs .2·4

Stereo Control Room and Studio Monitor Outputs · .2 - 4

Stereo Headphone Output · .2·4

Cue Output . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .•• • . . . . . 2 - 4

Mains Requirement . · .2·5

SERVICE AND REPAIR . . . • . . . 2·6

Auditronics, Inc. Service and Repair Policy ... .2 - 6

Standard Spare Pans Kn .2 - 9

Power Supply Grounds .3 - 3

DIMENSIONS FOR CUTOUTS .3 - 4

210·6 (6·lnput Configuration) . .3 - 4

210-12 (12-lnput Configuration) .....3 - 4

210·18 (18·lnput Configuration) · .3 - 4

210·24 (24·lnput Configuration) .3 - 4

Figure 1, 210-Series Dimensions and Cutout Information. .3 - 5

CRIMPING INSTRUCTIONS · 3-6

INSTALLING THE MAINFRAME · 3-7

INSTALLtNG THE POWER SUPPLY · 3-8

Console to Power Supply Interconnection · .3 - 8

WIRING PROCEDURE . . , . .. . ... .. , .. ... . . . . . .. . ... . .. . . . .. . .

LINE-LEVEL INTERCONNECTION ......... . · 3 - 11

Requ ired Tools . .. . . .3- 11

Connec1ion of Audio Signals . · 3 - 12

Power Ampl~ier Interconnec1ion . 3-12

Main Output Interconnec1ion · 3 - 13

Insert Points: . . . . . .3- 14

Figure 2, 21O-Series Console Connector Location Map. · . 3 - 15

Figure 3, 21 O-Series System Block Diagram. · . 3 - 16

Figure 1, Microphone Input Module Signal Flow. . . . • • • •• , , , , , . . , . . . , . . . , .4 - 3

CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW · .4 - 4

2. Output Ass ign Selectors . , .4 - 4

3 . Pan ." ...... . . . , ,4 - 4

5. Module ON/OFF . . . . . . . , . . . , . • •• ••••• • • • • • , . . , . , . . . . . . . , .4 - 4

Figure 2, 210-MIS Module Front Panel. . , , , . . ... 4 · 4

AUDIO AND LOGIC SIGNALS . . . . 4- 5

Audio Inputs . 4-5

Audio Outputs . 4-5

Logic Inputs . . 4-6

Logic Outputs . 4-6

Figure 3, 21 O-MLI Mic Module Component Locallon Map. .4 - 7

FIELD OPTIONS . . , , . · . 4-B

DIP Sw~ch Configuration · .4 - B

Shoning Plug Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . •• . , , • . , • , , • • · .4 - 8

Phantom Power Connection · .4 - 8

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES , , 4-9

Microphone Gain Adjustment .4 - 9

Figure 1, Stereo Line Input Module Signal Flow. . . • . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . , . . . . .. . . . . .5 - 3

CONTROL AND PUSHBUTTON OVERVIEW , .. . , , . , , , , . . . , . , , . , , , , , , ., "" " 5-4

1. Input Select . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . • .. ••• • • • , •• , . . , . . . .. . . . . .5 - 4

2. Output Assign Selectors ..... . .5 - 4

3. Mode Select Sw~ch (SLI Module) .5 - 4

3a. Balance (not shown - SLB Module only) ... 5 - 4

Figure 2, 210·SLI Module Front Panel. .5 - 4

AUDIO AND LOGIC SIGNALS , 5-5

Audio Signals .......... . .5 - 5

Audio Inputs - Audio Ouptuts . 5-5

Logic Inputs - Logic Outputs · 5-6

Figure 3, 210 SlI/SLB Module Component Location Map. .5 -7

4. Control Room Level and DIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . __ . . . . . . . . . .6 - 4